ML16034A033

Quality Assurance Topical Report (QATR) NO-AA-10, Revision 90

ML16034A033
Person / Time
Site:	Three Mile Island
Issue date:	01/20/2016
From:	Ice G Exelon Generation Co
To:	Document Control Desk, Office of Nuclear Reactor Regulation
References
NO-AA-10, Rev. 90
Download: ML16034A033 (151)

Text

PASSPORT DOCUMENT To  : *WTOL DESK Facility  : TMI Department: TRANSMITTAL Address From Address TMI-RM Records Management Exelon Nuclear Attention: Records Manager 111liiill Page: 1 I/l I i lNi1 TMI Station City MIDDLETOWN State: PA Postal Code: 17057 Country UNITED STATES Email Contact 0000102839 Date/Time Title  : 0/2 /21 9:5Tasmital Group Id:

Total Items: 00001 Trans No.  : 000678031 Item Facility Type Sub Document Number Sheet Doc Status Revision Doc Date Copy # Media Cpys

• 0001 TMI PROC NSP ACTIVE 090 DCl H3 01 Marked (*) documents require your acknowledgement.

Acknowledgement Date Sintue Signature:

If a document was not received or is no longer required check the response below and return to sender.

I Documents noted above not received (identify those not received).

I no longer require distribution of these documents (identify those no longer required).

Date: ____________ Signature:______ ___________________

GENERAL CONTROLLED COPY - VERIFY BEFORE USE Exelon Generation Company, LLC QUALITY ASSURANCE TOPICAL REPORT (QATR)

NO-AA-1 0 Revision 90 I

Exelon Nuclear Corporate Headquarters 4300 Winfield Road Warrenville, IL 60555

This Page Intentionally Left Blank Standard Quality Assurance Topical Report (NO-AA-I1O) - Revision 90 Transmittal and Summary of Changes To: All Site Document Control Centers These changes are approved, _December 18, 2015, with site and corporate implementation on January 25. 2016.

The Quality Assurance Topical Report (QATR) has been revised to:

• Clarify the reporting relationship for the Management Position responsible for Licensing and Regulatory Affairs.

• Re-organized the corporate and site assessment functions from Nuclear Oversight to the Organizational Effectiveness and Integrated Performance Assessment group.

• "Clarify that the audit function is credited with meeting the appendix B requirements.

• Include Clinton Station ISFSl requirements.

These changes have been reviewed in accordance with 10QCFR50.54 (a) and did not reduce Exelon's commitments previously approved by the NRC. (Ref. AT 680087-56 and 57 for supporting 50.54(a) evaluations). This revision to the QATR will be submitted to the NRC for post implementation review as tracked by Action Tracking Number 95188-09.

The specific changes are described as follows:

Table of Contents o Updated to coincide with the current revision.

Chapter 1 (Organization) o Section 2.2.3 was revised to include a description for the management position responsible for Regulatory Affairs and General Counsel.

o Section 2.2.3.1 was revised to clarify the reporting relationship for the management position responsible for Licensing and Regulatory Affairs.

o Section 2.2.4.5 was revised to include a description for the management position responsible for Organizational Effectiveness and Integrated Performance Assessment and defines the responsibility for fleet assessments.

o Section 2.2.4.6 was revised to re-organize the corporate and site assessment functions from Nuclear Oversight to the Organizational Effectiveness and Integrated Performance Assessment group a Section 2.2.4.6.A was revised to re-organize the reporting relationship for Quality Verification and Employee Concerns from the site NOS organization to the corporate NOS organization.

Page 1 of 3

Standard Quality Assurance Topical Report (NO-AA- 10) - Revision 90 Transmittal and Summary of Changes o Section 2.3.6 was revised to define the site position responsible for assessment activities.

o Section 2.3.7 was revised to define the site position responsible for Performance Improvement.

o Section 2.4 was revised to clarify that PORO is part of the three-tiered approach for accomplishing oversight of safety.

Chapter 18 (AssessmentslAudits) o Entire chapter 18 was revised to clarify that Audits are credited with meeting our Appendix B and NQA-1 Requirements o Section 1 was revised to clarify audits are performed in accordance with NQA-I.

o Section 2.1.1 B was revised to clarify that audits of Emergency Preparedness and Security are not subject to an extension.

o Section 2.1.1 was revised to clarify scheduling for Fleet Assessments.

o Section 2.1 .5.B was revised to define the reporting and follow-up requirements for Fleet Assessments.

o Section 2.2 was revised to clarify that vendors are audited, not assessed.

o Section 2.3 was revised to clarify that the independent review of the status and adequacy of the QAP is an audit.

Appendix A (Augmented Quality) o Section 2.5 was revised to include Calvert Cliffs and Nine Mile Point 1 and 2 within the Augmented Quality requirements for Station Blackout.

o Section 2.8.2 was revised to add the ISFSI requirements for Clinton Station.

Appendix C (Codes, Standards, and Guides) o Grammatical corrections were made throughout the entire Appendix.

o Section 1.3.4.18 b was revised to define Ginna Stations commitment to NFPA 805.

Page 2 of 3

Standard Quality Assurance Topical Report (NO-AA- 1O) - Revision 90 Transmittal and Summary of Changes This summary is provided to familiarize the readers with the changes included in Revision 90 of the QATR. Personnel engaged in activities covered by the Quality Assurance Program (QAP) are required to review the revised chapters. Affected procedures should be changed and training provided as needed to ensure compliance with the updated requirements.

Prepared By:,**2-',/Z/'

P"Nuclear Oversight Quality Assurance Specialist Approved BY: ________________ o'_S-Rob Radulovich / Date Nuclear Oversight Audit and Programs Director Page 3 of 3

TABLE OF CONTENTS O CHAPTER 1,ORGANIZATION 1..... SCOPE......................................................................................I 2 ..... REQU IREM ENTS ........................................................................ I 2.1. Organization ........................................................................... I 2.2. Corporate Organization............................................................... 2 2.2.1. President and Chief Executive Officer............................................... 2 2.2.2. Sr. Executive Vice President, Chief Commercial Officer, Exelon Corporation, and President and Chief Executive Officer, Exelon Generation Company..... 2 2.2.3. Sr. Vice President Regulatory Affairs and General Counsel..................... 2 2.2.4. Sr. Executive Vice President and President and Chief Nuclear Officer, Exelon Nuclear......................................................................... 3 2.3. Site Organization...................................................................... 10 2.4. Three-Tiered Approach .............................................................. 14 2.5. Decommissioning ............................................................. 14 2.6 Responsibility ......................................................................... 14 2.7 Authority ...................................................................... 15 CHAPTER 2, QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM

. 1 ..... SCOPE..................................................................................... 1 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS..........................................................................I 2.1. General................................................................................. 1 2.2. Supplier's Quality Assurance Program .............................................. 1 2.3. Planning................................................................................ 2 2.4. Program Description .................................................................. 2 2.5. Indoctrination & Training.............................................................. 2 2.6. Program Review....................................................................... 3 2.7. Quality Assurance Manual ........................................................... 3 CHAPTER 3, DESIGN CONTROL

1. SCOPE..................................................................................... 1

2. REQUIREMENTS..........................................................................I 2.1 General ................................................................................ 1 2.2 Design Input ........................................................................... 1 2.3 Design Process........................................................................ 2

.2.5 O

2.4

~2.5.1 Design Analyses.......................................................................

Design Verification .................................................................... 3 Extent of Design Verification ......................................................... 3 2

2.5.2 Design Reviews........................................................................ 4 Page 1 of 8 Revision 90

TABLE OF CONTENTS 2.6 Change Control........................................................................ 4

• 2.7 Design Errors ......................................................................... 5 2.8 Interface Control....................................................................... 5 2.9 Vendor Design Control ............................................................... 5 2.10 Modifications........................................................................... 6 2.11 Documentation and Records ......................................................... 6 CHAPTER 4, PROCUREMENT DOCUMENT CONTROL 1..... SCOPE..................................................................................... 1 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 1 2.1. General................................................................................. 1 2.2. Content of Procurement Documents ................................................ 1 2.2.1. Scope of Work ......................................................................... 1 2.2.2. Technical Requirements...............................................................I 2.2.3. Quality Assurance Program Requirements..............1 2.2.4. Non-conformances.................................................................... 2 2.2.5. Documentation Requirements........................................................ 2 2.2.6. Spare and Replacement Parts....................................................... 2

. 2.3.

2.4.

Procurement Document Review ..................................................... 2 Procurement Records 3 CHAPTER 5, INSTRUCTIONS, PROCEDURES, AND DRAWINGS 1..... SCOPE..................................................................................... 1 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 1 2.1. General ................................................................................ 1 2.2. Preparation and Review...............................................................I 2.3. Procedures and Programs ........................................................... 2 2.3.1. Technical Review and Control........................................................ 2 2.3.2. On-site Qualified Technical Review (Dresden Unit 1) ......................... .... 4 CHAPTER 6, DOCUMENT CONTROL 1..... SCOPE..................................................................................... 1 2..... REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 1 2.1. General................................................................................. 1 2.2. Reviews ................................................................................ 1

. 2.3.

2.4.

2.5.

Controlled Documents ................................................................ 2 Control Measures ...................................................................... 2 Document Changes................................................................... 3 Page 2 of 8 Revision 90

TABLE OF CONTENTS O CHAPTER 7, CONTROL OF PURCHASED MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES 1.....SCOPE ..................................................................................... 1 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 1 2.1. Supplier Selection......................................................................I 2.1.1. General..................................................................................I 2.1.2. Methods................................................................................ 1 2.2. Bid Evaluations ....................... ................................................ 2 2.3. Supplier In-Process Control.......................................................... 2 2.3.1. General........................... ...................................................... 2 2.3.2. In-Process Control and Verification Planning ....................................... 2 2.3.3. Programmatic Verification ............ ............................................... 3 2.3.4. Supplier and Verification of Supplier Performance Records....................... 3 2.3.5. Control of Procurement Changes.................................................... 3 2.4. Acceptance of Purchased Items and Services* .................................... 4 2.4.1. General ................................................................................ 4 2.4.2. Acceptance by Receiving Inspection ................................................ 4 2.4.3. Acceptance by Source Verification ................................................... 4

• ... Accep*tance byCetfce of Cofrac..........................5...............

2.4.5. Acceptance by Post Installation Testing............................................. 5 2.4.6. Accep3tance of Services Only ......................................................... 5 2.4.7. Commercial Grade Items............................................................. 6 2.4.8. Acceptance of Calibration Services............................................ 6 2.5. Presence of Documentary Evidence ................................................ 7 2.6. Spare or Replacement Items......................................................... 7 2.6.1. Procurement from Other Utilities..................................................... 8 2.6.2. Maintenance or Modification ......................................................... 8 CHAPTER 8, IDENTIFICATION AND CONTROL OF MATERIALS, PARTS, AND COMPONENTS 1I.....SCOPE....................................... *..............................................I 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 1 2.1!. General................................................................................. 1 2.2. Traceability ............................................................................. I 2.3. Identification Methods. ................................................................ I

.2.5.

2.4. Transfer of Markings.................................................. ................

Limited Life Items ...................................................................... 2 2

2.6. Stored Items ........................................................................... 2 Page 3 of 8 Revision 90

TABLE OF CONTENTS

. CHAPTER 9, CONTROL OF SPECIAL PROCESSES 1..... SCOPE.....................................................................................I 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 1 2.1. General..................................................................................I 2.2. Process Control........................................................................ 1 2.3. Special Processes ..................................................................... I 2.4. Personnel Qualification ............................................................... 2 2.5. Special Process Records............................................................. 3 CHAPTER 10, INSPECTION 1..... SCOPE.....................................................................................I 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................... I 2.1. General..................................................................................I 2.2. Inspection Plans....................................................................... 1 2.3. Inspection Personnel and Qualification ............................................. 2 2.4. Inspection Process.................................................................... 2 2.5. In-Service Inspections ................................................................ 3

• 2.6. Independent Verification.............................................................. 3 CHAPTER 11, TEST CONTROL 1..... SCOPE ..................................................................................... I 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................... I 2.1. General..................................................................................I 2.1.1. Testing Program....................................................................... 1 2.1.2. Test Procedures........................................................................I 2.2. Instrumentation and Control .................................................. ........ 4 2.3. Electrical Tests ........................................................................ 5 2.4. Mechanical Tests ....................................................................... 5 2.5. Physical and Chemical Tests ........................................................ 5 2.6. Surveillance Tests..................................................................... 6 2.7. Maintenance or Major Procedure Change.......................................... 6 CHAPTER 12, CONTROL OF MEASURING AND TEST EQUIPMENT 1.....SCOPE ..................................................................................... I 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 1 O 2.1. General..........................1 2.2. Control .................................................................................. 1 2.3. Labeling ................................................................................ 2 Page 4 of 8 Revision 90

TABLE OF CONTENTS 2.4. Accuracy............................................................................... 2

• 2.5. Traceability and Interval .............................................................. 2 2.6. Certified M&TE ........................................................................ 2 2.7. Corrective Actions..................................................................... 3 2.8. Vendor Control ........................................................................ 3 2.9. Commercial Devices.................................................................. 3 2.10. Calibration Records ................................................................... 3 CHAPTER 13, HANDLING, STORAGE, AND SHIPPING 1..... SCOPE..................................................................................... 1 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................... I 2.1. General ................................................................................. I 2.2. Special Equipment and Environments............................................... 1 2.3. Classification of Items..................................................................I 2.4. Special Handling Tools and Equipment ............................................. 2 2.5. Marking and Labeling.................................................................. 2 2.6. Storage................................................................................. 2 CHAPTER 14, INSPECTION, TEST, AND OPERATING STATUS

. . CP.....................................................................................

2 ..... REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 1 2.1. General................................................................................. 1 2.1.1. Procedures............................................................................. 2 2.2. Operating Status ......................................... ............................. 2 2.2.1. Release for Maintenance............................................................. 2 2.2.2. Preparation for Work ...... ........................................................... 2 2.2.3. Temporary Modifications ............................................................. 3 2.2.4. Return to Service ...................................................................... 3 CHAPTER 15, NONCONFORMING MATERIALS, PARTS, OR COMPONENTS 1..... SCOPE.................................................................................. ... 1 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................... I 2.1. General..................................................................................I 2.1.1. Supplier Nonconforming Items ....................................................... 1

. 2.2.

2.3.

2.4.

Identification ........................................................................... 2 Segregation............................................................................ 2 Disposition ........................................................................... 2 2.4.1. Control.................................................................................. 2 Page 5 of 8 Revision 90

TABLE OF CONTENTS

. 2.4.2.

2.4.3.

2.4.4.

Evaluation.............................................................................. 2 Personnel .............................................................................. 3 Documentation ........................................................................ 3 2.4.5. Repaired, Reworked, or Scrapped Items ........................................... 3 CHAPTER 16, CORRECTIVE ACTION 1..... SCOPE......................................................................................I 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 1 2.1. General..................................................................................I 2.2. Conditions Adverse to Quality ........................................................ I 2.2.1. Significant Conditions Adverse to Quality ............................................ 1 2.3. Verification and Follow-up .... ....................................................... 2 2.4. Evaluation and Qualification.......................................................... 3 2.5. Documentation and Reporting........................................................ 3 CHAPTER 17, QUALITY ASSURANCE RECORDS 1..... SCOPE..................................................................................... 1

. 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 1 2.1.

2.2.

Program.............................................................................1...

Administration..........................................................................I 2.3. Receipt and Transmittal .............................................................. 2 2.4. Storage and Preservation............................................................. 2 2.5. Safekeeping and Classification ...................................................... 3 2.6. Retention and Disposition ............................................................ 3 2.7. Plant Operating Records.............................................................. 3 2.7.1. Records and!/ or Logs, 5-Year Retention ........................................... 3 2.7.2 Lifetime Records ...................................................................... 5 CHAPTER 18, ASSESSMENTS / Audits 1..... SCOPE......................................................................................I 2..... REQUIREMENTS ...... :................................................................... 1 2.1. Assessments - General ............................................................... 1 2.1.1. Scheduling................. ............................................................. I 2.1.2. Preparation............................................................................. 2

. 2.1.3.

2.1.4.

2.1.5.

Personnel .............................................................................. 2 Performance ........................................................................... 2 Reporting and Follow-up.............................................................. 3 2.1.6. Records ................................................................................ 4 Page 6 of 8 Revision 90

TABLE OF CONTENTS 2.2. Vendor Audits.......................................................................... 4 2.3. Independent Management Assessment ........................................ ,.... 4 APPENDIX A, AUGMENTED QUALITY 1..... SCOPE..................................................................................... 1 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 1 2.1. Health Physics and ALARA (As Low As Reasonably Achievable)................ 1 2.2. Transport of Radioactive W aste ......................................

2.3. Services ................ ............................................................... 2 2.4. Fire Protection ......................................................................... 2 2.5. Station Blackout (Reg. Guide 1.155) ........................................ ........ 2 2.6. Augmented Quality Requirements for Dresden 1, and Peach Bottom 1I......... 2 2.7. Repairs and Alterations............................................................... 3 2.7.1. State of Illinois ......................................................................... 3 2.8. Dry Cask Storage System............................................................ 4 2.8.1. Limerick, Peach Bottom, and Oyster Creek ........................................ 4 2.8.2. Braidwood, Byron, Dresden, LaSalle and Quad Cities Station(s)................. 4 2.9 Emergency Planning........................................................... 5 2.10 Security ...............  :.........................................................5 2.11 License Renewal............................................................... 5 APPENDIX B, AUDIT FREQUENCY 1..... TABLE...................................................................................... 1 APPENDIX C, CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES 1.1. Codes and Standards ................................................................. 1 1.2. Regulatory Guides ...................................................................... 2 1.3. Site Specific Clarifications and Exceptions.......................................... 3 1.3.1. Limerick (LGS) and Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station (PBAPS) .............. 3 1.3.2. Oyster Creek (OCNGS) and Three Mile Island (TMI) Stations.................... 5 1.3.3. Clinton Power Station (CPS)......................................................... 11 1.3.4. Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, and Nine Mile Point ...................................... 11 APPENDIX D, DEFINITIONS 1I.....SCOPE ...................................................................................... I 2 ..... GLOSSARY OF TERMS ................................................................. 1 Page 7 of 8 Revision 90

TABLE OF CONTENTS

. APPENDIX E, CONTROL OF RADIOACTIVE WASTE OR MATERIALS (SITE SPECIFIC)

1. SCOPE .......................................................................................... I

2. REQUIREMENTS............................................................................. 1 2.1. Generai................................................................................. 1 2.2. Three Mile Island/Oyster Creek.......................................................I 2.3. Clinton Power Station ................................................................. 3 2.3.1. Radioactive Waste/Augmented "D" Systems ....................................... 3 2.3.2. Packaging and Transportation of Radioactive Waste .............................. 3 APPENDIX F, GRADED APPROACH (SITE SPECIFIC) 1..... SCOPE..................................................................................... 1 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................... I 2.1. General................................................................................. 1 2.2. Quality Classification...................................................................I 2.2.1. Nuclear Safety Related or Augmented Quality Items .............................. 2 2.2.2. QATR Scope Activities................................................................ 2 O APPENDIX G, SUPPLEMENTAL APPLICATIONS(STSPCF) 1.....SCOPE ..................................................................................... 1 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS..........................................................................I 2.1. Clinton Power Station (CPS)..........................................................I 2.1.1. Environmental .................... .................................................... 1 2.1.2. Fire Protection ................................................................... 2 2.1.3. Security........................................................................ 3 2.2. Oyster Creek Nuclear Generating Station (OCNGS) ............................ 3 2.2.1. Audits........................................................................... 3 Page 8 of 8 Revision 90

EXELON NUCLEAR POLICY

1. POLICY STATEMENT The Quality Assurance Topical Report (QATR), NO-AA-1 0, is the highest tiered document that assigns major functional responsibilities plants owned or operated by Exelon Generation Company, LLC. Implementing documents assign more specific responsibilities and tasks and define the organizational interfaces involved in conducting activities and tasks within the scope of this Plan. These requirements apply to those organizations and positions, which manage and perform activities within its scope.

The Company organization is structured on the basis that the attainment of the objectives of this Plan relies on those who manage, perform, and support the performance of activities within the scope of this plan. Assurance of this attainment relies on those who have no direct responsibility for managing or performing the activity.

The Company will maintain and operate its nuclear plants in a manner that will ensure the health and safety of the public and our workers. All facilities shall be at a minimum compliance with the requirements on the Code of Federal Regulations, NRC Operating Licenses, and the applicable laws and regulations of the state and local governments.

2. APPLICABILITY All Company personnel who work directly, or indirectly, for the Company are responsible for the achievement of quality in their work. Accordingly, all Company personnel and its contractors engaged in supporting nuclear generation activities shall comply with the requirements of our Quality Assurance Program (QAP).

Revision 90 Page lofI Page 1 of I Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1

1. SCOPE This chapter identifies those portions of the Company organization as it applies to the Quality Assurance Program (QAP), and defines the responsibility and authority for establishing, executing, and verifying its implementation. The responsibility for the program is retained and executed by the Company exclusively.

Organizational responsibilities are described for assuring that activities affecting quality are prescribed and implemented by documented instructions, procedures, and drawings. The achievement of quality in the performance of quality related activities are the responsibility of each individual in support of nuclear operations.

The requirements and commitments contained in the QAP are mandatory and must be implemented, enforced, and adhered to by all individuals and organizations.

2. REQUIREMENTS Note: Minor variations may occur between the titles contained herein and those used in practice. Specific position descriptions may be contained in approved Company documents.

2.1. Organization The organizational structure of the Company consists of corporate functions, and the nuclear facilities. Organizational titles for the quality assurance functions described are identified in Company policies and procedures.

Lines of authority and responsibility are established from the highest management level through intermediate levels to the implementing personnel.

The responsibility, authority, and relationships of the various personnel and organizations are documented and maintained current.

The authority to accomplish the quality assurance functions described herein may be delegated to the incumbent's staff as necessary to fulfill the identified responsibilities.

Revision 90 Page 1 Page 1 ofl6 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1 2.2. Corporate Organization 2.2.1. President and Chief Executive Officer The President and Chief Executive Officer (CEO), Exelon Corporation, is responsible for overall corporate policy and provides executive direction and guidance for the corporation as well as promulgates corporate policy through the Company 's senior management staff. A management position responsible for New Business Development reports to this position through the Sr. Executive Vice President and Chief Strategy Officer, Exelon Corporation.

2.2.2. Sr. Executive Vice President, Chief Commercial Officer, Exelon Corporation, and President and Chief Executive Officer, Exelon Generation Company The Sr. Executive Vice President, Chief Commercial Officer of Exelon Corporation, President and Chief Executive Officer, Exelon Generation, is responsible for Exelon Generation policy and provides executive direction and guidance for Exelon Generation as well as promulgates corporate policy through Exelon Generation senior management staff. Overall responsibility for the implementation of the QAP is delegated to the Sr. Executive Vice President, Exelon Generation and President and Chief Nuclear Officer, Exelon Nuclear.

2.2.3. Sr. Vice President Regulatory Affairs and General Counsel The Senior Vice President and General Counsel serves as the primary legal and regulatory advisor to the company's senior management with respect to all legal and regulatory matters within his or her area of expertise, sets the company vision and overall legal strategy for his or her area of expertise, is responsible for all legal and regulatory services relating to one or more practice areas and provides leadership for and manages attorneys and other legal and regulatory professionals in those practice areas throughout the company. This position performs legal and regulatory services involving high-level or complex legal matters in his or her practice area. The following management position reports to this position.

1. A management position responsible for licensing and regulatory affairs provides organizational support and management oversight of the stations to ensure prompt and proper disposition of regulatory issues, develops regulatory positions and advises senior management on priorities and activities affecting regulatory issues at the nuclear sites. Other responsibilities include developing policies and standardized processes and procedures for the maintenance of the licensing basis, the preparation of submittals to the NRC and other regulatory organizations, the dissemination of regulatory experience information and the NSRB. Sr. Executive Vice President, Exelon Generation and President and Chief Nuclear Officer, Exelon Nuclear Revision 90 Page 2 Page of 16 2 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1 2.2.4 The Sr. Executive Vice President, Exelon Generation and President and Chief Nuclear Officer (ONO), Exelon Nuclear, reports to the Sr. Executive Vice President, Chief Commercial Officer, Exelon Corporation, and President and Chief Executive Officer, Exelon Generation Company and has overall responsibility for the safe and reliable operation of the Company's nuclear stations. This is the senior executive responsible for setting and implementing policies, objectives, expectations, and priorities to ensure activities are performed in accordance with QAP and other requirements. The following management positions and committees report to and / or receive direction from the CNO with respect to their assigned roles and responsibilities associated with the execution of the Exelon Nuclear Quality Assurance Program:

1. The Chief Nuclear Officer (CNO), CENG Senior Vice President Operations is responsible to provide management and oversight and support of the day-to-day operations of the CENG stations for the safe and efficient operation of the CENG nuclear fleet in compliance with the CENG QAP. In addition, the CNO, CENG is the CENG role for all industry, legal and regulatory requirements for plants owned under the CENG joint venture; and fulfill the acting CEO role reporting to the CENG Board.

2. The Chief Operating Officer (COO), Fleet Operations, Exelon Nuclear, is responsible to provide management oversight and support of the day-to-day operations of the stations for the safe and efficient operation of the nuclear fleet in compliance with the QAP. The COO is responsible for planning, organizing, and directing and controlling the operations, maintenance and improvement of the nuclear facilities. This position participates in the formulation of nuclear group strategy and policy, and provides leadership and direction to implement industry best practices. The following management positions report to the COO:

A management position responsible for Mid-Atlantic operations provides management oversight and support of the day-to-day operations of the Mid-Atlantic stations. This position implements policies, goals, and objectives, in accordance with the QAP and other requirements, to assure the safe and reliable operation of the Mid-Atlantic nuclear stations This position participates in the formulation of nuclear group strategy and policy, and provides leadership and direction to implement industry best practices.

• Management positions responsible for Midwest operations provide management oversight and support of the day-to-day operations of the Midwest stations. These positions implement policies, goals, and objectives, in accordance with the QAP and other requirements, to assure the safe and reliable operation of the Midwest nuclear stations These positions participate in the formulation of nuclear group strategy Page 3 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1 and policy, and provide leadership and direction to implement industry best practices.

• A management position responsible for Nuclear Project Management who is responsible for the oversight and support of Project management activities for Exelon Nuclear.

3. A management position for operations support who is accountable for defining standard programs and processes, delivering effective services and support, providing technical oversight of program implementation, and supporting the deployment and sharing of best practices throughout the nuclear organization in accordance with the QAP and other requirements, as applicable. Other responsibilities include providing overall direction and management oversight for environmental issues. Reporting to this position is a staff of management, administrative, and technical personnel.

Functional areas of responsibilities include:

- security, chemistry, industrial safety, maintenance and work control, outage planning and services, operations, radiation protection, radioactive waste, emergency planning, environmental.

-Laboratory services including calibration and maintenance of measuring and test equipment, calibration of radiation protection equipment and test & analysis services.

4. The management position responsible for engineering & technical services provides oversight and support and is accountable for defining standard programs, processes, policies, procedures, delivering effective services and support, providing technical oversight of program implementation, and supporting the deployment and sharing of best practices throughout the nuclear organization in accordance with the QAP, regulatory requirements, and the ASME Code. Reporting to this position is a staff of management, administrative, and technical personnel. Functional areas of responsibility include;

-Engineering that provides support to the nuclear stations, design authority under the ASME Code, configuration management programs, special processes, and generic programs for technical and regulatory issues. A support staff provides the necessary discipline and expert support for setting technical policy, developing design standards, performing engineering discipline reviews, and performing the document control and records management programs. This staff develops and supports common approaches for technical and regulatory engineering issues, as well as develops and coaches engineers. Corporate procurement engineering provides governance and oversight of the nuclear organization's procurement engineering process and technical operations. This includes parts evaluation, upgrading of stock material, equivalent item evaluation, and examination and testing Page 4 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1 in accordance with the applicable ASME Code and Federal Regulations.

- nuclear fuels management providing BWR/PWR nuclear fuel procurement and fabrication services, technical support to monitor fuel reliability and certain in-core components, design and licensing analyses for core reloads, safety analyses, wet and dry spent fuel storage governance, oversight and technical support, long-term spent fuel management strategies, and decommissioning activities including cost estimating, governance, oversight and technical support.. This position is responsible for reactivity management oversight and corporate support of reactor operations to ensure safe and reliable plant operations, as the manager of nuclear materials, and for controls and reports associated with special nuclear material accountability.

- a management position responsible for license renewal

- project management including power uprate and other projects

- risk management

5. The Management position responsible for Organizational Effectiveness and Integrated Performance Assessments (OR&IPA). This position is responsible for the independent assessment program, initiating, trending, and recommending solutions for deficiencies, initiating stop work, ordering a unit shutdown, or requesting any other actions deemed necessary to avoid unsafe plant conditions or a significant violation of the QAP, periodic assessments to determine that the Quality Assurance Policy is being carried out, and maintaining a suitably trained and qualified staff as appropriate.

This position is independent of station responsibilities and is responsible to prioritize and communicate common quality issues to appropriate senior management including the resolution of these issues. The following management positions report to the OR&IPA SVP:

Revision 90 PageS of 16 Page 5 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1

-A management position responsible for Organizational Performance, which includes functional results and organizational effectiveness performance. This position is responsible for the independent assessment program including regularly scheduled assessments and any assessment required based on analysis of an emergent performance issues. In addition, this position is also responsible for performance improvement which includes the administration of the fleet Operational Experience and Corrective Action Programs. This position maintains authority and responsibility to escalate issues and stop work or request any other actions to avoid unsafe plant conditions.

oReporting to the management position for Organizational Performance is a management position responsible for Fleet Assessments oAlso reporting to the management position for Organizational Performance is a management position for Performance Improvement.

- A management position responsible for Innovation.

- A management position responsible for Training.

-Maintaining a dotted line reporting relationship to the management position responsible for OR&IPA is a management position responsible for Talent Management & Organization Development (TMOD).

6. The management position responsible for Nuclear Oversight (NOS) activities is independent of production and assures that an appropriate QAP is established, maintained, and effectively executed throughout the nuclear organization. This position provides overall direction for the implementation of the QAP and for the effective implementation of quality assurance functions that verify activities affecting safety-related functions. A staff of supervisory, administrative, and technical personnel supports assessment and quality verification. Functional responsibilities include:

- employee concern program activities.

- establishing quality assurance practices and policies.

- quality verification activities.

Revision 90 Page of 16 6 of Page 6 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1

-initiating stop work, ordering unit shutdown, or request any other actions deemed necessary to avoid unsafe plant conditions or a significant violation of the QAP.

-initiating, trending, and recommending solutions for deficiencies identified by NOS.

-maintaining a trained and qualified staff of personnel within the NOS organization.

-maintenance and approval of revisions to the Quality Assurance Topical Report (QATR) and the program for employee concerns.

-overseeing nuclear site NOS activities.

-participation in joint membership groups.

-periodic audits to determine that the Quality Assurance Policy is being carried out.

-periodic review of the independent assessment program.

-periodically apprising the President and ONO and the Nuclear Safety Review Board of the status of the quality assurance aspects at Company facilities and immediately apprise them of significant problems affecting quality.

-settling disputes between NOS and other organizations.

-the certifying authority for NOS audit personnel.

-the Independent audit oversight program.

-verifying implementation of solutions for significant conditions adverse to quality identified by NOS.

A. Reporting to the management position responsible for NOS is a management position responsible for auditing and programs.

Functional areas of responsibility include:

- maintaining the regulatory required compliance auditing program.

- maintaining the Quality Verification (QV) program

- managing supplier assessments, audits, or surveys (including their sub-tier suppliers) as required. Verifies that supplier quality assurance programs comply with Company requirements and has the authority and responsibility for QA Page 7 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1 activities applicable to supplier evaluation including, stop work as deemed necessary when a violation of the QAP is identified.

- establishing, maintaining, and interpreting Company quality assurance policies and procedures

- providing training on quality assurance subjects.

- establishing the requirements for auditor and inspector certification.

- controlling and maintaining the QATR.

- provides an offsite point of contact for station Quality Verification personnel if assistance is necessary for quality verification activities.

- provide management with periodic reports on the adequacy of the QAP.

- managing implementation of the program for employee concerns.

Personnel performing Quality Verification functions including: planning, inspecting, and reporting, shall be trained and qualified for their assigned functions.

With the exception of receipt inspection activities, inspection personnel shall:

-report to the Management Position responsible for QV when performing Quality Verification functions, even though they may functionally report to another organization for their other assigned activities

- have their qualifications approved by the Management Position responsible for QV prior to performing inspection activities.

- not perform independent inspections on any work that they have performed or directly supervised.

- be subject to audit by NOS.

The receipt inspection activities are controlled by the Nuclear Supply organization.

This structure assures adequate independence between performance and verification of activities is maintained.

Revision 90 Page of 16 8 of Page 8 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1

7. The Nuclear Safety Review Board (NSRB) is an offsite committee that reports to and advises the Sr. Executive Vice President, Exelon Generation and President and Chief Nuclear Officer of the results of their independent oversight of plant operations related to safe operation of the station and the Company's nuclear program relative to nuclear safety. The NSRB is responsible for the independent safety review function and functions in accordance with written procedures and instructions which delineates committee composition, responsibility, authority, member qualifications, meeting frequency, subjects to be reviewed, reporting requirements, and administrative controls under which the board operates. The NSRB:

- conducts independent reviews of station performance and operations to determine if the facility is being operated and maintained in a manner that promotes safety and provides feedback to the organization on suggested improvements.

- focuses primarily in the areas of Operations, Maintenance, Engineering, Plant Support, Regulatory and Nuclear Oversight, or other matters relating to safety.

- reviews station materials and activities and advises the CNO and management responsible for NOS on the following activities:

-, any issue potentially affecting the safe operation of the facility.

- station nuclear safety performance determined by discussion and interviews with station and Exelon Nuclear individuals, plant tours, oversight of meetings, and review of documents distributed for NSRB review.

- effectiveness of the station program for oversight including audits, assessments, and self-assessments.

- corrective actions for degraded or non-conforming conditions involving violations of the NRC license requirements, plant transients or forced shutdowns, or the submission of a Licensee Event Report (LER).

- oversight of activities of the on-site safety review function.

8. The management role of Integration, Business Development

9. The management role of Strategy and planning

10. The management position of strategy with Exelon Nuclear Partners (ENP)

Functional areas that also maintain a dotted line report to CNO supporting the Exelon Nuclear organization are:

• Legal

• Human Resources

• Communication

• Information Technology Page 9 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER1 Information technology is no longer a functional area exclusively within the nuclear organizational structure but now supports the entire Exelon Corporation. The management position responsible for operations support will supply oversight and governance for the functional area of information systems as it applies to Exelon Nuclear.

The oversight and governance of this functional area is performed to ensure that organizational and functional responsibilities and the reporting relationship to the management position responsible for all nuclear activities, the CNO, is maintained within the requirements stated within the QATR. This includes all regulatory requirements committed to by the QATR. Specifically, the management position responsible for operations support supplies oversight and governance for management and supervision of information systems related services and activities including the software quality assurance program (DTSQA). This includes the creation, acquisition, the enhancement of computer hardware, communication, and software systems to support operational requirements.

-The management position responsible for business operations provides integrated support to senior management and the nuclear sites for all business functions. This position dotted line reports to the CNO. Reporting to this position is a staff of supervisory, administrative, and technical personnel. Functional areas of responsibility includes:

- business planning and process improvement.

- communications.

- decommissioning financial reporting and trust fund reimbursements.

Supply is no longer a functional area exclusively within the nuclear organizational structure but now supports the entire Exelon Corporation and has a dotted line to the CNO. This management position will supply oversight and governance for the functional area of supply as it applies to Exelon Nuclear in the procurement and warehousing areas. The oversight and governance of this functional area is performed to ensure that organizational and functional responsibilities and the reporting relationship to the management position responsible for all nuclear activities, the CNO, is maintained within the requirements stated within the QATR. This includes all regulatory requirements committed to by the QATR. The management position responsible for business operations supplies oversight and governance for:

- the Exelon Nuclear supply function including the establishment of priorities and providing operational control of the purchase of non-fuel goods and services required for nuclear operations. This organization is also responsible for the areas of material procurement, services procurement, supply programs, inventory management, and investment recovery. Supply establishes policies, common Page 10 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER1 administrative controls and processes to ensure compliance with applicable requirements and effective use of resources.

2.3. Site Organization A management position for each nuclear site reports through the applicable management position responsible for each designated operating group including the MidAtlantic and the Midwest and is responsible for overall plant nuclear safety and the implementation of the Company's QAP. This position is also responsible for the station compliance with its NRC operating license, governmental regulations, and ASME Code requirements: Day to-day direction and management oversight of activities associated with the safe and reliable operation of a nuclear station is provided. The following site management positions report to the respective Senior Vice President MW Operations or Senior Vice President MA Operations through the Site Plant Manager or Site Vice President.

The Site Vice President has overall responsibility and accountability for the safe and efficient operation of a nuclear power plant. The following positions report to the Site Vice President 2.3.1. The Plant Manager has the day-to-day responsibility for managing the safe and efficient operation of a nuclear power plant. This management position assures the safe, reliable, and efficient operation of the plant within the constraints of applicable regulatory requirements, operating license, and the QAP.

Supervisory direction is provided for the Technical Review Program, including approval of individuals as technical reviewers, and the Plant Operations Review Committee (PORC). During periods that exceed three months, when unavailable, responsibility is designated in writing to an established alternate who satisfies the experience requirements of this position. The following positions report to the plant manager:

- Operations and Support Including:

• a management position responsible for safe, reliable, and efficient plant operations within the constraints of the operating license and regulatory requirements. This position is also responsible for the development and implementation of appropriate controls in accordance with the QAP and other requirements.

• management position(s) responsible for operations shift crews and administration, direction and supervision of operating staff. This position is also responsible for routine plant operations activities and evolutions that are performed within the constraints of the operating license, the QAP, and other requirements. Typically this position is the senior individual on site who holds a Senior Reactor Operator license.

Page 11 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1

• management position(s) responsible for the day-to-day operation of O the nuclear unit(s) ) including reactor engineering and overall command and control of shift activities including operations of the radioactive waste system.

• management position(s) responsible for supervision for control of work and of the plant and field supervision that coordinates and/or assists in the control of shift operations. This position directs control room personnel, field operations, has the primary responsibility for authorizing removal and restoration of systems to support maintenance activities and holds a Senior Reactor Operator License.

• a management position responsible for advisory technical support to shift management in the areas of thermal hydraulics, reactor engineering and plant analysis with regards to the safe operations of the facility. In addition, this position shall meet the qualifications as specified by the NRC.

- The management position(s) for maintenance are responsible for the performance of corrective, predictive and preventive maintenance, cleanliness controls and modification installation of mechanical and electrical equipment and instrumentation in accordance with the QAP and other requirements. A staff of supervisory, technical, administrative, and

• contract personnel supports day-to-day maintenance of equipment within their functional area.

- The management position(s) responsible for control of work coordinate, administer, execute, and monitor daily and outage work schedules. This position is also responsible for material management and site supply, which coordinates parts requirements, specifies and evaluates parts, procures all materials for the site, ships and receives material, and controls the onsite inventory. The site supply chain provides and coordinates scope and priority for station procurement engineering efforts.

- The management position(s) responsible for chemistry activities, laboratory and system processes, related procedures and programs.

• environmental services.

• radioactive waste.

• radiological environmental monitoring

- The management position health physics/radiological protection.

- The management position responsible for performa~nce improvement.

- The management position responsible for safety.

2.3.2. The management position for engineering and design has the responsibility and O authority for day-to-day engineering support activities, develops and maintains engineering programs, policies, procedures, and provides engineering services in accordance with the QAP. A staff of supervisory, technical, and administrative Page 12 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1 personnel supports maintenance activities. Functional areas of responsibility include:

- design engineering.

- engineering administration.

- modifications and their implementation.

- plant configuration control.

- system engineering.

- system testing.

technical support.

- dotted line accountability for document control and quality assurance records management.

2.3.3. The management position responsible for regulatory assurance maintains an interface and liaison between the station and federal and state regulators..

Functional responsibilities include:

- emergency preparedness 2.3.4. The management position responsible for training provides direction, control, and overall supervision of personnel as required by regulations and training for all site personnel as required. Functional areas of responsibility include:

- learning services.

- maintenance technical training.

- operations training.

2.3.5. The Plant Operations Review Committee (PORC) is a multi-disciplined committee responsible for review of activities that affect nuclear safety, reports to, and advises the management position responsible for plant operation on matters related to nuclear safety. The PORC shall ensure that plant activities are conducted safely and do not require NRC review and approval prior to implementation or changes to the Technical Specifications. The PORO functions in accordance with written instructions which delineate committee composition, responsibility, authority, member qualifications, meeting frequency, subjects to be reviewed, reporting requirements, and administrative controls under which the group operates.

In discharging its independent review responsibilities, PORC shall keep safety considerations paramount when opposed to cost or schedule considerations.

Should a voting member have direct responsibility for preparation or technical review of the item requiring PORC independent review, where conflict of such considerations is likely, that member shall be replaced (to fill the quorum) by another voting member not having such potential conflict.

2.3.6. A position responsible for site assessment activities reports to the management position responsible for Fleet Assessments. This position has the organizational freedom and authority to identify problems, has a reporting relationship with the Page 13 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1 senior management position responsible for overall plant nuclear safety, and ensures compliance with QAP and nuclear safety requirements.

Significant safety or quality issues requiring escalated action will be directed through the management position responsible for Organizational Effectiveness and Integrated Performance Assessments (OR&IPA)to the President and CNO.

This individual, supported by the fleet organization, is functionally responsible for:

- authority and responsibility to escalate matters.

- conducting independent assessments of line and support activities and safety reviews.

- initiate, trend and recommend solutions for deficiencies identified by OR&I PA.

- monitoring day-to-day station activities.

- provide OR&IPA management periodic reports on the status and adequacy of the QAP.

- promptly communicate significant issues to OR&IPA and appropriate site management.

- stop work or request any other actions to avoid unsafe plant conditions.

2.3.7. The Management Position responsible for Performance Improvement.

Functional responsibilities include:

- Corrective Action Program

- Self-Assessments/Benchmarking

- Operating Experience 2.3.8. The management position responsible for security.

2.3.9. The management position(s) responsible for project management.

2.3.10. The following management positions maintain a dotted line reporting relationship to the Site Vice President.

- The management position(s) responsible for Business Operations.

- The management position(s) responsible for Human Resources.

- The management position(s) responsible for Communications.

2.4 The Company uses a three-tiered approach to accomplish the oversight of safety which are:

- A collection of program elements for implementing and/or reviewing areas of quality of plant operations and nuclear safety. These elements include system performance monitoring, review of operating experience information, operability evaluations, and reviews of changes to technical specifications and final safety analysis reports that affect design bases.

Specific guidance is contained in applicable procedures and programs.

Page 14 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER1

- A NOS staff who assesses and performs quality verification inspection aspects of Company activities within the scope of the QATR relating to safety. This provides for an overview of activities affecting or potentially affecting safety.

- A PORC which is an on-site committee that reports to and advises the Plant Manager on all matters related to nuclear safety in plant operations.

A NSRB which is an off-site committee that reports to and advises the Sr.

Executive Vice President, Exelon Generation and Chief Nuclear Officer, Exelon Nuclear, of the results of independent oversight of plant operation relative to nuclear safety.

2.5 Decommissioning Site Organization Similar to the operating units, the management position responsible for plant operations is also responsible for the management oversight, directing, and implementing appropriate controls to maintain the site within the requirements and constraints applicable to a permanently shutdown station or unit (or those stations or units not under the control of an NRC approved decommissioning plan), and to ensure the safe storage of spent nuclear fuel.

2.6. Responsibility Each holder of position as identified in this Chapter, has the responsibility for the scope and effective implementation of the QAP and may delegate all or part of the activities of planning, establishing, and implementing the QAP to others, but retains the responsibility for the program's effectiveness.

The Company is responsible for ensuring that the applicable portion(s) of the QATR is properly documented, approved, and implemented before an activity within the scope of the QAP is undertaken by the Company or by others.

Personnel performing oversight functions for the Company have the responsibility, authority, organizational freedom, and sufficient independence from cost and schedule to:

- assure that further processing, delivery, installation, or use is controlled until proper disposition of a nonconformance, deficiency, or unsatisfactory condition has occurred.

- identify quality problems.

- initiate, recommend, or provide solutions to quality problems through designated channels.

- initiate stop work, order unit shutdown, or request any other actions deemed necessary to avoid unsafe plant conditions or a significant violation of the QAP Page 15 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER1

- verify implementation of solutions for significant conditions adverse to quality.

The Company may delegate certain phases of the work to non-company labor and contracted services, which act as the Company's agents in assigned areas.

They shall work to a Company accepted quality program (or in accordance with the Company's program) under overall site direction and document their organization and any delegated responsibilities necessary to establish, execute, and verify their quality program. The Company may also assign the authority for certification and stamping in accordance with the ASME Code.

2.7. Authority When the Company delegates responsibility for planning, establishing, or implementing any part of the overall QAP, sufficient authority to accomplish the assigned responsibilities is delegated. Regardless of delegation, the Company retains responsibility.

Revision 90 Page 16 Page 16 of 16 of 16 Revision 90

QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM CHAPTER2

1. SCOPE The purpose of this chapter is to define how the Company's QAP applies to those activities such as design, procurement, fabrication, installation, modification, maintenance, repair, refueling, operation, inspection, and tests related to systems, structures, and components. The QAP also applies to certain non-safety related structures, systems, components and activities to a degree consistent with their importance to safety. Policies, directives, procedures, guidelines, manuals, or instructions shall be reviewed, approved, distributed, and revised in accordance with administrative procedures.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General The QAP comprises all those planned and systematic actions necessary to provide adequate confidence that structures, systems, and components will perform satisfactorily in service. Quality assurance includes quality verification, which comprises the examination of those physical characteristics of material, structure, component, or system which provide a means to control the quality of the material, structure, component, or system to predetermined requirements.

All persons and organizations involved in activities in support of the nuclear sites and governed by this program are responsible for implementing the requirements of this manual.

The QAP is based upon 10OCFR50, Appendix B, "Quality Assurance Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants and Fuel Reprocessing Plants." The requirements of 10CFR50.54, "Conditions of License," 10CFR50.55a, "Codes and Standards,"

10OCFR50.59, "Changes, Test, and Experiments," 10OCFR50 Appendix A, "General Design Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants," 10OCFR50 Appendix R, "Fire Protection Programs for Nuclear Power Plants," are included in the basis for the QAP.

The requirements of 10CFR21, Reporting of Defects and Non-Compliance,"

10OCFR71, Subpart H, "Quality Assurance for Packaging and Transportation of Radioactive Material," and 10CFR72, Subpart G, "Quality Assurance for Licensing Requirements for the Independent Storage of Spent Nuclear Fuel and High-Level Radioactive Waste," are also included. The Company is committed to carrying out the provisions of various NRC regulatory guides and industry standards which further define Quality Assurance Program requirements (see attached Appendix C).

2.2. Supplier's Quality Assurance Program The Company's procurement documents require that each vendor, supplier, or contractor maintain a quality assurance program that satisfies the applicable portions of:

Page 1 of 3 Revision 90

QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM CHAPTER 2

- ASME NQA-1 and the ANSI N45.2 Standards not covered by NQA-1 or the ANSI N45.2 series of standards for previously accepted non-ASME quality assurance programs.

- ANSI N18.7 Standards

- ASME Section III, Appendix XXII for suppliers of ASME Code Design services.

2.3. Planning Planning establishes the systematic, sequential progression of actions to meet the defined requirements. The Company documents these plans in appropriate communications, approvals, instructions, and procedures. Activities described in the QAP are accomplished under controlled conditions that include appropriate equipment, qualified personnel, suitable environment, and use of appropriate procedures.

2.4. Program Description The Company's total program for providing administrative controls and quality assurance is incorporated in many diverse documents. The Company's nuclear document hierarchy describes the implementation of the QAP. Approved implementing procedures and instructions are written to the extent necessary to implement the quality requirements of 10CFR50 Appendix B. Line, staff, administrative, and quality oversight organizations issue and control these implementing procedures. All activities affecting quality are described in sufficient detail to assure quality.

2.5. Indoctrination & Training Formal indoctrination and training programs for personnel performing or verifying activities within the scope of this Plan are established and maintained. A training organizational element is established and staffed with qualified instructors and is responsible for planning, scheduling, developing and providing training to Company personnel. The indoctrination and training programs are established by on-site and by off-site organizational units responsible for the performance or verification of activities within the scope of the QAP.

Indoctrination, training, and qualification programs are established such that:

- personnel responsible for performing quality-affected activities are instructed as to the purpose, scope, and implementation of the quality-related manuals, instructions, and procedures.

- personnel verifying activities affecting quality are trained and qualified in the principles, techniques, and requirements of the activity being performed.

- formal training and qualification programs documentation includes the objective, content of the program, attendees, and date of attendance.

Page 2 of 3 Revision 90 I

QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM CHAPTER2

- proficiency tests are given to those personnel performing and verifying activities affecting quality, and the acceptance criteria are developed to determine if individuals are properly trained and qualified.

- certificate of qualification clearly delineates the specific functions personnel are qualified to perform and the criteria used to qualify personnel in each function.

- proficiency of personnel performing and verifying activities affecting quality is maintained by re-training, re-examining, re-qualifying, and/or re-certifying as determined by management or program commitment.

2.6. Program Review The effectiveness of the QAP and its implementation is periodically reviewed by various organizations at various levels. The results of these reviews are documented in reports to senior management for evaluation and corrective action is initiated as required. The effectiveness of the QAP is evaluated and reported by NOS through the monitoring, assessment, and inspection functions.

Other organizational elements provide additional information!/evaluations as requested.

2.7. Quality Assurance Manual This Quality Assurance Manual (QAM) contains the Company's QAP. The QAM is made available to NRC, Company personnel, the Authorized Nuclear Inspector, and other regulatory authorities. The Company submits revisions to the QAP document (as a topical report) to the NRC for acceptance.

Revision 90 Page of 3 Page 33 of 3 Revision 90 J

DESIGN CONTROL CHAPTER 3

1. SCOPE The purpose of this chapter is to establish the requirements and control measures for assuring design bases and regulatory requirements are correctly translated into design documents. The scope of design control covers all phases of engineering design, including: identification of design inputs (criteria and bases); identification and control of design interfaces; production of design documents, calculations and analyses; procurement related engineering and design verification.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General The Company has overall responsibility for design and design control activities including, preparing, reviewing, approving, and verifying design documents related to the plant's structures, systems, and components within the scope of the QAP. Additionally, the Company is responsible for reactor core design analysis, core design specifications and design reviews, for nuclear fuel and in-core components.

Qualified personnel perform detailed design activities or review and control design work involving electrical, mechanical, structural, and instrumentation and control designs. Design activities are conducted to written procedures that include consideration of quality standards, quality assurance requirements, suitability of material parts, equipment, and processes, control of design interfaces, analytical or testing requirements, design basis, and configuration management.

2.2. Design Input The Company has the responsibility to properly translate applicable safety analysis reports, regulatory requirements, ASME Code requirements, and design bases into specifications, drawings, procedures and instructions. The Company is responsible for electrical, mechanical, structural, instrumentation and control; nuclear engineering activities involved in nuclear station modifications, and also maintains a configuration management program.

Design inputs, such as design bases, performance requirements, regulatory requirements, codes, and standards shall be identified and documented. Their selection shall be reviewed and approved by the responsible design organization. The design input shall be specified and approved in a timely manner and be to the level of detail necessary to provide a consistent basis for making design decisions, accomplishing design verification, and evaluating design changes. Changes from approved design inputs, including the reason for the changes shall be identified, approved, documented, and controlled.

Page 1 of 6 Revision 90

DESIGN CONTROL CHAPTER 3 2.3. Design Process The Company is responsible for design changes, performs detailed design activities, and issues design documents in accordance with approved procedures. The responsible design organization shall prescribe and document design activities in a timely manner and to the level of detail necessary to permit verification that the design meets requirements.

Included in this scope of activities are considerations for field design engineering, fire hazards, human factors, physics, seismic, stress, compatibility of materials, application of special process, associated computer programs, thermal, hydraulic, ALARA and radiation factors, the safety analysis accident scenarios, and accessibility for in-service inspection, maintenance and repairs, and quality standards. Design documents shall be adequate to support facility design, construction, and operation. Selection of the appropriate quality standards shall be documented, reviewed and approved.

Reasons for changes from specified quality standards, shall be identified, documented, approved and controlled. Design methods, materials, parts, equipment, and processes that are essential to the function of the structure, system, or component shall be selected and reviewed for suitability of application. Applicable industry experience, as set forth in reports or other documentation, shall be made available to cognizant design personnel.

The final design output documents and approved changes thereto shall be relatable to the design input by documentation in sufficient detail to permit design verification. The final design shall identify assemblies and/or components that are part of the item being designed. If materials, parts, equipment, or processes are different from the published supplier information, these differences shall be documented.

Commercially standard (catalog items) materials, parts, or equipment, which have been previously approved for different applications, are reviewed for suitability in the design process.

2.4. Design Analyses Design analyses shall be performed in a planned, controlled, and documented manner. Design analysis documents shall be legible and suitable for reproduction, filing, and retrieval. They shall be sufficiently detailed as to purpose, method, assumptions, design input, references, and units such that a person technically qualified in the subject can review, understand the analysis, and verify the adequacy of the results without recourse to the originator.

Calculations shall be identified for retrievability by subject including structure, system, component, originator, reviewer, and date or by other unique identifiers.

Revision 90 Page 2 Page of 6 2 of 6 Revision 90

DESIGN CONTROL CHAPTER 3 Computer programs shall be controlled to assure that changes are documented and approved. Verification shall be required for changes to previously verified computer programs including evaluation of the effects of these changes as specified below.

Computer programs may be utilized for design analysis without individual verification of the program for each application provided:

- the computer program has been verified to show that it produces correct solutions for the encoded mathematical model within defined limits for each parameter employed.

- the encoded mathematical model has been shown to produce a valid solution to the physical problem associated with the particular application.

2.5. Design Verification Design control measures shall be applied to verify the adequacy of design, such as by one or more of the following:

- performance of design reviews.

- use of alternate calculations.

- performance of qualification tests.

The results of design verification shall be documented *including the identification of the verifier. Design verification shall be performed by competent individual(s) other than those who performed the original design but may be from the same organization. This verification may be performed by the originator's supervisor, provided the supervisor did not specify a singular design approach, rule out certain design considerations, did not establish the design inputs used in the design, or the supervisor is the only individual in the organization competent to perform the verification. Cursory supervisory reviews do not satisfy the intent of design verification.

Verification shall be performed in a timely manner. Design verification, for the stage of design activity accomplished, shall be performed prior to release for procurement, manufacture, construction, or release to another organization for use in other design activities provided sufficient data exists. Any unverified portion of the design shall be identified and controlled. In all cases the design verification shall be completed prior to relying upon the component, system, structure, or computer program to perform its function.

2.5.1. Extent of Design Verification The extent of the design verification required is a function of the importance to safety, the complexity of the design, the degree of standardization, the state of the art, and the similarity with previously proven designs.

Revision 90 Page 3 Page of 66 3 of Revision 90

DESIGN CONTROL CHAPTER 3 Where the design has been subjected to a verification process, the process need not be duplicated for identical designs. For each application the applicability of standardized or previously proven designs for design inputs shall be verified.

Known problems affecting the standard or previously proven designs and their effects on other features shall be considered. The original design and associated verification shall be adequately documented and referenced in subsequent applications.

Design verification shall be required for changes to previously verified designs.

This includes evaluation of the effects of those changes on the overali design and on any affected design analyses.

2.5.2. Design Reviews Verification consists of a check of design adequacy by such methods as design reviews, use of alternate calculations or methods, or performance of verification or qualification testing. The method, or combination of methods, used to verify a design will be selected on a case-by-case basis Acceptable verification methods include one or more of the following items:

- alternate calculations using alternate methods that verify the correctness of original calculations or analyses.

- critical design reviews providing assurance that the final design is correct and satisfactory.

- where design adequacy is to be verified by qualification tests, the tests are iden'tified.

2.6. Change Control Changes to final designs, field changes, modifications to operating facilities, and nonconforming items dispositioned use-as-is or repair shall be justified and subject to design control measures commensurate with those applied to the original design.

These measures shall include assurance that the design analyses for the structure, system, or components are still valid. A 10OCFR50.59/72.48 review is performed for changes to the facility.

Changes shall be approved by the same affected groups or organizations, which reviewed and approved the original design documents. In the case where the original organization is no longer responsible for design approval, then a new responsible design organization shall be designated. The designated organization shall have demonstrated competence in the specific design area of interest and have an adequate understanding of the requirements and intent of the original design.

Page 4 of 6 Revision 90

DESIGN CONTROL CHAPTER 3 When a design change is approved, other than by revision to the affected design documents, measures shall be established to incorporate, where appropriate the change into these documents. Plant personnel will be made aware of design changes/modifications, which may affect the performance of their duties. Where a significant design change is necessary because of an incorrect design, the design process and verification procedure shall be reviewed and modified as necessary.

2.7. Design Errors The Company detects deficiencies or errors in design or in the design quality assurance program by:

- actual failure during operation.

- assessments.

- design verification measures.

- other means.

- personnel using the design documents.

- tests conducted.

2.8. interface Control Design interfaces shall be identified and controlled. The Company shall coordinate design efforts among the participating organizations. Interface controls shall include the assignment of responsibility and the establishment of procedures among participating design organizations. Controls shall be established for the review, approval, release, distribution and revision of documents involving design interfaces. Design information transmitted across interfaces shall be documented and controlled.

2.9. Vendor Design Control The Company reviews and accepts the specifications and drawings for electrical, mechanical, instrumentation, nuclear and structural material, equipment, and erection work, prepared by the Architect Engineer and NSSS Supplier. The purpose of these reviews is to verify inclusion of inspection, testing and acceptance criteria.

The Architect Engineer's evaluation of fabricator and erector's detailed designs, drawings, and work instructions are reviewed for reasonableness and completeness. Audits are conducted by the company for design review systems of architect engineers, nuclear fuel, and NSSS suppliers.

Revision 90 Page of 6 Page 55 of 6 Revision 90

DESIGN CONTROL CHAPTER 3 The Company assures that:

- personnel certifying ASME Section III design activities are qualified Registered Professional Engineers in accordance with ASME Section III, Appendix XXIII.

- architect engineers and NSSS suppliers maintain procedures to assure that their personnel certifying ASME Section III design activities are qualified Registered Professional Engineers in accordance with ASME Section III, Appendix XXIII.

The Company provides qualified personnel to review and approve the resolution of non-conformances relating to electrical, mechanical, instrumentation and structural portions of the plant and to evaluate discrepant modification test results for operating plants.

2.10. Modifications The Company performs modifications that may affect the function of safety-related structures, systems, or components in a manner to assure quality at least equivalent to that specified in original design bases and requirements, materials specifications, and inspection requirements.

2.11. Documentation and Records The Company notifies jurisdictional authorities of the location of ASME Code related permanent records. Design documentation and records which provide evidence that the design and design verification process were performed in accordance with the requirements of this chapter, shall be stored and maintained.

Documentation of design analyses shall include the following:

- statement of the objective of the analyses.

- list of design inputs and their sources.

- results of literature searches or other applicable background data.

- list of assumptions and indication of those that must be verified as the design proceeds.

- list of any computer calculation and the bases for its use.

- review and approval.

Revision 90 Page of 66 Page 66 of Revision 90

PROCUREMENT DOCUMENT CONTROLCHPE4 CHAPTER4

1. SCOPE This Chapter identifies the requirements for preparation, review, approval, release, and retention of procurement documents.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General The Company establishes measures for the preparation, review, and approval of procurement documents for those items and activities within the scope of the QATR. Procurement documents at all tiers include or reference the appropriate regulatory, technical, and quality requirements necessary to assure adequate quality. These requirements include reference to 10CFR21 when applicable.

2.2. Content of Procurement Documents Procurement documents at all tiers include the following items as deemed necessary by the Company.

2.2.1. Scope of Work Procurement documents describe the scope of the items or services to be furnished by a supplier. For those items that are important to plant safety, applicable requirements should be specified in the procurement document.

2.2.2. Technical Requirements The Company establishes measures in controlled procedures to; specify technical requirements by reference to the appropriate specific drawings, specifications, codes, standards, regulations, procedures, or instructions, including revisions thereto that describe the items or services to be furnished.

The procurement documents identify test, inspection and acceptance requirements as appropriate. These documents identify as appropriate special instructions and requirements for such activities as design, material and component identification, fabrication, special process controls, cleaning, erecting, packaging, handling, shipping, and extended storage.

2.2.3. Quality Assurance Program Requirements Measures are established, in controlled procedures, to ensure the appropriate technical and quality requirements are established, by qualified personnel, for the material, equipment, and services purchased from vendors, suppliers, or contractors.

Revision 90 Page 1 Page of 3 I of 3 Revision 90

PROCUREMENT DOCUMENT CONTROL CHAPTER 4 Any changes to these requirements require prior approval by the Company.

Each vendor, supplier, or contractor has an acceptable quality assurance program, which is consistent with applicable regulatory requirements for the item or service.

The Nuclear Oversight Vendor Audit Group (NOVA) maintains a controlled list of evaluated suppliers that are audited on a triennial basis. The evaluated list of such vendors, suppliers, and contractors is described in controlling procedures for the appropriate safety classification except for procurement from other licensees that has a NRC approved quality program.

Procurement documents require the vendors to incorporate quality assurance program requirements in sub-tier procurement documents and allow right of access to the vendors, sub-tier vendors, and contractors facilities and records for inspection or audit by the Company or designated representative.

2.2.4. Non-conformances

,The Company procurement documents specify the requirements for reporting and approving the disposition of supplier non-conformances. "Use as is" or "Repair" requires approval of the supplier disposition by the appropriate Company representative.

2.2.5. Documentation Requirements The procurement documents shall identify, at all tiers, the documentation required to be submitted for information, review, and approval including the time requirements for submittal. The Company procurement documents require the supplier to maintain specific quality assurance documents including retention times and disposition requirements.

2.2.6. Spare and Replacement Parts The procurement documents require the identification of appropriate spare and replacement parts or assemblies and the appropriate delineation of the technical and quality assurance related data required for ordering these parts or assemblies. These spare parts and replacement items are at least equivalent to the original design requirements or those specified by a properly reviewed and approved revision.

2.3. Procurement Document Review Measures are established in controlled procedures to ensure the appropriate technical and quality requirements are established for the material, equipment, and services purchased from vendors, suppliers, or contractors prior to release for bid and contract award.

Revision 90 Page 2 Page of 33 2 of Revision 90

PROCUREMENT DOCUMENT CONTROLCHPE4 CHAPTER4 These documented reviews, including changes to the specification or purchase order, ensure the technical and quality requirements are correctly stated, inspectable, and controllable and have adequate acceptance and rejection criteria and are prepared, reviewed, and approved in accordance with QAP requirements.

Review of the exceptions or changes requested by the supplier shall be analyzed to ensure they do not change or impact the technical or quality requirements and are incorporated in to the procurement documents, prior to the supplier proceeding, using the same review and approval process as appropriate except for commercial terms and editorial changes.

Personnel who have access to pertinent information and who have an adequate understanding of the requirements and intent of the procurement documents shall perform reviews required by this chapter.

2.4. Procurement Records Records as required by the procurement documents or the QATR are retained in the Company's department files, vendor files, or both locations.

Revision 90 Page of 3 3 of Page 3 3 Revision 90

INSTRUCTIONS, PROCEDURES, AND CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS

1. SCOPE Activities governed by the Company's QAP shall be performed as directed by documented instructions, procedures, and drawings appropriate for the activity.

The requirements for the use of these procedures shall also be prescribed in writing. These instructions, procedures, and drawings shall include responsibilities and acceptance criteria as applicable or appropriate for the activity.

Those participating in any activity shall be aware of and use the proper and current revision of instructions, procedures, drawings, and engineering requirements for performing the activity. Procedures may include reference to vendor equipment manuals, design drawings and specifications, prerequisites, special precautions, and the delineation of work to be performed. Equipment Manuals and manufacturers instructions shall be readily available for use.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General Operation, maintenance, or modification of equipment shall be preplanned and performed in accordance with written procedures that are appropriate to the circumstances and that conform to applicable codes, standards, specifications, and criteria. Documents identify and specify the content of records to be generated in conducting the activity. The establishment and execution of quality procedures shall be used by the station staff or those under their direction, for operating, maintenance, modifications, in-service inspection, refueling, and stores activities.

Temporary procedures may be issued to provide guidance in unusual situations that are not within the scope of the normal procedures. Temporary procedures shall be subject to review and approval, and shall include designation of the time period during which they may be used. In the event of an emergency not covered by an approved procedure, authorized personnel shall provide appropriate direction to minimize personnel injury and damage to the facility and to protect the health and safety of plant personnel and the general public.

2.2. Preparation and Review Procedures shall be prepared, reviewed, approved, and used as prescribed in writing, and shall contain step by step instructions in the degree of detail necessary for qualified individuals to perform the required function or task.

Where appropriate, these procedures will include checklists containing the necessary attributes to be observed or measured.

Page 1 of 4 Revision 90

INSTRUCTIONS, PROCEDURES, AND CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS These documents shall include or reference appropriate quantitative or qualitative acceptance criteria for determining that prescribed activities have been satisfactorily accomplished.

The procedures will be independently reviewed and evaluated by other involved company organizations with interface responsibilities and the comments forwarded to the issuing department.

2.3. Procedures and Programs Review and approval of site procedures are performed in accordance with technical specification requirements as delineated in the Technical Review or Station Qualified Review (SQR) programs.

2.3.1. Technical Review and Control

1. Procedures required by a station's Technical Specifications and other procedures which affect nuclear safety, as determined by the manager responsible for station operation, and changes thereto, other than editorial or typographical changes, shall be reviewed as follows prior to implementation, except as noted in item 5 (below).

- Each procedure or procedure change shall be independently reviewed by a qualified individual knowledgeable in the area affected other than the individual who prepared the procedure or procedure change. This review shall include a determination of whether or not additional cross-disciplinary reviews are necessary.

If deemed necessary, the reviews shall be performed by the qualified review personnel of the appropriate discipline(s).

- Changes to the approved fire protection program may be made without prior Plant Operations Review Committee (PORC) approval provided that the changes would not adversely affect the ability to achieve and maintain safe shutdown in the event of a fire, and specific features of the approved program may be altered provided such changes do not otherwise involve a change to the Operating License or technical specifications, or require an exemption.

- Reviews of procedures or changes to procedures, that describe the means for controlling or operating structure, systems, and/or components as described in the UFSAR, will include a review to determine if NRC review and approval is necessary prior to the implementation of the procedure activity. This review is based on the review of a written 10CFR50.59/72.48 review and evaluation prepared by qualified individual(s), or documentation that a 10CFR50.59/72.48 evaluation is not required. The PORC shall review and recommend approval of items requiring NRC review and approval prior to station approval for implementation. NRC Page 2 of 4 Revision 90

INSTRUCTIONS, PROCEDURES, AND CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS approval shall also be obtained prior to station approval for implementation.

- Department head approval authority shall be as specified in station procedures.

- Written records of reviews performed in accordance with this specification shall be prepared and maintained.

- Editorial and typographical changes shall be made in accordance with station procedures.

2. Technical reviewers shall advise their supervisors and/or PORO on all matters related to nuclear safety that are identified during reviews. The reviewer shall be other than the originator. The reviewer shall determine if additional cross-disciplinary reviews are required to ensure all applicable technical disciplines are included. This review shall ensure technical accuracy, compliance with regulatory requirements, and shall verify the originator's determination of whether items reviewed constitutes a change to the Technical Specifications, Operating License, or if NRC review and approval is required prior to implementation.

3. Technical reviewers shall be qualified to perform technical reviews based on the individual's training, experience, and knowledge level. Technical reviewers, assigned the responsibility for reviewing 10OCFR50.59/72.48 reviews and evaluations, shall receive training in this process. Technical reviewers shall be qualified to perform this function and meet the experience requirements per applicable standards. Personnel shall have expertise in one or more of the following disciplines as appropriate, for the subject or subjects being reviewed:

- chemistry

- instrumentation and controls

- mechanical and electrical systems

- nuclear power plant technology

- radiological controls

- reactor engineering

- reactor operations

4. Technical reviews shall be documented and records maintained.

5. Temporary Changes Temporary changes to procedures required by 2.3.1.1 (above) may be made provided:

- the intent of the original procedure is not altered.

- the change is approved by two members of the plant management Staff knowledgeable in the areas affected by the procedures, at least Page 3 of 4 Revision 90

INSTRUCTIONS, PROCEDURES, AND CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS one of whom holds a Senior Reactor Operator's License on the unit affected.

-the change is documented, reviewed, and approved in accordance with 2.3.1 (above) within 14 days of implementation.

2.3.2. On-site Qualified Technical Review (Dresden Unit 1)

A Qualified Technical Reviewer shall conduct thorough reviews of the documents specified below. Persons performing these reviews shall be knowledgeable in the subject area being reviewed. Qualified technical reviews must be completed prior to implementation of proposed activities.

1. Qualified Technical Reviewers shall be individuals without direct responsibility for the document under review; these reviewers may be from the same functionally cognizant organization as the individual or group performing the original work.

2. Qualified Technical Reviewers shall have at least 5 years of professional experience and either a Bachelor's degree in Engineering or the Physical Sciences or shall have equivalent qualifications evaluated on a case by case basis and approved by the manager responsible for decommissioning activities. The appointment of Qualified Technical Reviewers shall be documented.

3. A Qualified Technical Reviewer shall independently review the following subjects:

- Proposed changes to the license, technical specifications, or bases.

- Proposed changes to the programs required by the Technical Specifications to verify that such changes do not involve a change to the Technical Specifications and will not require NRC review and approval as defined in 100FR50.59/72.48.

- 10OCFR50.59 evaluations for changes in the facility as described in the De-fueled Safety Analysis Report (DSAR), changes in procedures as described in the DSAR, and tests or experiments not described in the DSAR to verify that such actions do not involve a change to the Technical Specifications or will not require NRC review and approval as defined in 10OCFR50.59.

Revision 90 Page of 4 Page 44 of 4 Revision 90

DOCUMENT CONTROL CHAPTER 6

1. SCOPE Measures shall be established to control and coordinate the classification, review, approval, issuance, revision, and change of documents that prescribe methods or provide the technical and/or quality requirements for activities and items within the scope of this program. These measures shall ensure that such documents are reviewed for adequacy, approved for release and use, and distributed to the location where the activity is performed

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General The Company document control process ensures that procedures are reviewed and approved before initial use. The Company has in place programmatic controls, which ensure that procedures are technically and administratively correct before use. These programmatic controls ensure that procedures are reviewed and revised as needed, when pertinent source material is changed, when the plant design is changed, or when deficiencies are identified and corrected. Provisions shall be established to ensure that infrequently used procedures are reviewed prior to use, unless they have been reviewed within the previous two years. The periodic biennial review requirements are satisfied by implementation of several processes and programs. Except as noted in appendix C, due to their importance to safety, biennial review of abnormal procedures (such as emergency operating procedures) shall continue. These processes and programs provide the programmatic controls that ensure the required reviews are accomplished and include the following:

- Commitment Management and Tracking Process.

- Integrated Reporting/Corrective Action Program.

- Operational Experience Feedback Program.

- Plant Modification Program.

- Procedure Feedback Process.

- Technical Specification and Updated Final Safety Analysis Report Revision Programs.

- Vendor Information Program.

2.2. Reviews The company has also established provisions to ensure that the following reviews are conducted:

- inspection, identification of inspection personnel, and documentation of inspection results.

- maintenance, modification, and inspection procedures are reviewed by qualified personnel, knowledgeable in quality assurance disciplines.

Page 1 of 3 Revision 90

DOCUMENT CONTROL CHAPTER 6

- necessary inspection requirements, methods, and acceptance criteria have been identified.

2.3. Controlled Documents Written document control procedures shall be established to provide for the control of approved documents. Documents that are controlled include, but are not limited to, the following items:

- administrative procedures

- as-built and design drawings.

- assessments

- calibration procedures.

- computer codes and software.

- corrective action reports.

- design specifications.

- emergency operating procedures.

- engineering calculations.

- inspection and test reports.

- maintenance procedures

- nonconformance reports.

- NOS procedures.

- operating procedures.

- purchase orders and related documents.

- safety analysis reports.

- supplier audit and surveillance procedures.

- technical specifications (station and Independent Spent Fuel Storage Installation)

- temporary and emergency procedure changes.

- topical reports.

- work instructions and procedures.

2.4. Control Measures The Company document control process includes the following document control measures:

- coordinating and controlling interface documents.

- distributing documents approved for issuance in accordance with updated and current distribution lists.

- establishing document control procedures to assure that proper documents are accessible and are being used.

- establishing lists of documents controlled by organizations involved with activities affecting quality.

Page 2 of 3 Revision 90

DOCUMENT CONTROL CHAPTER 6

- establishing procedural requirements for the protection of safeguards information

- identifying and assuring that proper documents are used in performing activities affecting quality.

- identifying qualified individuals or organizations responsible for preparing, reviewing, approving and issuing documents, including revisions.

- recalling or identifying obsolete documents.

2.5. Document Changes The Company document control process ensures changes, to documents are reviewed and approved by the same organizations that performed the original review and approval, unless delegated to another responsible organization. The reviewing organization has access to pertinent background data or information upon which to base their approval. To avoid a possible omission of a required review, the Company document control process includes provisions to control minor changes.

Revision 90 Page of 3 3 of Page 3 3 Revision 90

CONTROL OF PURCHASED MATERIAL, CHAPTER 7 EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES

1. SCOPE The Company establishes measures to assure the quality of purchased material, equipment and services conform to procurement document requirements for items contained within the QATR.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. Supplier Selection 2.1.1. General The Company establishes measures to assure that purchased material, equipment, and services conform to the procurement documents for safety related and ASME code specifications as appropriate. This assurance is accomplished by controlling both the selection of procurement sources and acceptance of the product at the source and/or upon receipt at the appropriate location.

The company procedures, which address the procurement process and receipt and storage of material and equipment, clearly define the responsibilities and interfaces between the line requisitioning organization, engineering, supply and quality assurance.

2.1.2. Methods The Company establishes and implements measures for the evaluation and selection of procurement sources. These measures must be completed prior to the award of contract. These measures include one or more of the following:

- evaluation of the supplier's history of providing an identical or similar product that performs satisfactorily in actual use.

- supplier's current quality records supported by documented qualitative and quantitative information that can be objectively evaluated.

- supplier's technical and quality capability of meeting the applicable quality requirements of 100FR50 Appendix B as determined by a direct evaluation of its facilities and personnel and the implementation of its quality assurance program.

- review and evaluation of audits, surveys, and inspections conducted by other utilities, or American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).

- if there is insufficient evidence of implementation of a QA program, the initial evaluation is of the existence of a QA program addressing the scope of the services to be provided. The initial audit is performed after the supplier has completed sufficient work to demonstrate that its organization is implementing a QA program.

Page 1 of 8 Revision 90

CONTROL OF PURCHASED MATERIAL, CHAPTER 7 EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES The Company documents and files the results of these measures and maintains an evaluated list of suppliers.

2.2. Bid Evaluations The Company reviews and evaluates bids and awards contracts using written procedures and documents the results. The Company designates individuals or organizations to review bids to assure that they conform to the procurement document requirements and the supplier has the appropriate technical ability, Quality Program, production capability, personnel, and acceptable past performance to supply the product or service. The Company obtains commitments to resolve unacceptable quality conditions identified as part of the bid evaluation before award of the contract and ensure exceptions and alternatives do not impact the technical or quality requirements.

2.3. Supplier In-Process Control 2.3.1. General The Company establishes measures to interface with and to verify supplier performance. These measures include the following items:

- establishing an understanding between the Company and the supplier of the provisions and specifications contained in the procurement documents.

- establishing a method of document information exchange between the Company and the supplier.

- establishing the extent of source surveillance and inspection activities.

- identifying and processing necessary change information.

- requiring the supplier to identify planning techniques, tests, inspections, and processes to be used in fulfilling procurement document requirements.

- reviewing supplier documents that are generated or processed during activities fulfilling procurement requirements.

2.3.2. In-Process Control and Verification Planning The Company and the supplier, establish as appropriate, notification points, including hold and witness points and incorporate into the appropriate documents based upon the complexity and scope of the item or service. When required by the procurement document or specification, surveillances and evaluations at the supplier's facility are conducted to verify continued compliance with the quality assurance requirements of the procurement documents.

Qualified individuals or its agents accomplish source inspections at the supplier's facility to verify that the procurement item or service is being supplied in accordance with the requirements of the procurement documents.

Page 2 of 8 Revision 90

CONTROL OF PURCHASED MATERIAL, CHAPTER 7 EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES Such inspections, examinations or tests are accomplished in accordance with written procedures, plans, and/or checklists containing or referencing appropriate acceptance criteria. Upon acceptance by source verification, the Company furnishes documented evidence of acceptance to the receiving destination of the item, to the purchaser, and to the supplier.

2.3.3. Programmatic Verification The Company or its agents verify the effectiveness of the supplier's quality program by survey, audit or surveillance. Verification is performed at intervals consistent with the importance to safety, complexity and quality of the product or services furnished. Activities are witnessed or observed and the results documented when source verification is performed.

The Company conducts audits per the requirements established in Chapter 18 or reviews audits performed by other license holders as defined in procedures.

The results of these audits are used to support the maintenance of the list of evaluated suppliers. Verification activities are conducted as early as practicable so that subsequent activities do not prevent disclosure of deficiencies. The Company's verification activities do not relieve the supplier of its responsibility for quality verification.

2.3.4. Supplier and Verification of Supplier Performance Records The Company establishes methods to control, handle and approve supplier documents. Suppliers submit their documents per procurement requirements.

Acceptance criteria is used for the acquisition, processing, and record evaluation of technical inspection and test data.

The Company records activities to verify supplier conformance with the requirements of procurement documents. Source surveillances, procurement plans, inspections, audits, surveys, receiving inspections, non-conformance dispositions, waivers and corrective actions concerning supplier activities are documented. This documentation is used to determine the supplier's quality assurance program effectiveness.

2.3.5. Control of Procurement Changes The Company documents changes to procurement documents involving technical or quality assurance matters. These changes are subjected to the same review and approval process as the original procurement document except for commercial terms and conditions and editorial changes.

Revision 90 Page 3 Page of 8 3 of 8 Revision 90

CONTROL OF PURCHASED MATERIAL, CHAPTER 7 EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES 2.4. Acceptance of Purchased Items and Services 2.4.1. General Upon receipt the applicable materials, parts, and components are controlled.

Qualified inspection personnel are responsible for inspecting, releasing, and maintaining the inspection status of purchased material and equipment. After receipt inspection, the purchased material is placed in a controlled storage area or issued for installation or further work.

2.4.2. Acceptance by Receiving Inspection The Company uses approved procedures to accept purchased items and services. Acceptance of an item or service from a supplier includes certificate of conformance, source verification, receiving inspection or post installation testing at the plant location or a combination thereof. Items are inspected during receipt using approved procedures and checklists.

The Company does receiving inspections using procedures and inspection instructions to verify conformance to the specified requirements, using objective evidence to check such features as: complete documentation and visual inspection of: proper configuration; identification; dimensional, physical and other characteristics; freedom from shipping damage; and cleanliness. Items, which can not meet the purchase order requirements, will be segregated and controlled as defined in the applicable procedures.

The Company coordinates the review of supplier documentation with the receiving inspection when procurement documents require such documentation to be furnished prior to the receiving inspection. Source verification and audit activities are factored into the receipt inspection activities as appropriate.

2.4.3. Acceptance by Source Verification The Company considers acceptance by source verification when the item or service is:

- vital to plant safety; or

- difficult to verify quality characteristics after delivery; or

- complex in design, manufacture, and test.

Source verification shall be implemented in accordance with plans to perform inspections, examinations, or tests at pre-determined points. Upon acceptance by source verification, the Company furnishes documented evidence of acceptance to the receiving destination of the item, to the purchaser, and to the supplier.

Revision 90 Page of 88 Page 44 of Revision 90

CONTROL OF PURCHASED MATERIAL, CHAPTER 7 EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES 2.4.4. Acceptance by Certificate of Conformance The supplier's certificate of conformance attests the product or service provided is in accordance with the procurement documents is reviewed during source and/or receipt inspections to verify compliance. This document provides the purchase order number; codes, standards or other specifications required to be met in the purchase order. Requirements which cannot be met must be included with an explanation why and a means to resolve the non-conformances. A person who is responsible for quality assurance function attests to this certificate The validity of a supplier's certificate of conformance is ascertained through any of the following methods source inspection, independent inspection agency, receipt inspections, surveillance, testing of hardware, quality assurance audits or surveillances at intervals commensurate with the suppliers past performance.

Inspection and test activities verify that the hardware performs in accordance with applicable technical requirements and serve to demonstrate that the hardware meets the requirements stated in a certificate of conformance.

The results of the source and/or receipt inspections, the acceptability of supplier furnished documentation, and the resulting determination of conformance or nonconformance is documented.

2.4.5. Acceptance by Post Installation Testing When post-installation testing is used, the Company establishes post-installation test requirements, giving due consideration to supplier recommendations.

Acceptance by this method is satisfactory when performed following the accomplishment of at least one preceding method and when:

- it is difficult to verify the quality characteristics of the item without it being installed and in use; or

- the item requires an integrated system checkout or test with other items to verify its quality characteristics; or

- the item cannot prove its ability to perform its intended function except when in use.

2.4.6. Acceptance of Services Only In cases involving procurement of services only, the Company accepts the service by any of the following methods:

- technical verification of data produced.

- surveillance, audit, survey, or assessment of the activity.

- review of objective evidence for conformance to the procurement document requirements such as certifications, stress reports, etc.

Page 5 of 8 Revision 90

CONTROL OF PURCHASED MATERIAL, CHAPTER 7 EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES In lieu of the above the Company performs a receiving inspection for items arriving back onsite that were sent offsite for repair, testing, or rework.

2.4.7. Commercial Grade Items Where the safety related design utilizes commercial grade items, the following requirements are a permissible alternative for acceptance, to other requirements of this Chapter:

1. An approved design document identifies the commercial grade item. (An alternate commercial grade item may be applied, provided the cognizant design organization provided verification that the alternate commercial grade item will perform the intended function and will meet design requirements applicable to both the replaced item and its application.)

2. The Company performs source evaluation and selection, where determined necessary, based on complexity and importance to safety.

- commercial grade dedication plans for use in a safety related applications state responsibility for 10CFR21 requirements.

- the Company identifies commercial grade items in the purchase order by the supplier's published product description.

3. One or a combination of the following methods shall be utilized to provide reasonable assurance that the item meets the acceptance criteria for the characteristics identified to be verified for acceptance:

- acceptable supplier/item performance records.

- commercial grade survey of the supplier.

- source verification.

- special test(s) or inspection(s) or both.

4. After receipt of a commercial grade item, the Company determines the following:

- damage was not sustained during shipment.

- documentation, as applicable to the item, was received and is acceptable.

- inspection and/or testing are accomplished, as required by the purchaser, to assure conformance with the manufacturer's published requirements.

- the item received was the item ordered.

2.4.8 Acceptance of Calibration Services For suppliers of commercial-grade calibration services with accreditation by a nationally recognized accrediting body, a documented review of the supplier's accreditation by the purchaser may be used in lieu of inspections or tests following Page 6 of 8 Revision 90

CONTROL OF PURCHASED MATERIAL, CHAPTER 7 EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES delivery or in-process surveillances during performance of the service. This review shall include, at a minimum, all of the following:

1. The accreditation is to ANSI/ISO/lEC 17025.

2. The calibration laboratory holds a domestic accreditation by one of the following accrediting bodies, which are recognized by the International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation (ILAC) Mutual Recognition Arrangement (MRA):

- National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), administered by NIST

- American Association for Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA)

- ACLASS Accreditation Services (ACLASS)

- International Accreditation Service (lAS)

- Laboratory Accreditation Bureau (L-A-B)

3. The published scope of accreditation for the calibration laboratory covers the needed measurement parameters, ranges, and uncertainties.

4. The purchase documents impose additional technical and administrative requirements, as necessary, to satisfy the Exelon QATR program and technical requirements. The technical requirements will also include the following requirements:

- The calibration certificate/report shall include identification of the laboratory equipment/standards used.

- The calibration certificate/report shall include as-found and as-left data.

5. The purchase documents require reporting as-found calibration data when calibrated items are found to be out-of-tolerance.

2.5. Presence of Documentary Evidence Documented evidence that material or equipment conforms to procurement requirements is present at the site before use or installation. This documentary evidence is traceable to the item and shall be retained at the nuclear power plant site and shall be sufficient to identify the specific requirements such as codes, standards, or specifications met by the purchased material and equipment.

2.6. Spare or Replacement Items Procedures control the procurement, storage and issuance of materials and components including spare and replacement parts. Procurement documents Page 7 of 8 Revision 90

CONTROL OF PURCHASED MATERIAL, CHAPTER 7 EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES for these items identify the appropriate technical and quality related requirements. The Company purchases spare parts and replacement items, equipment and components to at least the original design requirements or those specified by a properly reviewed and approved revision.

Where the QA requirements of the original item cannot be determined, qualified individuals conduct an engineering evaluation to establish appropriate requirements and controls. This evaluation insures that interfaces, interchangeability, safety, fit and function are not adversely affected or are contrary to applicable regulatory or ASME Code requirements. The evaluators document their results.

Where the company procured the original item with no specifically identified quality assurance program requirements or from an Original Equipment Manufacturer/Supplier (QEM/QES) who no longer is on a list of evaluated suppliers, identical (like-for-like) items may be similarly procured from the OEM/QES through the use of procurement plans.

In such cases, the Company conducts a joint technical engineering and quality assurance documented evaluation to established requirements and controls to assure at least equivalent product performance. The evaluation shall assure that interfaces, interchangeability, safety, fit and function are not adversely affected or are not contrary to applicable regulatory or ASME Code requirements.

2.6.1. Procurement from Other Utilities Purchases of safety related items can be made from other utilities who have had an NRC approved QA Program in effect at the time of their procurement and receipt and such utility has maintained a quality system program for storage, handling, and maintenance with documented traceability to the manufacturer of the items.

Certificates-of-Conformance to the above requirements and associated required documentation are provided.

2.6.2. Maintenance or Modification The Company performs maintenance or modifications that may affect the function of safety related structures, systems, or components in a manner to assure quality at least equivalent to that specified in original design bases and requirements, materials specifications, and inspection requirements.

Revision 90 Page 8 of 8 8 of 8 Revision 90

IDENTIFICATION AND CONTROL OF CHAPTER 8 MATERIALS, PARTS, AND COMPONENTS

1. SCOPE Controls are established to assure that only correct and accepted items are used or installed. Identification shall be maintained on the items or in documents traceable to the items, or in a manner, which assures that identification is established and maintained.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General The Company establishes measures for the identification and control of materials, parts and components, including partially fabricated assemblies, and assures that only correct and accepted items are used or installed* Identification is maintained on the items or in documents traceable to the items. Physical identification shall be used to the maximum extent possible.

Provisions are in place to maintain markings, which could be damaged during shipping or handling or deterioration due to environmental exposure. Provisions are also established to control nonconforming items and maintain parts, material, and equipment in storage traceable to quality assurance documents.

2.2. Traceability Items within the scope of the QAP shall be identified, so that they can be traced to the appropriate documentation, which provides objective evidence that the technical and quality requirements are met.

Responsible organizations document and maintain identification and traceability of items from initial receipt, throughout fabrication, installation, and use of the items such as: subassemblies, components, equipment numbers, part numbers, serial number, heat treatment number, batch or lot numbers.

When installed material or equipment is removed for maintenance, repair, or modification, control measures are implemented to ensure proper identification and traceability is maintained. Before use or installation of an item, the installer verifies that identification has been maintained.

2.3. Identification Methods Identification is on the item where practicable. Identification is clear, unambiguous and indelible. Identification does not affect the fit, function, quality, and service life of the item. If the item cannot be practicably marked, the Company uses records traceable to the item for identification.

Page 1 of 2 Revision 90

IDENTIFICATION AND CONTROL OF CHAPTER 8 MATERIALS, PARTS, AND COMPONENTS If physical identification is either impractical or insufficient for proper control, the Company controls an item by physical separation, procedural control or other appropriate means.

2.4. Transfer of Markings Prior to cutting or dividing material, each new piece shall be marked with the same traceability markings of the original piece to ensure that the traceability of the material is maintained. These markings shall not be obliterated or hidden by surface treatment or coatings unless other means of identification are substituted. The Company independently verifies proper identification of each piece.

2.5 Limited Life Items The Company identifies and controls items having limited life to preclude use of items whose shelf life or operating life has expired.

2.6 Stored Items The Company uses procedures to assure proper control of identification for items in storage.

Revision 90 Page of 22 Page 22 of Revision 90

CONTROL OF SPECIAL PROCESSES CHAPTER 9

1. SCOPE Processes affecting quality of items or services shall be controlled. Special processes that control or verify quality, shall be performed by qualified personnel, using qualified procedures, in accordance with specified requirements and are properly documented and evaluated. These requirements are defined in codes, standards, specifications, or special instructions. The quality of such processes is assured through reliance on operator skill and in-process control. Examples of special processes include, but are not limited to welding, heat treating, chemical cleaning, and non-destructive examination (NDE).

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General The Company organization directing work during repair, replacement, modification, or in-service inspection (ISI) activities is responsible for controlling special processes. Special process controls are assured through independent assessment and inspection activities.

2.2. Process Control Instructions, procedures, drawings, checklists, or other appropriate means control processes. Process controls specify the prerequisite steps, processing details, conditions to be maintained during the process, equipment requirements, inspection and test requirements, acceptance criteria, and record requirements. Controlling includes:

- maintenance and retention of records.

- personnel qualification.

- procedure development and qualification.

- procedure implementation.

- qualification of equipment.

2.3. Special Processes Measures shall be established and documented to assure that special processes are accomplished under controlled conditions in accordance with applicable codes, standards, applications criteria, regulatory requirements and Commitments, and other special requirements including the use of qualified personnel and procedures. Special processes are controlled by instructions, procedures, drawings, checklists, travelers, or other appropriate means.

Revision 90 Page 1 Page of 3 1 of 3 Revision 90

CONTROL OF SPECIAL PROCESSES CHAPTER 9 Special process controls specify the preparatory steps, processing details, conditions to be maintained during the process, equipment requirements, inspection and test requirements, acceptance criteria, and record requirements.

Special process procedures are written and qualified in accordance with applicable requirements. Special process procedures are reviewed and approved as follows:

- Coating and ASME Code concrete placement procedures are reviewed and approved by the appropriate Company organizations.

- Company, contractor and subcontractor heat treating, welding, and brazing procedures are reviewed in accordance with the company welding program as approved by Engineering.

- Company NDE procedures are reviewed and approved by the appropriate Company Level Ill.

- Contractor, subcontractor,Section III, XI, and other ISI-related NDE procedures that will be utilized on site are reviewed and approved by a Company NDE Level Ill.

- The responsible Company engineering organization reviews contractor and subcontractor non-welding special process procedures.

When permitted by applicable requirements, the Company may direct contractors or subcontractors to use Company special process procedures.

When there is a specific reason to question whether special process procedure requirements are being met, the Company, or the Authorized Inspection Agency (AlA) may require re-evaluation of the procedure before work may proceed.

For special processes not covered by the existing codes or standards, or when the quality requirements of an item exceed the requirements of established codes or standards, the necessary qualifications of personnel, procedures and equipment shall be defined in the procedure.

2.4. Personnel Qualification Company and contractor personnel performing special processes are trained, tested, qualified, or certified in accordance with a company procedure that meets applicable requirements.

For NDE personnel, the Company and contractor personnel performing NDE are trained, tested, qualified, or certified in accordance with a company procedure that meets applicable requirements of 10CFR50.55a and ASME Section Xl with specific exceptions and clarifications. When permitted by applicable requirements, the Company may qualify and control contractor personnel certifications.

Revision 90 Page Page 2 of 3 2 of 3 Revision 90

CONTROL OF SPECIAL PROCESSES CHAPTER 9 The Company assures compliance with the ASME Code through an agreement with an AlA who verifies compliance in accordance with their procedure that describes the ANI duties and responsibilities. When there is a specific reason to question the ability of an individual performing special processes, the Company, or the AlA may require re-evaluation before that individual will be permitted to resume work. Individuals failing any retest will be removed from applicable operations pending re-qualification.

The Company designates a principal(s) NDE Level Ill and they are responsible for personnel qualification and procedure development to ASME Code requirements for nondestructive examination. These NDE personnel are qualified and certified in accordance with the Company procedure and may designate other NDE Level Ill's for certification of personnel. NDE Level Ill's have authority for the interpretation of any NDE indication that has been recorded by a company or supplemental vendor Level IlIll1 Examiner.

Training and certification of NDE personnel associated with nondestructive examination are carried out in accordance with the requirements of 10OCFR50.55a and ASME Section XI with specific exceptions and clarifications are met. The company develops and maintains a procedure detailing the program that will be used for qualification and certification and has ultimate responsibility for determination of the qualification process. Qualified personnel administer all ASME Code examination activities.

2.5. Special Process Records Special process records provide evidence that special processes were performed in accordance with approved procedures by qualified personnel.

These records are retained by the Company or by the contractor or subcontractor as required by procurement documents. Records are maintained for currently qualified personnel, processes, and equipment for each special process.

Revision 90 Page of 3 3 of Page 3 3 Revision 90

INSPECTION CHAPTER 10

1. SCOPE The Company plans and executes an inspection program to verify that activities affecting the quality of safety-related structures, systems, and components conform to documented requirements. For modification and non-routine maintenance activities, inspections are conducted in a manner similar (i.e.

frequency, type and personnel performing such inspections) to those associated with construction phase activities. The independent inspections described in this Chapter are not intended to dilute or replace the clear responsibility of the first line supervisors for the quality of work performed under their supervision or personnel performing the activity.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General The Company establishes controls for coordination and execution of inspection plans. Company quality verification organizations or other qualified organizations are responsible for implementation of established inspection plans. If an inspection plan includes inspections by personnel other than those in a quality verification organization, the inspection requirements, personnel qualification criteria, and inspector independence will be accepted by the responsible quality organization prior to implementation.

2.2. Inspection Plans The Company prepares documented inspection plans. These inspection plans are applied when the activity is started. The inspection plans may be separate documents or an integral part of approved instructions, procedures or drawings.

Related codes, standards, specifications and design documents are used to develop the inspection plans. Procedures used for documenting inspection plans are selectively reviewed, as appropriate, by NOS to assure that necessary verification points and inspection criteria are included. The plans identify:

- acceptance criteria.

- activities to be inspected.

- inspection characteristics.

- inspection techniques/equipment (including accuracy requirements).

- provisions for inspection and test status.

- provisions for the recording of inspection results.

- qualification requirements.

- responsible organizations.

Revision 90 Page 1 Page of 3 1 of 3 Revision 90

INSPECTION CHAPTER 10 2.3. Inspection Personnel and Qualification A qualification program is established and documented to conform to applicable codes, standards, or licensing requirements. Qualifications and certifications are kept current.

Qualified personnel perform inspections. Inspectors with valid certifications perform inspections for acceptance. Inspectors are independent of those who perform or directly supervise the activity being inspected. On-the-Job training inspections shall be performed under the direct supervision of qualified personnel.

Second line supervisory personnel or other qualified personnel not assigned first line supervisory responsibility for the conduct of the work may conduct inspection of operating activities. Operating activities are defined as work functions associated with normal operations of the plant, routine maintenance, and certain technical services routinely assigned to the onsite operating organization.

2.4. Inspection Process Inspections are performed using approved instructions, procedures, process sheets, travelers, or checklists and applicable drawings.

- Inspections are performed for each work or operating activity where necessary to verify quality. Where inspection sampling is used to verify the acceptability of a group of items, the sampling procedure shall be based on recognized standard practices.

- Process monitoring may be used when inspection of processed material or products is impossible or impractical. When necessary, to ensure quality throughout the duration of the process, both inspection and process monitoring will be systematically used to verify conformance to requirements.

- When inspections must be performed before work can continue, hold points are established in appropriate documents. Consent to waive hold points are recorded prior to continuation of work. When inspection is desired, but not mandatory before work can continue, witness points are established. Completion of hold and witness points is documented.

- When acceptance criteria are not met, corrected areas are re-inspected.

Such inspections are documented in the Corrective Action Program.

- Changes to, or rework of, an item after inspection requires re-inspection of the affected areas.

- A final evaluation is performed. Inspection results are reviewed to confirm that required inspections and quality records have been completed, identified non-conformances have been resolved and the item conforms to specified requirements. Engineering, Maintenance, Operations or Quality Verification approves final acceptance of the item.

Page 2 of 3 Revision 90

INSPECTION CHAPTER 10

-Inspection records are of sufficient detail to confirm completion and, as a minimum, identify:

- authorized individual approving results.

- date of inspection.

- inspector/Data recorder.

- item inspected.

- M&TE used.

- reference to action taken in connection with identified non-conformances.

- results or acceptability.

- type of observation.

- When the inspection activity is performed using a procedure not referenced or included within the work package, the procedure and its revision should be recorded.

2.5. In-Service Inspections A program for the required ISI/IST inspection of completed systems, structures and components shall be planned and executed by or for the organization.

responsible for the operation of the plant to assure that plant components perform satisfactorily under all operating conditions.

Inspection methods shall be established and executed to applicable codes, standards and regulations, including baseline examinations and subsequent periodic examinations, which continue through the life of the plant in accordance applicable technical specifications.

2.6. Independent Verification Independent verifications are conducted by qualified personnel using approved procedures. Characteristics to be verified and methods to be employed shall be specified. Verification results and unacceptable conditions identified shall be documented. Verifications shall be performed by persons other than those who performed or directly supervised the work being verified.

Revision 90 Page of 3 3 of Page 3 3 Revision 90

TEST CONTROL CHAPTER 11

1. SCOPE A documented test program shall be established in accordance with applicable technical specifications, license conditions, and design documents to assure that all testing required demonstrating that the structures, systems, or components within the scope of this QAP will perform satisfactorily in service.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General 2.1.1. Testing Program The Company establishes and controls a test program to assure that design and performance criteria have been satisfied and assures that testing does not adversely affect the safe operation of the plant. The test program includes, as appropriate, procedures to ensure those structures, systems, subsystems, and components will perform in service. Testing is conducted by appropriately trained and qualified personnel. The extent of testing shall be based on the complexity of the modification, replacement, or repair. The test program covers all required tests including:

- operational tests.

- production tests.

- prototype qualification tests.

- tests during design.

- tests during fabrication.

- the demonstration of satisfactory performance following plant maintenance and modifications or procedural changes.

- those tests required by plant maintenance or modifications.

2.1.2. Test Procedures The program uses written test procedures which include the requirements and acceptance limits from applicable design documents. The Company reviews and approves test procedures and changes to test procedures, including changes that alter test sequence, in a similar manner to the original.

The organization responsible for the design of the item to be tested establishes the test requirements and acceptance criteria. Test requirements and acceptance criteria are based upon specified requirements contained in applicable design or other pertinent documents. Test requirements include specific characteristics to be tested.

Revision 90 Page 1 Page of 6 1 of 6 Revision 90

TEST CONTROL CHAPTER 11 The Company specifies specific test methods when they must be employed, uses written procedures or checklists, and documents the status of equipment both before and after testing.

The Company may use appropriate sections of related documents, such as ASTM methods, supplier manuals, equipment maintenance instructions, or approved drawings or travelers with acceptance criteria in lieu of specially prepared written test procedures. Such documents must include adequate instructions to assure the required quality of work. Test and inspection procedures contain:

- a description of objectives.

- acceptance criteria or limits contained in applicable design or other source documents, such as vendor's literature, engineering drawings or

• plant specifications that will be used to evaluate results.

- any special equipment or calibrations required to Conduct the test or inspection.

- responsibilities.

- instructions or checklists used to verify or document that affected plant systems are arranged in their correct lineup and for restoring the system to the condition consistent with the normal operating status.

- limiting conditions.

- prerequisites for, or checks to be made prior to performing the tests or inspections including any special conditions to be used to simulate normal or abnormal operating conditions.

- data documentation is in compliance with test procedures.

- equipment to be tested is properly released for testing.

- inspections and tests are done under suitable environmental conditions.

- proper calibrated inspection and test instruments are used.

- retention control of test data documentation is adequate.

- test or inspection requirements contained in applicable design documents.

Where tests and inspections are to be witnessed, the procedure identifies hold points or witness points in the testing sequence to permit witnessing. The procedure requires appropriate approval for the test to continue beyond the designated hold point.

1. Prerequisites Prerequisites include the following, as applicable:

Revision 90 Page of 6 2 of Page 2 6 Revision 90

TEST CONTROL CHAPTER 11

- appropriate test equipment.

- calibrated instrumentation in accordance with Chapter 12, "Control of Measuring and Test Equipment."

- condition of test equipment and the item to be tested.

- provisions for data acquisition.

- suitable environmental conditions.

- trained personnel.

Procedures ensure that prerequisite steps for equipment testing have been or will be performed. Such steps include:

- completion of necessary construction maintenance and modification activities.

- formal release for testing.

- measures to preserve equipment status.

- prior testing.

- safety precautions.

A detailed prescribed physical inspection of equipment components and facilities is performed to ensure readiness for operation. Typical inspection items include:

- calibration of instruments.

- cleanliness.

- lubrication.

- presence of safety devices.

- setting of limit switches.

2. Schedule Schedules are provided to assure that all necessary tests are performed and properly evaluated on a timely basis. Testing is scheduled so that the safety of the plant is never dependent on the performance of an untested system.

3. Test Results and Records Appropriate Company personnel evaluate test results to assure conformance with design and performance requirements. Inspection and test results are documented in a test report or data sheet. Each report identifies the following:

- acceptability of the test.

- actions taken to correct the deviations noted.

- any deviation of test results from acceptance criteria (nonconformance).

- as-found condition.

Page 3 of 6 Revision 90

TEST CONTROL CHAPTER 11

- as-left condition.

- completion date and other significant dates and times.

- data sheets completed during the tests.

- documents that provide acceptance criteria.

- identification of the conditions encountered which were not anticipated.

- identity of inspector or tester.

- item to which it applies.

- location where testing was performed or where test samples were taken.

- measuring and test equipment used.

- person evaluating test results.

- procedures or instructions followed in performing the task.

- test procedures.

- test results.

2.2. Instrumentation and Control The Company tests instrumentation and control channels to assure that they are properly calibrated. In addition, specific tests are performed at critical levels such as "set points" in a manner simulating the approach toward the set point.

These calibrations are made with the devices in their normal positions if the calibration is dependent upon location or attitude.

Testing determines that a proper response is obtained over the operating range of the device. It gives particular attention to verifying independence and dependence, as appropriate, of the elements of the systems. Calibration documentation includes indicating the date and identity of the person that performed the calibration.

The Company prepares and documents installation, inspection and test procedures and work instructions for instrumentation and electrical equipment.

These documents are kept current and revised as necessary to assure that installation, inspections and tests are performed in accordance with latest information. They include as appropriate:

- approvals.

- data report forms.

- frequency of inspection or test.

- identification of test equipment and date for required re-calibration where required for interpretation of test results.

- inspection and test acceptance limits.

- inspection and test equipment required.

- inspection and test objectives.

- installation specifications.

Page 4 of 6 Revision 90

TEST CONTROL CHAPTER 11

- precautions to avoid component or system damage during testing or inspection.

- prerequisites.

- sequence of tests (ifapplicable).

- sequential actions to be performed.

2.3. Electrical Tests Electrical tests include as appropriate:

- continuity tests, short circuit tests, polarity and rotational tests

- control system tests including indicating meters, recorders, transducers, targets and lamps, annunciators and alarms, controls and interlocks

- insulation resistance measurements as specified

- over potential (HIPOT) tests as specified. Overpotential tests conform to the applicable codes and standards. The manufacturer's recommendations are considered.

- voltage breakdown tests on liquid insulation 2.4. Mechanical Tests The Company performs mechanical tests to ascertain that electric and/or instrumentation components or systems can withstand system pressure ratings.

As a minimum, the Company applies such tests to pressure sensing and transmitting devices operating in steam, hydraulic, and vacuum systems and their hydraulic or pneumatic interconnecting piping or tubing and associated instruments.

• Pressurized equipment that is part of electrical apparatus such as heat exchangers, circulating systems, actuating systems, and electric and instrumentation containment penetrations are likewise tested if site assembled or fabricated. Tests are conducted after the assembly is complete even though the components may have been tested previously. These tests are performed in accordance with the applicable codes and standards.

2.5. Physical and Chemical Tests Physical and chemical tests, in accordance with the applicable codes, include, as appropriate:

- chemical analysis of fluids for oxygen or moisture content and purity.

- radiation sensitivity testing to confirm that radiation sensor and controlling devices is properly functioning.

Revision 90 Page 5 Page of 6 5 of 6 Revision 90

TEST CONTROL CHAPTER 11 2.6. Surveillance Tests The Company's test program covers surveillance testing during the operational phase to provide assurances that failures or substandard performance do not remain undetected and that the required reliability of safety related systems is maintained.

2.7. Maintenance or Major Procedure Change The Company performs tests following plant modification or significant changes in operating procedures to confirm that the modification or changes produce expected results. These tests also demonstrate that the change does not produce an unsafe operating condition.

Revision 90 Page of 6 Page 66 of 6 Revision 90

CONTROL OF MEASURING AND TEST CHAPTER 12 EQUIPMENT

1. SCOPE Measures and responsibilities are established to assure tools, gauges, instruments, and other Measuring and Testing Equipment (M&TE) used in activities affecting quality are properly controlled, calibrated, and adjusted at specified periods to maintain accuracy within specified limits. Measures shall also be established for the control of permanently installed instrument and control devices.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General Power Labs is responsible for the governance of M&TE and oversight of the site calibration process for Exelon plants. This includes the establishment of calibration practices, intervals, accuracy requirements, certification/de-certification, and equivalency decisions (except where accuracy is impactive non-conservatively), as well as the resolution of technical issues regarding M&TE calibration.

Corporate Maintenance is responsible for governance and oversight of site M&TE Control. This includes assessment of site compliance to the control of M&TE as defined in corporate maintenance procedural guidance.

The engineering organizations are responsible for decisions regarding the acceptability of changes to M&TE specifications where accuracies are less conservative than those currently established. The engineering organization performs M&TE equivalency calculations for these items to assure associated specifications are consistent with plant design, test procedures, and accuracy requirements (excluded are analytical chemistry and radiochemistry instruments).

The stations are responsible for the control and maintenance of calibrated M&TE for the station. The stations are also responsible for the control of station analytical chemistry instrumentation, radiochemistry instrumentation, and standard solutions.

2.2. Control A control program specifies how M&TE are stored, handled, and used. As a minimum the following items are addressed:

- administrative controls (including equipment marking and traceability to calibration records).

- certification requirements.

- damaged or suspect M&TE.

Page 1 of 3 Revision 90

CONTROL OF MEASURING AND TEST CHAPTER 12 EQUIPMENT

- environmental restrictions.

- items not requiring certification.

- M&TE selection.

- out of tolerance resolution.

- personnel qualifications.

- repairs and maintenance.

- status and usage history.

2.3. Labeling Equipment shall be suitably marked to indicate calibration status. Where neither

• labeling nor coding is practical, procedures shall provide for monitoring of records to ensure control.

2.4. Accuracy Calibration of M&TE should be against reference standards that have an accuracy of at least four times the required accuracy of M&TE. Calibration of reference standards will be against hierarchical standards more accurate than the reference standards calibrated. When this is not possible, standards must have an accuracy that assures the M&TE is within the required tolerance, and that the basis for acceptance is documented and authorized by responsible management.

2.5. Traceability and Interval M&TE is calibrated against and traceable to certified standards having valid relationships to nationally recognized standards. Where national standards do not exist, provisions are established to document the basis for calibration.

Calibration intervals are established for all M&TE and the Company program specifies how this interval is established.

2.6. Certified M&TE Certified M&TE is required where measurements with specific accuracy/tolerance requirements are delineated:

- calibration of other M&TE.

- environmental monitoring.

- safety-related and applicable ASME applications.

- technical Specification related applications (including balance of plant systems).

- verification of design parameters.

Certified M&TE is not required when measurements do not require specific accuracy or when commercial devices (such as rulers, tape measures, levels)

Page 2 of 3 Revision 90

CONTROL OF MEASURING AND TEST CHAPTER 12 EQUIPMENT provide adequate accuracy. Electronic stopwatches are not required to be calibrated.

2.7. Corrective Actions When M&TE is found to be out-of-tolerance, an evaluation is made of its previous uses to determine corrective action. Suspect equipment is identified and segregated to prevent inadvertent use. Devices that are consistently found out of calibration are repaired or replaced.

2.8. Vendor Control Vendors supplying calibration services are on the Company's approved suppliers list.

2.9. Commercial Devices Control measures are not required for rulers, tape measures, levels, and other such commercial devices, if such equipment provides adequate accuracy.

2.10. Calibration Records M&TE calibration records contain, as a minimum:

- as found/as left condition.

- calibration data.

- calibration procedure used.

- calibration results.

- equipment location.

- established accuracy.

- individual performing calibration.

- last calibration date.

- next calibration date.

- out of tolerance notification.

- repairs (if any).

- serial number.

- standards used.

Revision 90 Page 3 Page of 33 3 of Revision 90

HANDLING, STORAGE, AND SHIPPING CHAPTER 13

1. SCOPE The Company establishes measures to control and specify special protective conditions in accordance with an item's design and procurement requirements, as necessary, to prevent damage or deterioration of materials, components, and systems during handling, packaging, preservation, storage, and shipping.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General The Company uses written procedures or instructions for cleaning, packaging, shipping, storage, preservation, and to specify detailed requirements for access to storage areas, housekeeping, and removal of items from storage. Procedures include provisions for inspection, examination, testing and documentation.

These procedures specify special protective conditions necessary to prevent damage, deterioration or loss before and after receipt of materials, equipment, special nuclear material, and radioactive wastes.

Procurement documents or the vendor's quality program specifies the establishment of controls, to assure through the use of shipping procedures to provide protection during loading and transit and inspections, that items are delivered in acceptable condition.

2.2. Special Equipment and Environments When required, the Company:

- provides special equipment and special protective environments

- specifies special equipment (such as containers, shock absorbers and accelerometers)

- specifies special protective environments (such as inert gas atmosphere, specific moisture content levels and temperature levels)

- verifies the maintenance of special equipment and special protective environments 2.3. Classification of Items Levels and methods of storage are classified to minimize the possibility of damage, deterioration, or contamination of items. This is based on the important physical characteristics and the importance to safety and reliability of the item.

This classification considers the manufacturer's requirements.

The Company packages, ships, receives, stores, and handles items according to established manufacturers requirements or the Company' s' prescribed level.

When a package or assembly contains items of different levels, the Company classifies it to the highest level designated for any of the items contained.

Page 1 of 2 Revision 90

HANDLING, STORAGE, AND SHIPPING CHAPTER 13 CATR1 2.4. Special Handling Tools and Equipment The Company inspects and tests special handling tools and equipment using procedures at specified time intervals to verify adequate maintenance. The Company provides special handling procedures and instructions for items that are susceptible to handling damage. These procedures delineate acceptable techniques, necessary qualifications and precautions for maintenance and use.

Operators of special handling and lifting equipment have experience or are trained in their usage.

2.5. Marking and Labeling The Company establishes instructions for marking and labeling to identify, maintain, and preserve an item, including indication of the presence of special environments or the need for special controls.

Consumable materials such as chemicals, reagents, and lubricants maintained in storerooms and warehouses are controlled procedurally by an inventory control system, which includes provisions for identifying storage requirements and shelf lives by commodity, when applicable. Disposal of commodities whose shelf life has expired is addressed and controlled by procedures.

2.6. Storage Periodic monitoring is performed to assure that storage areas are being maintained in accordance with applicable requirements. Access to storage areas shall be controlled and limited. Cleanliness and good housekeeping practices shall be enforced at all times in the storage areas. Fire protection measures commensurate with the type of storage area shall be provided and maintained.

Revision 90 Page 2 Page of 22 2 of Revision 90

INSPECTION, TEST, AND OPERATING CHAPTER 14 STATUS 1, SCOPE Measures shall be established and documented to identify inspection, test, and operating status of structures, systems, and components in the scope of this QAP. Such measures shall provide means for assuring that required inspections and tests are performed and that the acceptability of items with regard to inspections and tests performed is known throughout procurement, installation, and operation in order to preclude inadvertent bypassing or altering the sequence of such inspections and tests.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General The Company uses markings, tags, stamps, routing cards, labels, forms, inspection records, or other means to identify the operating status of plant equipment. This identification helps avoid inadvertent bypassing of the inspections and tests required prior to its use.

In cases where documentary evidence is not available to confirm that an item has passed required inspections and tests, that item shall be considered nonconforming. An operability determination for the nonconforming item with timeliness commensurate with the potential safety significance of the issue is performed. The operability determination is focused on whether the non-conforming item is capable of performing or supporting its specified functions of prevention or mitigation as described in the current licensing basis and will result in the determination of continued plant operation. If operability is assured based on this prompt determination, plant operation can continue while an appropriate corrective action program is implemented to restore qualification of the non-conforming item.

Control procedures describe the use of such tags, stamps, routing cards, labels, forms, inspection records, and other methods. The authority for application and removal of tags, markings, labels and stamps is specified. Tagging, labeling, color-coding, physical separation, or using an inventory system identifies acceptable or unacceptable items for installation.

The Company:

- clearly identifies and documents all temporary connections, such as jumpers and bypass lines, and temporary set points of control equipment to allow restoration before placing the item in service.

- conditionally releases items for installation pending subsequent correction of any non-conformances.

- indicates the date the item was placed in the acceptable or unacceptable installation status.

Page I of 4 Revision 90

INSPECTION, TEST, AND OPERATING CHAPTER 14 STATUS

- maintains records, marks equipment to indicate calibration status, and identifies test equipment found out of calibration.

2.1.1. Procedures The Company uses procedures for control of equipment to maintain personnel and reactor safety and to avoid unauthorized operation of equipment. These procedures require control measures such as locking or tagging to secure and identify equipment in a controlled status. The procedures require independent verifications, where appropriate, to ensure that necessary measures, such as equipment tagging, have been done correctly.

2.2. Operating Status 2.2.1. Release for Maintenance Operating personnel, including a senior reactor operator, as applicable, may grant permission to release plant systems or equipment for maintenance or surveillance testing. Prior to granting permission, such operating personnel:

- verify that the equipment or system can be released.

- determine how long it may be out of service.

- determine what functional testing or redundant systems are required prior to and during the out-of-service period.

The Company documents such permission. The Company uses independent verification to the extent necessary to ensure that the proper system was removed from service. The Company considers the degraded protection available when one subsystem of a redundant safety system has been removed for maintenance or surveillance testing.

2.2.2. Preparation for Work After permission has been granted to take the equipment out of service, measures provide for protection of equipment and workers. The Company clearly identifies the status of equipment and systems at any location where the equipment can be operated. The Company enforces strict control measures for such equipment. The operating staff can easily identify equipment, which is in other than normal conditions.

In addition to the requirements of the technical specifications, conditions to be considered in preparing equipment for maintenance or surveillance testing include, for example:

- electrical hazards.

- entry into closed vessels.

- establishment of a path for decay heat removal.

- handling hazardous materials.

- hazardous atmospheres and ALARA considerations.

Page 2 of 4 Revision 90

INSPECTION, TEST, AND OPERATING CHAPTER 14 STATUS

- method of emergency core cooling.

- shutdown margin.

- temperature and pressure of the system.

- valves between work and hazardous materials.

- venting, draining, and flushing.

When entering a closed system, the Company prevents the entry of extraneous material and removes foreign material before re-closing the system. Appropriate personnel inform control room supervision of changes in equipment status, including temporary modifications, and the effects of such changes.

2.2.3. Temporary Modifications The Company controls temporary modifications, such as temporary bypass lines, electrical jumpers, lifted electrical leads, and temporary trip point settings with approved procedures. These procedures include requirements for the period of time when the temporary modification is in effect. They also include a requirement for:

- a verification by a second person of the proper installation or removal of the temporary modification, or

- a functional test which conclusively proves the proper installation or removal of the temporary modification.

The Company maintains a log or other documented evidence for the current status of such- temporary modifications. The Company reviews temporary modifications periodically to assess their continued need and propriety.

2.2.4. Return to Service When equipment is ready to be returned to service, operating personnel place the equipment in operation and verify and document its functional acceptability.

The Company assures return to normal conditions using approved procedures, including:

- removal of electrical jumpers.

- removal of signals used during testing.

- returning valves, breakers, or switches to proper start-up or operating positions.

- assuring that all alarms, which are indicative of inoperative status, are cleared.

A second qualified person verifies proper alignment of equipment unless:

- all equipment, valves and switches involved in the activity can be proven to be in their correct alignment by functional testing without adversely affecting the safety of the plant, or

- such verification would result in significant radiation exposure.

Page 3 of 4 Revision 90

INSPECTION, TEST, AND OPERATING CHAPTER 14 STATUS The person who performs verifications (independent or concurrent) is qualified to perform such tasks. When placed into service, equipment receives additional surveillance during the run-in period. The on-duty supervisor responsible for the unit formally accepts equipment, which is returned to service.

Revision 90 Page of 44 Page 44 of Revision 90

NONCONFORMING MATERIALS, CHAPTER 15 PARTS, OR COMPONENTS

1. SCOPE Controls shall provide for identification, evaluation, segregation when practical, disposition of nonconforming items, and for notification to affected organizations.

Items that do not conform to specified requirements shall be controlled to prevent inadvertent installation or use.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General Nonconforming items are processed in accordance with the corrective action program and / or documented procedures. The Company uses written procedures to identify and control items, services or activities that do not conform to requirements. These procedures address the:

- disposition of nonconforming items.

- documentation of identified nonconformances.

- identification of nonconforming items.

- notification of affected organizations.

- operability determination of the SSC with the identified nonconforming condition

- segregation of nonconforming items.

Implementation of these procedures prevents the inadvertent use, operation, or unauthorized installation of nonconforming items.

2.1.1. Supplier Nonconforming Items The Company and its suppliers establish and document measures for the identification, control and disposition of items and services that do not meet procurement document requirements. These measures provide for:

- a review of nonconforming items.

- supplier notification to the Company of a nonconformance. These notifications include a supplier recommended disposition (e.g. "use - as -

is" or "repair") and technical justification. The supplier submits nonconformances to the Company for approval if:

- the supplier has violated a technical or material requirement, or

- the supplier has violated a requirement in supplier documents, which have been approved by the Company, or

- the supplier cannot correct the nonconformance by continuation of the original manufacturing process or by rework, or Revision 90 Page 1 Page of 44 I of Revision 90

NONCONFORMING MATERIALS, CHAPTER 15 PARTS, OR COMPONENTS

- the item does not conform to the original procurement requirement even though the item can be restored to a condition such that the capability of the item to function is unimpaired.

- Company disposition of supplier recommendations.

- verification of disposition for nonconformances.

- maintenance of records for supplier nonconformances.

2.2. Identification The Company identifies nonconforming items by marking, tagging, or other methods, which do not adversely affect the end use of the item. The identification is legible and easily recognizable.

2.3. Segregation When practical, the Company segregates nonconforming items by placing them in a clearly identified and designated hold area until properly dispositioned.

When segregation is impractical or impossible due to physical conditions such as size, weight or access limitations, other precautions are employed to preclude inadvertent use of a nonconforming item.

2.4. Disposition 2.4.1. Control Nonconforming characteristics shall be reviewed and recommended dispositions of nonconforming items shall be proposed and approved in accordance with documented procedures. Further processing, delivery, installation, or use of a nonconforming item shall be controlled pending an evaluation and an approved disposition by authorized personnel.

2.4.2. Evaluation The Company has responsibility for resolution of nonconformances in accordance with written procedures. Where ASME Code requirements are involved, the Authorized Inspection Agency reviews and accepts or rejects the disposition and justification. Engineering provides technical justification and independent review of nonconformances dispositioned as repair or use-as-is.

For items under a contractor's direct control, the Company may delegate to the contractor the authority to perform a technical evaluation of nonconformances, if the contractor has an acceptable procedure for handling nonconforming items.

Where the Company delegates such authority, the contractor is responsible for establishing that:

- all actions fall within the requirements set by the Company.

- an accepted nonconformance meets the design intent.

- ASME Code items meet the requirements of the ASME Code.

Page 2 of 4 Revision 90

NONCONFORMING MATERIALS, CHAPTER 15 PARTS, OR COMPONENTS

- personnel performing the evaluation meet the requirements of section 2.4.3 below.

When a technical evaluation has not been delegated to a supplier, the Company makes a technical evaluation of all pertinent data relating to the nonconformity, including the cause, where known, and the corrective action either taken or planned to prevent recurrence per the corrective action program. The Company retains the responsibility for the satisfactory resolution of supplier nonconformances.

2.4.3. Personnel Personnel having expertise in the pertinent discipline determine whether a nonconforming item may be accepted "as - is," may be repaired to an acceptable condition, or must be rejected. These personnel have adequate competence and knowledge necessary to make this evaluation and have access to pertinent background information.

2.4.4. Documentation The Company identifies nonconforming items and documents their disposition as applicable (e.g. use - as - is, reject, repair, or rework). Technical justification for the acceptability of a nonconforming item, dispositioned as repair, or use-as-is, is documented and traceable to each item. Appropriate documentation is retained.

Nonconformances to design requirements that are dispositioned as "use - as -

is" or "repair" is subject to design control measures commensurate with those applied to the original design. The Company technically justifies dispositions designated "use - as - is," and "repair" to assure that the final condition of any nonconforming item meets applicable code requirements and will not adversely affect the safety, operability, or maintainability of the item, or of the component or system in which it is installed. The "as - built" records, if such records are required, reflect the accepted deviation.

If the nonconformance can be corrected after installation, the item may be released for installation on a conditional release basis. The Company documents the authority and technical justification for the conditional release of the item and makes it part of the documentation.

2.4.5. Repaired, Reworked, or Scrapped Items The Company re-examines repaired or reworked items using procedures and the original acceptance criteria unless the nonconforming item's disposition has established alternate acceptance criteria. Items that have been corrected are re-inspected or re-tested as required by the approved disposition.

Revision 90 Page 3 Page of 44 3 of Revision 90

NONCONFORMING MATERIALS, CHAPTER 15 PARTS, OR COMPONENTS The area of inspection may be confined to the area of the nonconformance.

When it has been determined that the corrected item is satisfactory, the status of the item is changed to "acceptable" and an appropriate entry is made in the documentation after acceptance is determined.

The Company scraps, discards or transfers to training usage a nonconforming item that cannot be corrected or accepted "as - is." Nonconforming items that are being used for training must be controlled (e.g. administratively controlled, permanently identified, marked, obliterate Material ID Tag or Q level indicators) to prevent inadvertent or inappropriate use of the item.

Revision 90 Page of 44 Page 44 of Revision 90

CORRECTIVE ACTION CHAPTER 16

1. SCOPE This Chapter describes the Company program to identify and correct conditions adverse to quality.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General The Company implements a Corrective Action Program to promptly identify and correct items or occurrences that are adverse to quality or might adversely affect the safe operation of a nuclear generating station. These items or occurrences are screened for reportability, operability, Part 21, etc. The Company makes a thorough investigation of occurrences and identifies corrective action to prevent recurrence of an event, as appropriate. Events may include reactor trips, failed equipment, personnel errors, and procedural infractions. Measures are taken to assure that the cause of any significant condition adverse to quality is determined and takes corrective action to prevent recurrence.

2.2. Conditions Adverse to Quality Measures are established to assure that conditions adverse to quality are identified and corrected. Examples of conditions adverse to quality are provided in procedures. Examples include failures, malfunctions, adverse trends, deficiencies (including programmatic), deviations, defective material, design errors, equipment, and nonconformance to specified requirements.

An independent review body reviews violations, deviations and reportable events that require a report to the NRC in accordance with regulatory requirements and company procedures. This includes the review of results of any investigations made and the recommendations resulting from such investigations. These include items such as:

- Licensee Event Reports (LER)

- significant operating abnormalities or deviations from normal or expected performance of plant safety-related structures, systems, or components.

- violations of applicable codes, regulations, orders, technical specifications, license requirements or internal procedures or instructions having safety significance.

2.2.1. Significant Conditions Adverse to Quality In cases of significant conditions adverse to quality the cause of the condition is determined and documented, resolution determined and documented, and corrective action taken and documented to preclude recurrence.

Revision 90 Page of 44 Page 11 of Revision 90

CORRECTIVE ACTION CHAPTER 16

1. Procurement The Company uses procedures that include methods for the identification of conditions adverse to quality and for timely corrective action. The Company requires individual vendors and their contractors to include corrective action measures in their quality assurance programs. In cases of significant conditions adverse to quality that arise during the procurement process, the Company uses procedures to describe the method used to:

- identify and document deviations and non-conformances.

- review and evaluate the conditions to determine the cause, extent and measures needed to correct and prevent recurrence.

- report the conditions and corrective action to the appropriate levels of management.

- implement and maintain required corrective action.

2. Plant Hardware Malfunctions The causes of malfunctions are determined, evaluated, and recorded, as appropriate. Experience with the malfunctioning equipment and similar components are reviewed and evaluated to determine if a replacement component of the same type can be expected to perform the function reliably. If evidence indicates that common components in safety-related systems have performed unsatisfactorily, corrective measures are planned prior to replacement or repair of all such components.

Appropriate procedures are revised in a timely manner to prevent recurrence of equipment malfunction or abnormal operation.

3. Incorrect Design When a significant design change is necessary because of an incorrect design, the Company reviews and modifies the design process and verification procedures, as appropriate. In cases of significant or recurring deficiencies (or errors), the Company follows written procedures to correct the deficiency (or error), determine the cause and make changes in the design process and the QAP to prevent similar types of deficiencies (or errors) from recurring.

2.3. Verification and Follow-up The Company verifies completion of corrective actions for maintenance, repair, refueling, operation activities, completion of corrective action taken for assessment deficiencies (including programmatic), and performs assessments of site corrective action. The Company tracks and verifies completion of corrective action taken for independent assessment findings and approves the completion of corrective actions.

Revision 90 Page of 4 2 of Page 2 4 Revision 90

CORRECTIVE ACTION CHAPTER 16 Trending and assessment results are evaluated to assure that corrective measures are implemented effectively and that actions to prevent recurrence are effective as appropriate. The Company also requires contractors and vendors to follow-up on corrective action commitments within their quality programs.

The Company regularly reviews and analyzes records to:

- assure that the causes of a nonconformance and the corrective action have been clearly described.

- assure that authorized Company personnel have evaluated the overall effect resulting from the use of nonconforming items.

- determine whether corrective measures will preclude recurrence.

2.4. Evaluation and Qualification Personnel performing the evaluation function are responsible for considering the cause and the feasibility of corrective action to assure that the necessary quality of an item is not deteriorated. Where it is determined that the cause cannot be corrected immediately, the due date of corrective action will be determined during the review and evaluation. Evaluation may indicate the need for investigations to assure that corrective measures are considered complete and may also indicate that the nature of the deficient condition is minor and does not require corrective action.

Qualified personnel are responsible for determining the root cause(s) of an event and developing recommendations to preclude recurrence. These personnel report the results of their determination to appropriate station personnel and Company management.

2.5. Documentation and Reporting The Company documents the identification of significant conditions adverse to quality, the cause of the condition, the corrective action taken, and reports these items to the appropriate levels of management, NSRB, and as applicable, PORC, If the identified issue is not an indication of a significant failure in any portion of the QAP, the Company does not require reporting to management.

Reports are made immediately if prompt corrective action is required. Formal reports are filed with the appropriate regulatory agency, when required. Reports of investigations include a detailed description of the occurrence, the findings of the investigation, and the recommended corrective measures. The Company notifies the rest of the nuclear industry of significant events with generic implications and its circumstances to help preclude a similar event occurring at another plant.

The Company keeps records to identify incidents (e.g., major damage, personal injury, major schedule delays.), non-conforming items, unfavorable conditions, programmatic deficiencies identified in assessment reports, significant equipment failures, and malfunctions that occur during station operation.

Page 3 of 4 Revision 90

CORRECTIVE ACTION CHAPTER 16 The Company tracks the completion of corrective actions for conditions adverse to quality and maintains records of their resolution. Parts or all of this system may be electronically monitored and electronic records may be used as the sole record of such a system.

Revision 90 of 44 Page 44 of Revision 90

QUALITY ASSURANCE RECORDS CHAPTER 17

1. SCOPE The Company establishes and implements a program, which defines requirements and responsibilities for identification, generation, collection, compilation, storage, maintenance, retention, and retrieval of records necessary to provide evidence of quality in assessment, corrective action, decommissioning, design, engineering, fabrication, installation, inspection, maintenance, modification, operations, testing, and associated reviews.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. Program The records program provides for:

- administration.

- generation

- receipt and transmittal.

- storage and preservation ( includes temporary and permanent records)

- safekeeping and classification.

- retention and disposition.

2.2. Administration Authority and responsibility for record control activities are delineated in procedures. Records are administered through a system, which includes an index of record type, retention period, and storage location. Distribution of records shall be controlled in accordance with written procedures. Measures are established for replacement, restoration, or substitution of lost or damaged records.

Records are legible, accurate, complete, identifiable, and retrievable. Records are considered valid and complete when dated and stamped, initialed, signed, or otherwise authenticated. Corrections, revisions, or supplements to completed records are reviewed and approved by an authorized individual in the originating organization. Such changes are dated and stamped, initialed, signed, or otherwise authenticated including the use of electronic approval and authorization.

Records may be stored in electronic media provided that the process for managing and storing data is documented in procedures that comply with applicable regulations, including NRC guidance in RIS 2000-1 8. Media used for the retention of records include (but are not limited to): microform, compact disk-recordable (CD-R), and magnetic media including videotape, computer tape, optical disks, and hard disk storage. Electronic records retention must be an integral component of the Corporate Records Management Program, approved by the management position responsible for Nuclear Generation records. The Page 1 of 5 Revision 90

QUALITY ASSURANCE RECORDS CHAPTER 17 format used must be capable of producing legible, accurate, and complete documents during the required retention period. Electronic approval and authorization procedures are established to assure that only those persons authorized grant the required approvals.

2.3. Receipt and Transmittal A system for receipt control of records is established. Receipt control is required for records transferred between Company locations, vendors and the Company, and from Company department files to final storage locations. Systems are established to transfer records between Company locations and between vendors and the Company. Records transferred from Company department files to a final storage location are also under such systems. The system of receipt control of records for permanent or temporary storage includes inventory of transmitted records, receipt acknowledgment, and control of records during receipt.

2.4. Storage and Preservation Record storage facilities are established and maintained in a manner that minimizes the risk of damage or destruction. Records may be kept by suppliers and maintained on an available basis for a specified period of time. Storage and Preservation systems provide for:

- assignment of responsibilities.

- attachment in binders, folders, or envelopes for storage in steel file cabinets or on shelving in containers.

- control and accountability of records removed.

- damage from natural disasters such as winds, floods, and fires.

- following manufacturer recommendations for special recording media.

- protection from environmental conditions such as high and low temperatures and humidity.

- protection from infestation of insects, mold, or rodents etc.

- special processed records such as radiographs, photographs, negatives, microfilm, and magnetic media to prevent damage from excessive light, stacking, electromagnetic fields, temperature and humidity.

Permanent storage alternative below applies to Calvert Cliffs Nuclear Power Plant. In lieu of the reinforced concrete, concrete block, masonry, or equal construction requirements of Supplement 17S-1, Section 4.4.1(a), the records vault is entirely enveloped by a structurally sound, fire-resistive building. The vault rests on a reinforced slab on grade and its walls extend fully to the underside of the structural deck. The walls of the vault are constructed of gypsum wallboard on metal studs per Underwriters Laboratory Test Number U41 2, assuring the equivalent of 2-hour fire resistant construction. This is equal construction to concrete block in terms of fire protection. The walls carry no structural load; hence, they provide equivalent structural integrity to that needed of concrete block. Supplement 17S-1 Section 4.4.1(b) requires floor and roof Page 2 of 5 Revision 90

QUALITY ASSURANCE RECORDS CHAPTER 17 drainage control. If a floor drain is provided, a check valve (or equal) shall be included. In lieu of this requirement, the vault is contained within an environmentally protected building. As such, it has no roof, or need for floor drain.

Interim storage provisions shall be established to properly maintain and protect records until they are permanently transferred to record storage facilities for retention and shall meet one of the following conditions:

1. Records shall be stored in steel cabinets located in a fire-resistant building or non-combustible building with a fire suppression system.

A fire-resistant building must meet the following: A facility constructed to resist the initiation or spreading of fire; fire-suppressive and/or non-combustible materials used; building certified as fire-resistant by a person who specializes in the technical field of fire prevention and fire extinguishing.

2. Temporary storage per section 2.4.1.

2.4.1. Temporary Storage Measures are established for temporary storage of records when required by an organization's procedures for activities such as; for processing, review, or use.

These measures require that these records are stored in a 1-hour fire rated container and that a maximum allowable storage time limit is specified.

2.5. Safekeeping and Classification Measures are established to prevent access to records by unauthorized personnel. These measures guard against theft and vandalism. Records are classified and retained in accordance with applicable regulations.

2.6. Retention and Disposition Record retention periods are established to meet regulatory, UFSAR, and License requirements. The most stringent retention period is implemented when multiple requirements exist. Records are dispositioned at the end of the prescribed retention period.

2.7. Plant Operating Records 2.7.1. Records andlor Logs, 5-Year Retention (unless otherwise noted)

Records and/or logs relative to the following items shall be kept in a manner convenient for review and shall be retained for at least 5 years unless otherwise noted. These items apply to Braidwood, Byron, Calvert Cliffs, Clinton, Dresden, Ginna, LaSalle, Limerick, Nine Mile Point, Peach Bottom (inclUding the Page 3 of 5 Revision 90

QUALITY ASSURANCE RECORDS CHAPTER 17 Independent Spent Fuel Storage Installation), and Quad Cities Stations unless otherwise noted:

- records of normal plant operation, including power levels and periods of operation at each power level.

- records and periodic checks, inspection and/or calibrations performed to verify that the surveillance requirements of the Technical Specifications (and Fire Protection Program at Clinton) are being met. All equipment failing to meet surveillance requirements and the corrective action taken shall be recorded.

- records of physics tests and other tests pertaining to nuclear safety.

(Braidwood, Byron, Dresden, LaSalle, Peach Bottom, Quad Cities)

- records of changes to procedures required by a station's Technical Specifications and other procedures, which affect nuclear safety, as determined by the management position holder responsible for plant operation.

- shift manager/engineers' logs (Braidwood, Byron, Dresden, LaSalle, Quad Cities)

- records of principal maintenance activities, including inspection and repair, (and replacement for Braidwood, Byron, Limerick and Peach Bottom) regarding principal items of equipment pertaining to nuclear safety.

- records of changes made to the equipment or reviews of tests and experiments to comply with 10OCFR50.59 (Dresden and Quad Cities).

- records of changes made to the procedures as required by Technical Specifications and the Operational Requirements Manual (Clinton).

- reportable events required by 10CFR50.73 and 10CFR72.216 as applicable (Clinton 10CFR50.73 only, Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, Limerick, Nine Mile Point, and Peach Bottom).

- records of radioactive shipments (Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, Limerick, and Nine Mile Point)

- records of secondary water sampling and water quality. (Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, Nine Mile Point) (Lifetime)

- records of the service lives of all snubbers, including the date at which the service life commences and associated installation and maintenance records. (Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, Nine Mile Point Unit 2) (Lifetime)

- records of evaluations performed for changes made to procedures or equipment or evaluations of tests and experiments pursuant to 10 CFR 50.59 or 10 CFR 72.48. (Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, Nine Mile Point) (Lifetime)

- records of QA activities required by this QATR and not otherwise listed.

(Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, Nine Mile Point) (Lifetime)

Revision 90 Page of 5 Page 44 of 5 Revision 90

QUALITY ASSURANCE RECORDS CHAPTER 17 2.7.2. Lifetime Records Lifetime records are those that are specified by applicable regulations, standards, codes, and licensing basis documents.

Revision 90 Page of 5 Page 55 of 5 Revision 90

ASSESSMENTS/AUDITS CHAPTER 18

1. SCOPE A documented, comprehensive system consisting of regulatory audits and performance assessments of the Company and its vendors are conducted to verify QAP compliance, adequacy, and effectiveness. Audits and assessments are conducted in accordance with written procedures or checklists. Audits are performed to the requirements of ASME NQA-1 to evaluate the audited organization and to assure completion of required corrective actions, commitments, or improvements and determine effectiveness in meeting program objectives.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. Assessments and Audits General -

2.1.1. Scheduling The internal audit program is conducted on a performance driven frequency that is commensurate with the status and importance of the activity to be completed but does not exceed 24-months. Internal audit frequencies required by regulation that are different than the 24-month period are indicated within Appendix B, "Audit Frequency." Audit frequencies are determined based on a consideration of the risk and consequences with respect to the activities being audited.

Audits may be extended beyond their originally scheduled due date based on the following criteria:

A. Audits shall be performed at the intervals designated in Appendix B, "Audit Frequency". Schedules are based on the month in which the audit starts.

B. A maximum extension not to exceed 25 percent of the audit interval is allowed. That is to say that, for audits on a 24-month frequency, the maximum time between specific audits does not exceed 30 months.

Likewise, audits on an annual (12-month) frequency do not extend beyond 15 months. Audits of Emergency Preparedness and Security are not subject to the extension and will be performed on a frequency not to exceed 12 months (or not to exceed 24 months if performed on a 24-month frequency).

C. When an audit interval extension greater than one month is used, the next audit for that particular audit area is scheduled from the original anniversary month rather than from the month of the extended audit.

The NSRB activities will be periodically reviewed for effectiveness at a frequency not to exceed 2 years by experienced Nuclear Oversight personnel and/or industry peers. This review will include an evaluation of the NSRB activities for compliance with the QATR requirements.

Page 1 of 4 Revision 90

ASSESSMENTS/AUDITS CHAPTER 18 ASSESSMENTSIAUDITS CHAPTER 18 D. Item B applies to supplier audits and evaluations except that a total combined interval for any three consecutive inspection or audit intervals does not exceed 3.25 times the specified inspection or audit interval.

Fleet assessment activities are conducted to identify performance gaps and enable the site to drive towards sustainable performance excellence. These planned internal assessment activities are performed to a schedule that is approved by the management position responsible for Fleet Assessments, or designated staff member(s).

2.1.2. Preparation A documented plan or an agenda identifies an audit or assessment scope, requirements, audit or assessment personnel, activities to be evaluated, organizations to be notified, applicable documents, and schedule. An approved checklist or procedure for each scheduled audit or assessment identifies the requirements of the area or items to be evaluated. Audit plans, agendas, checklists, and procedures as applicable are prepared in advance under the direction of an Audit Team Leader.

2.1.3. Personnel Experienced and qualified personnel perform assessments and audits and are familiar with written procedures, standards, and processes applicable to the area being evaluated. Assessment and audit personnel shall have sufficient authority and organizational freedom to make the assessment and audit process meaningful and effective and shall not have direct responsibilities in the areas to be assessed or audited. They shall have access to the plant records necessary to fulfill their function.

The Audit Team Leader shall organize and direct audits and ensure the team collectively has the required experience or training for the activities to be evaluated. Technical Specialists may supplement the team to provide additional experience and competence.

2.1.4. Performance Performance assessments are conducted to assess specific activities, processes, and records on the basis of their impact and importance relative to safety, reliability, and functionality with respect to risks and consequences.

Assessments can be focused on areas most in need of improvement.

Audits are initiated early to assure effective quality assurance during design, procurement, manufacturing, construction, installation, inspection, testing, and operations. Additional unscheduled audits/assessments may also be performed at various stages of activities, based on the nature and safety significance of the work being done; to verify continued adherence to and effectiveness of the 7/

quality systems. Objective evidence shall be examined to the extent necessary J Revision 90 Page 2 Page of 44 2 of Revision 90

ASSESSMENTSIAUDITS CHAPTER 18 ASSESSMENTSIAUDITS CHAPTER 18 to determine that a quality program is being effectively implemented.

2.1.5. Reporting and Follow-up A. Audits An audit report includes the description of the audit scope, identification of the team and personnel contacted during audit activities, a summary of results (including a statement on effectiveness of the QAP elements), and a description of each finding. The ATL shall sign the audit report for which he or she is responsible.

Audit results are documented and distributed to the management position responsible for NOS, and to the appropriate managerial level of the organization having responsibility for the area or activity audited. Findings or deficiencies requiring prompt corrective action are reported immediately to the management of the audited organization.

Findings, deficiencies and recommendations of each audit shall be reported to appropriate site management and the management position responsible for NOS. All findings of noncompliance with NRC requirements, and any significant nuclear safety or quality issues requiring escalated action, will be directed through the management position responsible for NOS to the President and ONO in accordance with procedural requirements.

Responsible management shall take the necessary actions to correct findings identified in the audit. They will identify the corrective action to be taken, actions that will prevent recurrence, and a schedule for implementing these actions.

Responses to audit findings are reviewed for adequacy.

Follow-up verification of the completion of scheduled corrective action commitments are performed by NOS to assure findings or adverse conditions are corrected in accordance with procedural requirements. Follow-up action of previous deficient areas or adverse conditions (including re-audit) is taken to verify that corrective action has been completed, is effective, implementation continues, and is properly documented, when indicated.

B. Assessments Assessment reports will include a description of the assessment scope, identification of the team, a summary of results, and a description of each assessment identified issue. Issues will be reported to the appropriate site!

corporate management and to the management position responsible for Organizational Effectiveness and Integrated Performance Assessments (OR&IPA). All significant issues requiring escalated action will be directed through the management position responsible for OR&IPA to the President and CNO in accordance with procedural requirements. Follow-up of previously identified assessment issues will be performed in accordance with procedural requirements.

Page 3 of 4 Revision 90

ASSESSMENTSIAUDITS CHAPTER 18 ASSESSMENTSIAUDITS CHAPTER 18 2.1.6. Records Audit and Assessment results are documented and reports are generated and retained as applicable. Associated documentation is on file at the appropriate location. Personnel qualification records for assessment and audit team members are established, maintained, and reviewed as required.

2.2. Vendor Audits Audits, or surveys of vendors and their sub-tier suppliers are performed to a pre-established schedule. Audits are performed on a triennial basis. Documented supplier performance monitoring is performed in accordance with approved procedures as an acceptable alternate to the performance of the annual evaluation of suppliers. The management position responsible for audits and programs or designee, shall review and approve the audit/survey schedule and checklists, and sign reports. Schedules are reviewed semi-annually and revised

'accordingly to assure that suppliers are audited, or surveyed as required.

Audit program requirements are imposed on suppliers by appropriate contract or procurement documents. The Company's active participation in nuclear industry audits provides an alternative means to fulfilling its responsibility for examining supplier activities.

2.3. Independent Management Audit A periodic audit (not to exceed 24 months) of the status and adequacy of the QAP is performed by an independent organization to assure that audits are being accomplished to program requirements. In addition, this will include an evaluation of the NSRB activities for compliance with the QATR requirements.

The management position responsible for NOS submits the results of this audit to the President and CNO.

Page 4 of 4 Revision 90

AUGMENTED QUALITY APPENDIX A

1. SCOPE It is the Company's policy to assure a high degree of availability and reliability for its nuclear plants while ensuring the health and safety of the public and its workers. Therefore, the Quality Assurance Program is applied in a graded manner to certain areas and activities that are not clearly defined as safety related. The Company calls this application Augmented Quality. Augmented Quality includes systems and components that are subject to the requirements of ASME Code Sections: I "Power Boilers," IV "Hot Water Heaters," and VIII "Non-fired Pressure Vessels" (see sub-section 2.7. below). This appendix applies to all sites unless otherwise noted below or in Appendices B through G.

2. REQUIREMENTS The Company applies the following augmented quality requirements to certain systems, structures, components (SSC), and activities that are not safety related to a degree consistent with their importance to safety. Unless otherwise noted:

- routine audits are performed of the program's content and implementation.

- deficiencies are addressed in accordance with the corrective action program.

- program records of audits and reviews are maintained as required.

2.1. Health Physics and ALARA (As Low As Reasonably Achievable)

The Company develops, documents, and implements a radiation protection program sufficient to ensure compliance with the provisions of 10OCFR20. The Company uses, to the extent practical, procedures and engineering controls based on sound radiation protection principles to achieve occupational doses and doses to the public that are as low as reasonably achievable.

2.2. Transport of Radioactive Waste When the Company contracts with vendors to transport radioactive waste in NRC approved shipping packages, it meets the requirements of IOCFR71, Subpart H. The Company assures that this service is procured from an organization with a QA program and if applicable, includes a NRC licensed transport system. Loading, surveying, closure, placarding, and inspections are conducted in accordance with written procedures and instructions.

Transport casks and trailers are inspected before release in accordance with Department of Transportation (DOT) 49CFR.

Shipping manifests, including final radiation surveys, are completed and retained. Radioactive waste shipments not meeting the requirements for NRC approved packaging, shall meet the requirements of DOT 49CFR.

Page 1 of 6 Revision 90

AUGMENTED QUALITY APPENDIX A 2.3. Services The Company procures services from qualified suppliers. It is not necessary that these suppliers have a quality assurance program approved by the licensee, however, suppliers should provide a quality assurance program that includes the quality assurance program elements presented in Reg. Guide 4.15, and routinely provide program data summaries sufficiently detailed to permit evaluation of the program for the following areas:

- meteorology.

- Offsite Dose Calculation Manual.

- radiological environmental monitoring.

2.4. Fire Protection 10OCFR50 Appendix A, General Design Criteria (GDC) 3 requires that the Company's nuclear facilities have an established fire protection program that provides fire protection features such that the adverse effect of fires on structures, systems and components important to safety is minimized. The quality assurance program established for these fire protection SSCs ensures that design, procurement, instruction, procedures, drawings, inspection, installation, testing, maintenance, operations, nonconforming Items, corrective Action, records, audits and administrative controls meet the applicable Quality Assurance guidelines as described in the applicable edition of Branch Technical Position (BTP) 9.5-1 for each Exelon site. Engineering determines what fire protection SSCs protect Structures, Systems, and Components important to safety. Engineering also establishes the requirements for the design, procurement, fabrication, installation and/or modification of these fire protection SSCs. Routine testing of fire protection systems assures reliability. All other fire protection equipment and supplies will be of commercial quality, in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) guidelines.

2.5. Station Blackout (Regulatory Guide 1.155)

Calvert Cliffs, Dresden, LaSalle, Limerick, Nine Mile Point Unit 1, Nine Mile Point Unit 2, Oyster Creek, Quad Cities and Three Mile Island stations rely on non-safety related equipment to achieve the redundancy required by 10CFR50.63.

Quality Assurance requirements for Calvert Cliffs, Dresden, LaSalle, Limerick, Nine Mile Point Units 1 and 2, Oyster Creek, Quad Cities and Three Mile Island are implemented in accordance with Regulatory Guide 1.155 (Station Blackout),

Appendix A and B. Replacement and consumable parts and supplies are classified non-safety related in accordance with original specifications and are procured as commercial items. Routine testing of Station Blackout (SBO) SSCs assures the necessary redundancy is maintained. SBO SSC reliability is monitored in accordance with the Station's Maintenance Rule program.

Page 2 of 6 Revision 90

AUGMENTED QUALITY APPENDIX A 2.6. Augmented Quality Requirements for Dresden 1, and Peach Bottom 1 Dresden 1, and Peach Bottom 1, have ceased commercial operation and will ultimately be decommissioned. Staffing, qualification of personnel, and organization will be in accordance with the Dresden 1 De-fueled Technical Specifications (DTS) and De-fueled Safety Analysis Reports (DSAR), and the Peach Bottom 1 Updated Final Safety Analysis Report (UFSAR) and Technical Specifications.

Except for inspections or examinations required for ASME repairs and replacements, station personnel may perform inspections provided they are experienced, task-qualified personnel or supervisors who did not supervise the activity being inspected. Nuclear Oversight will monitor this activity through periodic overview.

Timeliness of corrective actions is prioritized commensurate with the safety significance. Sufficient records of maintenance and modification activities will be maintained to evaluate failures, perform root cause analysis, if applicable, and determine appropriate corrective actions and to meet the requirements of the applicable DSAR or Peach Bottom Unit 1 UFSAR.

2.7. Repairs and Alterations The requirements of ASME Code Sections II, V and IX shall be imposed as applicable for the repair or alteration job specific work scope.

2.7.1. State of Illinois Welded repairs and all alterations to non-ISI boilers and pressure vessels, as described in Section 505.2500 of the rules contained in the Illinois Emergency Management Agency (IEMA) Safe Operation of Nuclear Facility Boilers and Pressure Vessels (Part 505), and the repair of pressure relief valves, as described in Section 505.2500(b) are conducted in accordance with Section 505.2500(a)(1 )(A) of these rules.

Section 505.2500(a)(1 )(A) requires that the Company apply an approved Quality Assurance (QA) Program to such repairs and alterations and describe how it is applied. The following describes the Company's application of these rules.

- The Company has a QA Program that is reviewed and accepted by the NRC. In addition, the QA Program is reviewed and accepted by an accredited Authorized Inspection Agency. Authorized Inspectors are present at each of the Company's plants while ASME Code work is in progress.

- Chapter 1 of this QA Program describes the authority and responsibilities of the organization. It also describes the retention of responsibility by the Company when repair and modification activities are subcontracted.

- Chapter 3 requires that design and changes to designs be defined, documented, and controlled.

Page 3 of 6 Revision 90

APPENDIX A AUGMENTED QUALITY

- Chapter 5 requires that all work be accomplished in accordance with documented instructions and procedures and be subject to appropriate process controls. Specifically, the Company uses the Nuclear Work Request (NWR) to authorize, track, and control work in the plant. The NWR system includes provisions for specifying when work is ASME Code related and is not limited to any particular section of the ASME Code. It further provides for detailed instructions to accomplish the work. This includes the need for qualified inspectors, qualified welders, qualified procedures, special processes, required documentation, approved drawings, and post-maintenance/post-modification testing. NWRs marked as ASME Code work is offered to the Authorized Inspector for the insertion of hold and witness points.

- Chapters 4, 7, 8, and 13 address the procurement, receiving, handling, storage, disbursement, and marking of materials. Implementing procedures establish traceability of materials to the procurement and receiving processes and provide assurance that only ASME Code acceptable materials are utilized. Any specific requirements for heat traceability will be in accordance with the applicable sections of the ASME Code being used.

- Chapter 9 details the controls for special processes while Chapter 10 details those for inspection. This includes the requirement for the use of independent, qualified inspectors and examiners when required by the ASME Code, and invokes the Company's Special Processes and Procedures Manual (SPPM). The SPPM is also reviewed and accepted by the Authorized Inspection Agency.

- Chapters 6 and 17 require that documents and records be generated and maintained to satisfy the requirements of the ASME Code and the Jurisdiction.

- Chapter 18 provides for overview and audit of ASME Code activities.

Repairs and alterations performed as described above meet the requirements of the approved QA Program and meet the requirements of the IEMA B&PV rules; regardless of the safety classification of the boiler or pressure vessel or pressure relief valve being repaired.

2.8. Dry Cask Storage System 2.8.1. Limerick, Peach Bottom, Oyster Creek, Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, and Nine Mile Point ISFSI quality assurance program requirements are performed in accordance with the applicable I0CFR72.212 report which invokes the portions of the NRC approved 10OCFR50 Appendix B quality assurance program as described in this QATR, commensurate with the safety classification of the component and quality requirements specified in the cask vendor Final Safety Analysis Report (ESAR) or site specific license.

Page 4 of 6 Revision 90

AUGMENTED QUALITY APPENDIX A 2.8.2. Braidwood, Byron, Clinton, Dresden, LaSalle and Quad Cities Station(s)

The ISFSI SSCs that are important to safety are categorized as Category A, B, or C in accordance with NUREG/CR-6407, "Classification of Transportation Packaging and Dry Spent Fuel Storage System Components According to Importance to Safety." Per 10CFR72, Subpart G, the QATR applies to the ISFSI SSCs and activities consistent with their importance to safety as identified in the classification table on next page identifies the graded approach and applicability of the Exelon QA Program Chapters based on the safety categories that are defined in NUREG/CR-6407.

2.9. Emergency Planning Requirements with respect to audits and records for Emergency Preparedness are described in an Emergency Plan that meets the requirements of 10CFR50.47.

2.10. Security Requirements with respect to audits and records for Security are controlled for each station by an NRC approved Station Security Plan that is prepared and implemented in accordance with the requirements contained in 10CFR73.55.

2.11 License Renewal Consistent with the requirements of 10 CFR 54.21 (a)(3), the company implements the requirements of QATR Chapters 1 through 18 for aging management activities related to safety related SSCs.

Additionally, to manage the aging effects of non-safety related SSCs that were determined to be within the scope of License Renewal, the company implements the administrative controls, corrective actions and confirmation processes described in QATR Chapters 6, 16 and the applicable requirements of this appendix.

Revision 90 Revision 90 Page 5 Page of 6 5 of 6

AUGMENTED QUALITY APPENDIX A AUGMENTED QUALITY APPENDIX A ISFSI REQUIREMENTS Important to Safety SSCs Category Chapter Title

__ _ _ _ _ _ _ A B C Organization 1M M R (Roles and Responsibilities)________

Quality Assurance Program 2 M M NR (Paragraphs 2.1, 2.4, 2.5, and 2.6) ______

3 Design Control M M R 4 Procurement Document Control M R NR 5 Instructions, Procedures, and Drawings M M R 6 Document Control M M R Control of Purchase Material, Equipment, andMRR ServicesMRR 8 Identification ComponentsMRR and Control of Materials, Parts, andMRR 9 Control of Special Processes M M R 10 Inspections M M R Test Control

,11 (Design, Fabrication, Installation, and Maintenance) M M R 12 Control of Measuring, and Test Equipment M M R 13 Handling, Storage, and Shipping M R NR 14 Inspection, Test, and Operating Status M M NR 15 Nonconforming Materials, Parts, or Components M M R 16 Corrective Action M M R 17 Quality Assurance Records M M R 18 Audits M M R (M) Mandatory = Indicates the Appendix B QA Program shall be used.

(R) Recommended = Indicates application of the applicable quality assurance criterion may benefit the user.

The Engineering organization shall determine the extent of application required for the SSCs in question.

O (NR) Not Required = Indicates that little benefit has been identified or no regulatory basis has been found to require application of applicable QA criteria. Imprudent use of this criterion may add unnecessary burden.

Revision 90 Revision 90 Page 66 of Page of 66

AUDITFREQUENCY APPENDIX B Internal audits shall be conducted on a performance driven frequency, not to exceed 24 months or at the frequencies indicated below, in accordance with the Company's QAP. Audits shall include the following safety-related functions as applicable:

AUDIT FREQUENCY

a. The conformance of unit operation to provisions contained within 24 Months the technical specifications and applicable license conditions.

b. The adherence to procedures, training, and qualification of the 24Mnh station staff.

c. The results of actions taken to correct deficiencies occurring in 24 Months facility equipment, structures, systems, components, or method of operation that affect nuclear safety (CAP).

d. The performance of activities required by the Quality Assurance 24 Months Program to meet the criteria of Appendix B of 10OCFR5O.

• Chemistry

• Engineering - Design Control,

• Engineering - Programs

• Procurement / Materials Management

• Maintenance

• Nuclear Fuels

• Operations

• Quality Assurance Functions (internal and vendor audit\

assessment activities are evaluated by NIEP.)

e. The fire protection programmatic controls including the 24 Months implementing procedures (by qualified Nuclear Oversight personnel).

f. The fire protection equipment and program implementation, 24 Months including loss prevention, utilizing either a qualified offsite licensee fire protection engineer or an outside, independent fire protection consultant. An outside, independent fire protection consultant shall be used at least every second year.

g. The Radiological Environmental Monitoring Program (REMP) 24 Months and its results.

h. The Offsite Dose Calculation Manual (ODCM) and implementing 24 Months procedures.

Page 1 of 3 Revision 90

AUDIT FREQUENCY APPENDIX B AUI RQECYAPNI AUDIT FREQUENCY

i. The Process Control Program (PCP) and implementing 24 Months procedures for the solidification of radioactive wastes.

j. The non-radiological environmental monitoring activities required 24 Months by the Appendix B of the Facility Operating Licenses. (Note:

Dresden and TMI do not have an Environmental Appendix to their Facility Operating Licenses.)

k. Randomly selected procedures to ensure that the programmatic 24 Months control processes used to assure that procedures are technically and administratively correct prior to use are resulting in timely and accurate procedure revisions.

I.The Security Plan and implementing procedures per 10CFR73.55 24 Months Minimally review each element of the physical protection program at least every 24 months. Including:

(i) Within 12 months following initial implementation of the physical protection program or a change to personnel, procedures, equipment, or facilities that potentially could adversely affect security.

(ii)As necessary based upon site-specific analyses, assessments, or other performance indicators.

(Reference 10OCFR73.55 and 10OCFR50.54(p)(3)(ii))

m. The Emergency Plan and implementing procedures (Reference 12 Months 10OCFR50.54(t)(1 )(ii) for lesser frequency requirements).

n. Deleted

o. The conformance of Spent Fuel Storage Installation operation to 24 Months provisions contained within the technical specifications and applicable license conditions and results of actions taken to correct deficiencies occurring in facility equipment, structures, syst'ems, components, or methods of operation affecting nuclear safety (Reference NUREGICR-6407, and 10CFR72, Subpart G)

(ISFSI sites only).

p. Access Authorization Program (10OCFR73.56) 24 Months (Initial Audit frequency is 12 months and 24 months thereafter)

(Ref. RIS 2005-14)

q. Personnel Access Data System (PADS) (10CFR73.56) 24 Months (Initial Audit frequency is 12 months and 24 months thereafter)

(Ref RIS 2005-14) _______

Page 2 of 3 Revision 90

AUDITFREQUENCY APPENDIX B AUDIT FREQUENCY

r. Deleted

s. Fitness For Duty (FFD) Program (10CFR26.41) 24 Months

t. Station Black Out (Reg. Guide 1.155, Appendix A)24Mnh Audits should be conducted and documented to verify compliance with design and procurement documents, instructions, procedures, drawings, and inspection and test activities developed to comply with 100FR50.63. (Dresden, LaSalle, Limerick, Oyster Creek, Quad Cities, and Three Mile Island Only)

u. Radiation Protection activities as defined in I0CFR20.24Mnh

v. Plant Operations Review Committee (PORC) 24 Months

w. Decommissioned Units 24 Months

x. Cyber Security Program (10CFR 73.55(m)). 24 Months (Initial Audit frequency is 12 months and 24 months thereafter)

Revision 90 Page 33 of Page of 33 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C 1.1. Codes and Standards The QAP takes into account the need for special controls, processes, test equipment, tools, and skills necessary to attain the required quality and the need for the verification of quality by inspection and test. The Codes and Standards listed below represent a listing of quality assurance codes and standards used to define the quality assurance program. A general listing of quality assurance related codes and standards, such as: ASME B&PV, ANSI, AWS, and IEEE used throughout Exelon at each nuclear site can be found in the applicable site specific Updated Final Safety Analysis Reports (UFSARs). The UFSAR should be referenced to identify site-specific commitments (including dates and/or addendas) with respect to these codes and standards. This Quality Assurance Program (QAP) complies with the quality requirements of the following codes and standards as indicated in site specific UFSARs unless otherwise noted in sub-section 1.3 (the UFSAR may address position specific exceptions or clarifications on a site by site basis).

- ANSI N18.1 - 1971, "Selection and Training of Nuclear Power Plant Personnel" (For Braidwood, Byron, Dresden, LaSalle, Peach Bottom, Quad Cities, Licensed Operators shall comply only with the requirements of 10 CFR 55) *Dresden, *LaSalle, *Oyster Creek (for RP personnel),

• Peach Bottom, *Quad Cities, and *TMI (RP and RP Supervisors only)

(* per station Technical Specification, this does not include the Lead HP/RP person, who shall meet Reg. Guide 1.8)

- ANSI /ANS 3.1 -1978, "American National Standard for Selection and Training of Nuclear Power Plant Personnel" (Applicable to Clinton (for non-licensed personnel), Limerick, Oyster Creek, and TMI) (For Clinton, Limerick, Oyster Creek, and TMI , Licensed Operators shall comply only with the requirements of 10 CFR 55)

- ANSI /ANS 3.1 -1981, "Selection, Qualification and Training of personnel for Nuclear Power Plants" Applies to Peach Bottom (for SQRs), LaSalle (for reactor engineers), and Clinton (for chemistry supervisors).

- For Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, and Nine Mile Point, Licensed Operators shall comply with the requirements of 10 CFR 55.

- ANSI N18.7-1 976 /ANS 3.2, "Administrative Controls and Quality Assurance for the Operational Phase of Nuclear Power Plants."

(Applicable to Limerick, Oyster Creek, TMI, and Clinton Only)

- ANSI N18.7-1972 "Administrative Controls for Nuclear Power Plants" (Applicable to Peach Bottom Only)

- ANSI / ANS 3.2 - 1988, "Administrative Controls and Quality Assurance for the Operational Phase of Nuclear Power Plants." (Exception - Exelon will implement the requirements of 10OCFR26 for control of work hours in lieu of those specified in section 5.2.1.7 of this standard.)(Applicable to Braidwood, Byron, Dresden, LaSalle, and Quad Cities Only)

- ASME NQA-1 (1994) (Revision and Consolidation of ASME NQA-1 -1989 and ASME NQA-2-1 989 Editions) "Quality Assurance Requirements for Nuclear Facility Applications" Part I, "Basic Requirements and Page 1 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C Supplementary Requirements for Nuclear Facilities; Part II, "Quality Assurance Requirements for Nuclear Facility Applications;" and Part Ill, "Nonmandatory Appendices," limited to Appendix 2A-1, "Nonmandatory Guidance on Qualifications of Inspection and Test Personnel," and Appendix 17A-1, Nonmandatory Guidance on Quality Assurance Records."

Exception: Exelon qualifies personnel in accordance with the applicable editions of the codes and standards accepted by the NRC as identified in Company NDE procedures and the Station ISI plans in lieu of SNT-TC-1A, June 1980, as specified in NQA-1, 1994, Supplement 2S-2.

As noted above, the plants in the Exelon Fleet comply with the ANSI standards associated with administrative controls and quality assurance for the operational phase of nuclear power plant operation. Each plant complies with their specific standards with the following exception:

The independent review of Technical Specification changes, license amendments, or Emergency Plan changes shall be performed by the PORC.

NSRB review and approval of Technical Specification changes, license amendments, or Emergency Plan changes is not required.

1.2. Regulatory Guides Although the QAP complies with the regulatory positions and programmatic quality requirements of the Regulatory Guides identified in this section, the site specific Clarifications and Exemptions identified in section 1.3 should always be verified by reviewing the applicable site specific Updated Final Safety Analysis Report (UFSAR).

- 1 .8, "Personnel Qualification and Training."

- 1.26, "Quality Group Classification and Standards for Nuclear Power Plants."

- 1.28, "Quality Assurance Program Requirements for Design and Construction."

- 1.29, "Seismic Design Classification."

- 1 .31 , "Control of Ferrite Content in Stainless Steel Weld Material"

- 1.33, "Quality Assurance Program Requirements."

Exceptions: Audits will be at the frequency defined in Appendix B of this QATR and PORC review and approval of new or revised administrative procedures recommended by RG 1.33 is not required. (Ref. SER from USNRC to C.G. Pardee, dated Sept. 29, 2008)

- 1.68, "Pre-Operational and Initial Start-Up Test Programs for Water Cooled Reactors."

- 1.142, "Safety Related Concrete Structures for Nuclear Power Plants."

- 1.143, "Design Guidance for Radioactive Waste Management SSCs Installed in Light Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants."

- 4.15 "quality Assurance for Radiological Monitoring Programs (Normal Operations) - Effluent Streams and the Environment."

Page 2 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C 1.3. Site Specific Clarifications and Exceptions 1.3.1. Limerick (LGS) and Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station (PBAPS)

1. Regulatory Guide 1.33," Quality Assurance Program Requirements, (Operations)," endorses ANSI N18.7.

LGS shall comply with Regulatory Guide 1.33, Revision 2, February 1978, and ANSI N 18.7-1976/ANS-3.2, "Administrative Controls and Quality Assurance for the Operational Phase of Nuclear Power Plants"' during the operational phase except for the following clarifications or alternatives.

A. ANSI N18.7-1976/ANS-3.2, Section 5.2.2, Procedure Adherence -

The term "supervisor in charge of the shift" means either the Shift Manager or Shift Supervisor.

B. ANSI N18.7-1976/ANS-3.2, Section 5.2.7.1, Maintenance Programs:

1. Emergency maintenance to safety-related equipment (work which must proceed immediately to correct a degraded condition) may be performed concurrent with procedure preparation and documentation of steps actually taken. Such maintenance may be performed with the authorization of designated personnel and subsequent procedure review by the PORC and/or SQR, per Technical Specification requirements.

2. The cause of repetitive malfunctions should be determined; however, it is not practical, and may not be possible, to determine the cause of every malfunction.

C. ANSI N18.7-1976/ANS-3.2, Section 5.2.10, "Housekeeping and Cleanliness Control".

1. Control measures to prevent contamination with foreign materials will be specified in administrative procedures and will include, as appropriate, access control.

2. Second paragraph, first and second sentences are taken to mean: "Where needed to prevent contamination .... "

D. ANSI N18.7-1976/ANS-3.2, Section 5.2.13, "Procurement and Materials Control" - Item (1) - Administrative procedures shall specify the means for control of procurement of commercially "off-the-shelf' items. The administrative procedures shall describe the receipt inspection, storage, and handling prior to installation and operation.

Off-the-shelf (catalog) items are evaluated by qualified personnel for their intended use. The administrative procedures restrict the use of catalog items for only these evaluated applications. The purchase order shall require the vendor to notify the requisitioning organization of a change in an item described in the catalog.

E. ANSI N18.7-1976/ANS-3.2, Section 5.2.13.1, "Procurement Document Control," (second sentence) - QA Program requirements or alternate approved methods will be used to ensure quality. Examples of alternates for suppliers without QA programs include material analysis, Page 3 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C sample testing, in-process inspection and monitoring, and design review by LGS/PBAPS.

F. ANSI N18.7-1976/ANS-3.2, Section 5.2.15, "Review, Approval and Control of Procedures" - The frequency of review of plant procedures is discussed in UFSAR Section 13.5, except for the following alternative.

1. Programmatic controls and processes described in UFSAR Section 13.5 are used to assure that procedures are current.

These controls take the place of scheduled periodic reviews G. Emergency / Abnormal procedures do not require biennial review based on the equivalent processes noted in NO-AA-10, Chapter 6, Section 2.1.

2. Regulatory Guide 1.143, Revision 1, October 1979, "Design Guidance for Radioactive Waste Management Systems, Structures, and Components Installed in Light-Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants."

LGS shall comply with Regulatory Guide 1.143, Revision 1, October 1979, for major modifications, subject to the exceptions and clarifications listed in LGS UFSAR Table 3.2-1, Note 18.

3. ASTM D3843-93, "Standard Practice for Quality Assurance for Protective Coatings applied to Nuclear Facilities."

LGS/PBAPS shall comply with ASTM D3843-93 for safety-related protective coating work in service level 1 areas during operation with the following additional clarification, exception, and requirement.

A. For coating formulations developed prior to issuance of ASTM 03843-93, service level 1 qualification based on ANSI N5.9 (Revised as ANSI N512-1 974) and ANSI N101.2 remains valid.

B. Section 10.1, last sentence - instead of references to ANSI 45.2 and NQA-1, inspections will be documented for record purposes as required by 10OCFR50, Appendix B, and by this QA program description.

C. Limitations on use of coatings and cleaning materials which contain elements which could contribute to corrosion, inter-granular cracking, or stress corrosion cracking of safety-related stainless steel will be followed as described in Section C.4 of regulatory Guide 1.54, June 1973.

4. Branch Technical Position (BTP) CMEB 9.5-1:

For modification work performed by Exelon Engineering during the operations phase, Exelon Engineering will maintain compliance with the requirements of CMEB 9.5-1 in accordance with Section 9.5.1.

Page 4 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C

5. NQA-1, 1994 Supplement 2S-2 PBAPS will comply with NQA-1, 1995 Supplement 2S-2 except for the following clarification.

A. NQA-1, 1995 Supplement 2S-2 states that SNT-TC-IA, June 1980 shall apply for personnel performing NDE. PBAPS personnel who perform ISFSl cask leak testing or approve ISFSI leak test procedures and test results and direct or supervise the conduct of ISFSI leak tests shall be qualified to either SNT-TC-IA or ANSI N18.1-1 971.

1.3.2. Oyster Creek (OCNGS) and Three Mile Island (TMI) Stations

1. RG 1.8, Revision 1-R (May 1977), Personnel Selection and Training TMI and OC3GS take the following Exceptions Clarifications.

A. Guidelines have long been established in the company with respect to awarding jobs to plant maintenance, operations, and other bargaining unit personnel who may be involved in testing, examination and inspection activities. Personnel are qualified in accordance with the job description manual. Exelon believes that the requirements specified in the job description manual meet the intent, and in many cases, exceed the requirements of ANSI N18.1. It is envisioned that there may be certain specific cases where an individual will be considered qualified because the individual has been evaluated as being capable of performing a job, even though the individual does not meet the detailed guidance contained in ANSI N18.1 with respect to length of experience and formal training.

B. The unit staff and the corporate organizations have been upgraded to meet ANS/ANSI 3.1-1 978 except as otherwise noted in the technical specifications.

C3. Licensed operators shall comply only with the requirements of 10 CEFR 55.

Revision 90 Revision 90 Page 5 Page of 17 5 of 17

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C

2. Regulatory Guide 1.26, Quality Group Classification and Standards For Nuclear Power Plants, Rev 3 February 1976. TMI and OCGS will comply with this guide with the following exceptions:

A. For modifications to existing plant systems, items will be classified by site engineering according to the original design basis, or this guide. This classification will not degrade the safety of the system being modified.

B. Additions to existing plant systems will be designed and constructed to the same codes, standards, and technical requirements which were originally applied to the system to which the addition is to be made, or more recent versions of these codes, standards, and technical requirements. The addition will not degrade the safety of the system being added to.

C. For new construction, the latest applicable codes will be utilized, unless such utilization would result in hardship or unusual difficulty without providing an equivalent level of safety.

3. Regulatory Guide 1.33, Rev. 2, February 1978, "Quality Assurance Program Requirements (Operation)."

The stations comply with the Regulatory Position of this Guide with the following clarifications:

A. Paragraph 5.2.2 of ANSI N 18.7-1 976, titled "Procedure Adherence."

In accordance with Section 6.8.3 of the OCNGS and TMI Technical Specifications, temporary changes shall be approved by two members of the Company's management staff qualified as a 50.59 Evaluator/Reviewer who meets the qualification criteria of QATR Appendix G, Sections 2.2.1.14 and 2.3.1.14 and knowledgeable in the area affected by the procedure. For changes, which may affect the operational status of facility systems or equipment, at least one of these individuals shall be a member of facility management or supervision holding a Senior Reactor Operator's License on the facility.

B. Paragraph 5.2.15 of ANSI N18.7 - 1976, titled "Review, Approval and Control of Procedures." The third sentence of the third paragraph is interpreted to mean that applicable procedures shall be reviewed following a reportable incident such as an accident, an unexpected transient, significant operator error, or equipment malfunction. In addition, the fourth paragraph is modified to state that the periodic review of procedures shall include the following four elements; a) At least every two years, Nuclear Oversight will assess a representative sample of plant procedures that are used more frequently than every two years.

Page 6 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C b) All applicable plant procedures will be reviewed as described in paragraph no. 5.2.15 of ANSI N18.7-1976 as per the noted clarification described for the third sentence of the third paragraph.

c) Plant procedures that have been used at least biennially receive scrutiny by individuals knowledgeable in procedures and are updated as necessary to ensure adequacy during suitable controlled activities.

d) Plant procedures that have not been used for two years will be reviewed before use or biennially to determine if changes are necessary or desirable.

4. Regulatory Guide 1.54, June 1973, "Quality Assurance Requirements for Protective Coatings Applied to Water Cooled Nuclear Power Plants."

The OCNGS and TMI QAP complies with this Guide with the following clarifications:

A. The Company will comply with the Regulatory Position established in this Regulatory Guide in that programmatic/administrative quality assurance requirements included therein shall apply to maintenance and modification activities, even though such requirements were not in effect originally. Technical requirements associated with maintenance and modifications (e.g., code requirements, material properties, design margins, manufacturing processes, and inspection requirements) shall be the original requirements or better.

B. The quality assurance program for protective coatings includes the planned and systematic actions necessary to provide adequate confidence that shop or field coating work for nuclear facilities will perform satisfactorily in service.

C. All protective coatings applied to surfaces within containment, except those noted in 3 below, are tested to demonstrate that they can withstand LOCA conditions. These tests are performed in accordance with Section 4 of ANSI N101.2, "Protective Coatings (Paints) for Light Water Nuclear Reactor Containment Facilities,"

under LOCA conditions, which equal or exceed those described in the FSAR.

D. The quality assurance program is applied to protective coatings consistent with the nature and scope of work specified in the Technical Specifications. The following elements are included:

1. Preparation of coatings specifications and procedures for generic coating materials/systems.

2. Review and evaluation of coating manufacturers' demonstration test data and quality assurance measures for control of manufacture, identification, and performance verification of applied coating systems.

Page 7 of 17 Revision 90 I

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C

3. Review and evaluation of supplier quality assurance measures to control storage and handling, surface preparation, application, touch-up, repair, curing and inspection of the coating systems.

4. Training and qualification of inspection personnel in coatings inspection requirements.

5. Supplier surveillance inspection.

E. The coatings qualification program and the associated quality assurance requirements are necessary only for coatings whose failure or failure mechanism would have a significant effect on safety.

F. Regulatory Guide 1.54 is not imposed for:

1. Surfaces to be insulated.

2. Surfaces "contained" within a cabinet or enclosure (for example, the interior surfaces of ducts).

3. Field repair on any Q-class coated item of less than 30 square inches surface area, such as; cut ends or otherwise damaged galvanizing; bolt heads, nuts, and miscellaneous fasteners; and damage resulting from spot, tack, or stud welding.

4. Field touch-up and repair of larger areas shall be in accordance with item A.

5. Small "production line" items such as small motors, hand wheels, electrical cabinets, control panels, loudspeakers, etc., where special painting requirements would be impracticable.

6. Stainless steel or galvanized surfaces.

7. Coating used for the banding of piping.

8. Strippable coatings used for cleanup.

G. Quality assurance documentation may not be similar to records and documents listed in Sections 7.4 through 7.8 of ANSI NI101.4, but will be evaluated to assure that they provide at least the same degree of documentation as required by this standard.

5. Regulatory Guide 1.58, Rev. 1, September 1980, "Qualifications of Nuclear Power Plant Inspection, Examination, and Testing Personnel."

The OCNGS and TMI QAP complies with this Guide with the following clarifications:

A. Plant operation personnel may be utilized to perform the visual leakage examinations required by the edition of ASME Section Xl and related codes currently committed to for the conduct of in-service inspections. Such personnel shall be qualified consistent with these ASME Code requirements. The selection Page 8ofl17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C and qualification of such personnel shall be prescribed by a procedure(s).

B. Not all personnel who review and approve inspection and testing procedures, evaluate the adequacy of activities to accomplish the inspection and test objectives, evaluate the adequacy of specific programs used to train and test inspection and test personnel, or certify Level III individuals in specific categories or classes, will be certified as meeting the Level III capability requirements of ANSI N45.2.6-1 978 (NQA-1). Rather, these personnel will be determined by management to be fully qualified and competent to perform these functions through, evaluation of their education, experience and training. The basis for the determination will be documented.

6. Regulatory Guide 1.123, Rev. 1, July 1977, "Quality Assurance Requirements for Control of Procurement of Items and Services for Nuclear Power Plants."

The OCNGS and TMI QAP complies with this Guide with the following clarifications:

A. Section 4.2.a of ANSI N45.2.13-1976. When evaluation of a supplier is based solely on historical supplier data, these data will primarily include records that have been accumulated in connection with previous procurement actions. Data that includes experience of users of identical or similar products of the prospective supplier and product operating experience will be used if available.

B. Section 10.2.f, Verification of the Validity of Supplier Certificates and the Effectiveness of the Certification System, is as follows:

The verification of the validity of supplier certificates and the effectiveness of the certification system are accomplished as an integral part of the total supplier control and product acceptance program, and no separate Company system exists that addresses itself solely to such verification. The degree of verification required will depend upon the type of item or service and their safety importance. The means of verification may include source witness/hold points, source audits, and document reviews; independent inspections at the time of material receipt; user tests on selected commodities, such as concrete components; and tests on selected components and systems after installation. All of these means verify whether or not a supplier has fulfilled procurement document requirements and whether or not a certification system is effective.

7. Regulatory Guide 1.142, October 1981, "Safety-Related Concrete Structures for Nuclear Power Plants (Other Than Reactor Vessels and Containments)."

A. The Company shall comply with the Regulatory Position established in this Regulatory Guide as augmented by ANSI Page 9 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C N45.2.5, ANSI/ANS 6.4-1977, and ANSI/ACI 318-77 for the design and construction of new Safety Related or Augmented Quality structures, and additions to existing Safety Related or Augmented Quality structures. Inspectors will be qualified according to either ANSI N45.2.6 or Appendix VII of Section III, Division 2, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

8. Regulatory Guide 1.143, October 1979, "Design Guidance for Radioactive Waste Management Systems, Structures and Components Installed in Light-Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants."

Since OCNGS and TMI were originally designed and constructed to different classification criteria than those contained in this Guide; the Company will comply with the Regulatory Position of this Guide with the following clarifications:

A. For modifications to existing plant systems, items will be classified by Site Engineering according to the original design basis, or this Guide. This classification will not degrade the safety of the system being modified.

B. Additions to existing plant systems will be designed and constructed to the same codes, standards, and technical requirements which were originally applied to the system to which the addition is to be made, or more recent versions of these codes, standards, and technical requirements. The addition will not degrade the safety of the system being added to.

C. For new construction, the latest applicable codes will be utilized, unless such utilization would result in hardship or unusual difficulty without providing an equivalent level of safety.

D. Hose may be used in lieu of pipe where the connections are temporary. The anticipated applications of hose would normally be (1) connections to contractor owned skid mounted radioactive waste processing equipment, (2) connections to a non-mounted, frequently-changed component such as a burial liner/H IC, or (3) connections to non-mounted pieces of radioactive waste processing or collection equipment which must be readily removable (e.g., items placed on equipment hatches). The pressure rating of such hoses and connections shall equal or exceed those of the systems or components to which they are connected.

1. Prior to use, the hoses shall be hydro-tested to the appropriate pressure for the system or component to which they will be connected. After installation, they will receive regular hydro-testing or in-service inspections.

2. A 50.59 review process is required to justify the use of such hose connections.

Page 10 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C 1.3.3 Clinton Power Station (CPS)

1. The CPS QAPD also includes the following sections of the Operations Requirements Manual (ORM) and the Updated Safety Analysis Report (USAR). The specific sections are as follows:

A. ORM Section 6.8.2, Procedures and Programs - Review and Approval B. ORM Section 6.8.3, Procedures and Programs -Temporary Changes C. USAR Section 13.4 D. USAR Table 3.2-1

2. Site specific clarifications and exceptions applicable to Clinton Power Station include:

A. The CPS USAR Section 1.8, "Conformance to NRC Regulatory Guides", which provides the CPS project position for implementation of regulatory guides, includes additional clarifications and exceptions to the regulatory guides.

B. CPS complies with RG 1.8 (Proposed Rev 2), "Personnel Qualification and Training." (Also reference USAR Section 1.8.)

C. CPS complies with Regulatory Guide 1.33, Rev. 2 (February 1978);

"Quality Assurance Program Requirements (Operation)." CPS complies with this guide and with the following additional exception:

1. ANSI N18.7-1976/ANS-3.2, Section 5.2.17 Inspections: During plant operations emergencies, inspections may be performed under the direction of the duty shift manager.

1.3.4 Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, and Nine Mile Point

1. Regulatory Guide 1.16, (revision facility -specific), "Reporting of Operating Information" - The commitment to this Regulatory Guide is facility-specific as described in the approved Safety Analysis Report (SAR) or License for each nuclear facility. Where items do not conform to the requirements of the Regulatory Guide, they are addressed in the facility specific SAR.

2. Regulatory Guide 1.26, Revision (facility -specific), "Quality Group Classifications and Standards for Water-, Steam-, and Radioactive Waste-Containing Components of Nuclear Power Plants" - Commitment to Safety/Regulatory Guide 1.26 is facility-specific, as required by the approved SAR/License at each nuclear facility. Sites may use this guidance to assist in establishing the lists of equipment to which this QA program applies, or for other purposes.

3. Regulatory Guide 1.28, Revision 3, August 1985, "Quality Assurance Program Requirements (Design and Construction)" (ASME NQA-1, 1983a) - Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna will implement the requirements and guidance of the Page 11 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C standard and Regulatory Guide during the design and construction phases of the facilities subject to the following:

a. Regulatory Position C endorses the basic and supplementary requirements of ANSI/ASME NQA-1-1983 and the ANSI/ASME NQA-1a-1983 Addenda. In place of the specific edition and addenda of NQA-1 addressed in the Regulatory Guide, Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna commit to implement the requirements of NQA-1 -1994 Part I.

Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, and Nine Mile Point are not committed to Part II of NQA-1 unless otherwise noted. The commitment to these requirements and any exceptions/alternatives to these requirements are addressed in this QATR.

4. In establishing qualification and training programs, Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, and Nine Mile commits to compliance with NQA-1-1994 Basic Requirement 2 and Supplements 2S-1, 2S-2, 2S-3 and 2S-4, with the following alternatives and exceptions:

a. For Supplement 2S-1: Inspections, examinations or tests may be performed by individuals in the same organization as that which performed the work, provided that (a) the qualifications of the inspector for an activity are the same as the minimum qualifications for persons performing the activity, (b) the work is within the skills of personnel and/or is addressed by procedures, and (c) if work involves breaching a pressure-retaining item, the quality of the work can be demonstrated through a functional test.

When a, b and c are not met, inspections, examinations or tests are carried out by individuals certified in accordance with Supplement 2S-1.

Individuals performing visual inspections required by the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code are qualified and certified according to Code requirements.

b. In lieu of being certified as Level I, II or Ill in accordance with Non-Mandatory Appendix 2A-1 of NQA-1 -1 994, personnel performing operations phase independent quality verification inspections, examinations, measurements, or tests on material, products or activities, that are in the same organization as that which performed the work, will be required to possess the same minimum level of qualification as that required for performing the task being verified. The verification shall be within the skills of these personnel and/or is addressed by procedures.

These individuals will also be trained and certified to perform inspections in a manner consistent with a Level I quality inspector. The inspectors will be authorized to accept or reject the work being inspected. The results of inspections by these individuals will be reviewed by a certified Level II or higher quality inspector. These individuals will not be responsible for the planning of quality verification inspections and tests (i.e. establishing hold points and acceptance criteria in procedures, or determining who will be responsible for performing the inspections), evaluating inspection training programs, or certifying inspection personnel.

5. Regulatory Guide 1.29, Revision (facility-specific) "Seismic Design Classification"

- Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna may have been designed, constructed and licensed based on criteria available prior to this Regulatory Guide being Page12 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C issued. The specific design criteria and seismic designations are reflected in each plant's SAR, and in other docketed analysis. Thus, the commitment to Safety/Regulatory Guide 1.29 is facility-specific, as required by the approved SAR/License at each facility. Sites may use this guidance in establishing the lists of equipment to which this QA program applies, or for other purposes.

6. Regulatory Guide 1.30, August 1972, "Quality Assurance Requirements for the Installation, Inspection and Testing of Instrumentation and Electric Equipment,"

(ANSI N45.2.4-1 972/IEEE 336-1971 ):

a. Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point, and Ginna commits to ANSI N45.2.4-1972/IEEE 336-1971 in its commitment to Position C of Regulatory Guide 1.30.

b. As noted in Regulatory Position 0.1, ANSI N45.2.4-1972 is being used in conjunction with NQA-1 -1 994, Part I, which replaced ANSI N45.2.

c. As noted in Regulatory Position 0.2, other industry standards may be referenced. The commitment in this QATR to ANSI N45.2.4-1 972 includes commitment to those standards to the extent necessary to implement ANSI N45.2.4-1 972 requirements. If NRC guidance applies to those referenced standards, it is followed.

d. Consistent with Regulatory Position C.3, the requirements of the endorsed standard are also considered applicable during the operation phase of the nuclear power plant.

e. In lieu of the requirements of the last paragraph of ANSI N45.2.4-1 972 Section 6.2.1, the calibration program at Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna does not use calibration stickers on installed plant instrumentation that contain the date of calibration and identity of person that performed the calibration. Calibrations of instruments are scheduled and tracked by a computer database.

7. Regulatory Guide 1.33, Revision 2, February 1978, "Quality Assurance Program Requirements (Operation)" (ANSI N18.7-1 976/ANS-3.2):

a. NQA-1-1994 Part I contains quality assurance requirements equivalent to those of ANSI N18.7-1976/ANS-3.2. Although this QATR complies with the requirements of NQA-1 -1 994 and ANSI N18.7-1976/ANS-3.2, Calvert Cliffs, Ginna and Nine Mile Point does not commit to compliance with the requirements of ANSI N-I18.7-1 976/ANS-3.2 as defined in their Safety Evaluation Report dated December 21, 2006.

b. As recommended by Regulatory Position C.1, Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna uses Appendix A of Regulatory Guide 1.33, Revision 2, as guidance in establishing the types of procedures required for plant operation and support.

c. Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna's commitment to the applicable Regulatory Guides and associated standards listed in Regulatory Position 0.2 is addressed within this QATR. A number of these Regulatory Guides and standards have been incorporated into NQA-1-1 994 Part I.

Page 13 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C

8. Regulatory Guide 1.37, Revision (facility-specific), "Quality Assurance Requirements for Cleaning of Fluid Systems and Associated Components of Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants," (ANSI N45.2.1-1 973) - The commitment to this Regulatory Guide is facility-specific as described in the approved SAR or License for each nuclear facility. Where items do not conform to the requirements of the Regulatory Guide, they are addressed in the applicable facility's SAR.

9. Regulatory Guide 1.38, Revision (facility-specific), "Quality Assurance Requirements for Packaging, Shipping, Receiving, Storage, and Handling of Items for Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants," (ANSI N45.2.2-1 972) - The commitment to this Regulatory Guide is facility-specific as described in the approved SAR or License for each nuclear facility. Where items do not conform to the requirements of the Regulatory Guide, they are addressed in the applicable facility's SAR.

a. This alternative applies to Nine Mile Point Nuclear Station (NMPNS).

NMPNS commits to ANSI/ASME NQA-2-1 983 Part 2.2, "Quality Assurance Requirements for Packaging, Shipping, Receiving, Storage, and Handling of Items for Nuclear Power Plants," for nuclear safety-related activities pertaining directly to permanent plant modifications only. NQA-2-1 983 Section 7.1 refers to NQA-2-1 983 Part 2.15 for requirements related to handling of items. The scope of Part 2.15 includes hoisting, rigging and transporting of items for nuclear power plants. This scope exceeds the scope of the NRC's original endorsement of ANSI N45.2.2 in Regulatory Guide 1.38, and establishes requirements for which there is no NRC regulatory position. In lieu of compliance with Part 2.15, NMPNS is committed to the requirements of applicable heavy load reports for Nine Mile Point Units 1 and 2 that have been approved by the NRC. Unit 2's report is a part of the SAR (Appendix 9C). Unit l's is a separate report.

10. Regulatory Guide 1.39, Revision 2, September 1977, "Housekeeping Requirements for Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants," (ANSI N45.2.3-1 973) -

Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna substitutes NQA-1 -1 994, Subpart 2.3 for N45.2.3 in its commitment to Regulatory Guide 1.39. As noted in Regulatory Position C.1, other industry standards may be referenced; the commitment in this QATR to NQA-1, Subpart 2.3 includes commitment to those standards to the extent necessary to implement Subpart 2.3 requirements. If NRC guidance applies to those referenced standards, it is followed. Regulatory Position C.2 indicates that the provisions of section 3.2.3 of N45.2.3 are not part of the regulatory endorsement. As NQA-1, Subpart 2.3, section 3.2.3 has the same wording as N45.2.3; the Regulatory Position is applicable and will be followed in Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna's implementation of Subpart 2.3.

Regulatory Position C.3 indicates that the endorsed standard is "applicable for housekeeping activities during the operations phase that are comparable to those occurring during construction." This is addressed in appendix C of this QATR, which also establishes any necessary exceptions or alternatives to the provisions of Subpart 2.3.

a. In lieu of the five-level zone designation in Subpart 2.3, Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, and Nine Mile may base its control over housekeeping activities on Page14 ofl17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C a consideration of what is necessary and appropriate for the activity involved. The controls are effected through procedures or instructions.

Factors considered in developing the procedures and instructions include cleanliness control, personnel safety, fire prevention and protection, radiation control and security. The procedures and instructions make use of standard janitorial and work practices to the extent possible.

11. Regulatory Guide 1.54, Revision (facility-specific), "Quality Assurance for Protective Coatings Applied to Nuclear Power Plants" (N101 .4-1 972) - The commitment to this Regulatory Guide is facility-specific as described in the approved SAR or License for each nuclear facility. Where items do not conform to the requirements of the Regulatory Guide, they are addressed in the applicable facility's SAR.

12. Regulatory Guide 1.68, Revision (facility-specific), "Preoperational and Initial Startup Test Programs for Water-Cooled Power Reactors," - The commitment to this Regulatory Guide is facility-specific as described in the approved SAR or License for each nuclear facility. Where items do not conform to the requirements of the Regulatory Guide, they are addressed in the applicable facility's SAR.

13. Regulatory Guide 1.94, Revision (facility-specific), "Quality Assurance Requirements for Installation, Inspection, and Testing of Structural Concrete and Structural Steel During the Construction Phase of Nuclear Power Plants," (ANSI N45.2.5-1 974) - Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna may have been designed, constructed and licensed based on criteria available prior to this Regulatory Guide being issued. The specific installation, inspection, and testing criteria are reflected in each plant's SAR, and in other docketed analysis. Thus, the commitment to Regulatory Guide 1.94 is facility-specific, as required by the approved SAR/License at each facility. Facilities may use this guidance to assist in establishing the equipment to which this QA program applies, or for other purposes.

14. Regulatory Guide 1.116, Revision O-R, May 1977, "Quality Assurance Requirements for Installation, Inspection, and Testing of Mechanical Equipment and Systems," (ANSI N45.2.8-1 975) - Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna substitutes NQA-1-1 994, Subpart 2.8 for N45.2.8 in its commitment to Regulatory Guide 1.116. As noted in Regulatory Position C.1, other industry standards may be referenced; the commitment in this QATR to NQA-1, Subpart 2.8 includes commitment to those standards to the extent necessary to implement Subpart 2.8 requirements. If NRC guidance applies to those referenced standards, it is followed. Regulatory Position C.2 indicates that the endorsed standard should be "followed for those applicable operations phase activities that are comparable to activities occurring during the construction phase." This is addressed in Appendix C of this QATR, which also establishes any necessary exceptions or alternatives to the provisions of Subpart 2.8.

15. Regulatory Guide 1.143, Revision (facility-specific), "Design Guidance for Radioactive Waste Management Systems, Structures and Components Installed in Light-water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants" Commitment to Regulatory Guide 1.143 is facility-specific, as required by the approved SAR at each facility.

Page 15 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C Facilities may use this guidance to assist in establishing the lists of equipment to which this QA program applies, or for other purposes.

16. Regulatory Guide 1.152, Revision 0, November 1985, "Criteria for Programmable Digital Computer System Software in Safety-Related Systems of Nuclear Power Plants" - Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna does not make a commitment to Regulatory Guide 1.152. Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna commit to Generic Letter 95-02, and its endorsement of NUMARC/EPRI Report TR-1 02348, "Guidelines on Licensing Digital Upgrades."

17. Generic Letter 89-02/EPRI-NP-5652 (June 1988)- Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna commits to compliance with the endorsed industry guidance regarding selection and qualification of commercial grade suppliers and dedication of commercial grade items for use in safety related applications.

18. Branch Technical Position CMEB 9.5-1, Revision 2, July 1981 (Positions C.2 and C.4) *-None of the current plants are committed to CMEB 9.5-1. Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna plants are committed to the guidance in Appendix A to Branch Technical Position APCSB 9.5-1, "Guidelines for Fire Protection for Nuclear Power Plants Docketed Prior to July 1, 1976." However, application of the requirements is facility-specific as described in the applicable facility SAR, Fire Protection Program, and License documents.

a. Nine Mile Point Unit 1 is committed tol0 CFR 50.48(c),National Fire Protection Association Standard NEPA 805, "Performance Based Standard for Fire Protection for Light Water Reactor Electric Generating Plants" 2001 Edition per NRC License Amendment number 215 to DPR-63 (ADAMS Accession number ML14126A003) dated 6/30/2014.

b. Ginna is committed to10 CFR 50.48(c),National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 805, "Performance Based Standard for Fire Protection for Light Water Reactor Electric Generating Plants" 2001 Edition per NRC License Amendment number 119 to DPR-1 8 (ADAMS Accession number ML15271A101 dated 11/23/2015

19. Regulatory Guide 4.15, Revision 1, February 1979, "Quality Assurance for Radiological Monitoring Programs (Normal Operations) - Effluent Streams and the Environment" - Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna commits to compliance with the Regulatory Positions of Section C with the following alternatives/exceptions:

a. In lieu of plotting background parameters and setting predetermined control values for gamma spectroscopy instrumentation as described in Regulatory Position C.6.2, background results may be logged and evaluated to ensure the background does not bias reported results.

b. The NRC's independent sampling and analysis program described in Regulatory Position C.6.3.2 may not be performed.

c. In lieu of performing source check calibrations at least once per 18 months as described in Regulatory Position C.7, Calvedt Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna may perform these calibrations at least once per refueling interval.

Page 16 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C

20. Regulatory Guide 7.10, Revision 1, June 1986, "Establishing Quality Assurance Programs for Packaging Used in the Transport of Radioactive Material" - Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna commits to implement the quality assurance guidance for activities related to the packaging and transport of radioactive material that are under its control. Quality Assurance for the design, fabrication and licensing of shipping containers is the responsibility of the container certificate holders.

21. Regulatory Issue Summary 2000-18, October 2000, "Guidance on Managing Quality Assurance Records in Electronic Media" - Should Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point or Ginna choose electronic media storage as a means of maintaining required records, they will comply with the guidance of this Regulatory Issue Summary.

22. Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna will use the guidance contained in Generic Letters 91-05 and 89-02/EPRI NP-5652 to procure commercial grade items in lieu of these requirements NQA-1 -1994 Supplement 4S-1 and Supplement 7S-1.

23. INDEPENDENT SAFETY ENGINEERING GROUP ('ISEG)

Independent safety review is performed to meet the individual unit's commitment to NUREG-0737,Section I.B.1.2, "Independent Safety Engineering Group," as described in the unit's safety analysis report, if applicable.

Revision 90 I Page of 17 17 of Page 17 17 Revision 90 I

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D

1. SCOPE This Appendix consists of definitions for words or phrases found in the QAP and provides a common basis for understanding those words or phrases that may have a different meaning when used elsewhere. All words and phrases are subject to review and revision, as circumstances require. Site specific items are noted.

2. GLOSSARY OF TERMS 2.1. Approval Approval as used herein means by signature or initialing and date by an authorized individual.

2.2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section I Refers to ASME Section I, Power Boilers 2.3. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section III, Division I and Division 2 for Concrete Containment Refers to ASME Section III, Division 1 and Division 2 for Concrete Containment; ASME Section III; ASME Code; ASME; or Code.

2.4. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section IV Refers to ASME Section IV, Heating Boilers 2.5. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section VIII Refers to ASME Section VIII, Pressure Vessels 2.6. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section Xl Refers to ASME Section Xl, Rules for In-Service Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components.

2.7. Audit A planned and documented activity performed to determine by investigation, examination, or evaluation of objective evidence the adequacy of and compliance with established procedures, instructions, drawings, and other applicable documents, and the effectiveness of implementation. An audit should not be confused with surveillance or inspection activities performed for the sole purpose of process control or product acceptance.

2.8. Audit Team Leader An individual appointed to lead an Audit Team. The Audit Team Leader coordinates the preparation of the audit report.

2.9. Auditor One qualified and authorized to examine quality assurance practices and verify whether requirements are being met.

Page I of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.10. Augmented D (CPS Only)

A term applied to those components within the Augmented D boundaries as defined in the engineering specifications. See K-2882, USAR Table 3.2.1, and Appendix C of this manual for scope of requirements and boundaries pertaining to Augmented D.

2.11. Authorized Inspector or Al or ANI As used herein is meant to mean Authorized Nuclear Inspector. An Authorized Nuclear Inspector is an employee of an Authorized Inspection Agency who has qualifications for and has been properly accredited for Division 1 or Division 2.

2.12. Authorized Nuclear In-service Inspector or ANII As used herein is meant to mean the Authorized Nuclear In-service Inspector.

An ANII is an employee of an Authorized Inspection Agency who has qualifications for and has been properly accredited for ASME Section XI.

2.13. Balance of Plant Generating station items and equipment not designed, furnished or installed as a part of the Nuclear Steam Supply System. Balance of Plant items include safety-related and ASME Code items, such as the containment as well as non safety-related and non-ASME Code items.

2.14. Basic Component "Basic component", when applied to nuclear power reactors means a plant structure, system, component or part thereof necessary to assure (1) the integrity of the reactor coolant pressure boundary, (2) the capability to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe shutdown condition, or (3) the capability to prevent or mitigate the consequences of accidents which could result in potential offsite exposures comparable to those referred to in 10CFR1 00.11 Chapter 1 (1-1-87), Part 21.

2.15. Bid Package The total of drawings, specifications, codes, standards, quality and other requirements that describes the task on which a prospective contractor/supplier will bid.

2.16. Calibration A method of assuring accuracy of gauges and instruments used for measuring and testing by comparing with recognized standards.

2.17. Certificate of Compliance A written statement signed by a qualified person, attesting that the materials or items are in compliance with the purchasing documents.

2.18. Certified Personnel Personnel who have passed a formal training program and a formal proficiency test for special processes such as welding, plating and nondestructive testing.

Page 2 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.19. Certified Standards Standards of measurement whose accuracy can be traced to standards at the National Institute of Standards and Technology or established standards.

2.20. Certified Material Test Report A document attesting that material is in accordance with specified requirements including the actual results of all required chemical analyses, tests and examinations.

2.21. Change Order A formal award to a vendor or contractor covering revision(s) to the original Purchase Order or Change Order, involving but not limited to quantity, technical requirements, quality assurance requirements or scope of work.

2.22. Change Order Requisition A document describing revisions to be made to the original Purchase Order or subsequent Change Order and which is converted into a Change Order.

2.23. Characteristic Any property or attribute of an item, process or service that is distinct, describable and measurable, as conforming or nonconforming to specified quality requirements. Quality characteristics are generally identified in specifications and drawings, which describe the item, process or service.

2.24. Code See ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section III or Section XI, whichever is applicable.

2.25. code A recognized standard for using or processing materials, or for the skill involved in use or processing.

2.26. Cognizant Engineer The engineer assigned a specific task or area of responsibility in the design or testing of a component or system.

2.27. CornEd Commonwealth Edison Company (an Exelon Company).

2.28. Company Level Ill Chief Level Ill (NDE) for the Company 2.29. Component An item designed and manufactured to perform a specific function within a system. It consists of a combination of parts and will be combined with other components to form an assembly.

And for ASME Page 3 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D ASME Code items such as vessels, concrete containments, piping systems, pumps, valves, core support structures and storage tanks which will be combined with other items to form an assembly or installation of a nuclear power plant.

2.30. Component Identification Number An identification number assigned (where appropriate) to an item for use throughout its lifetime.

2.31. Construction Activities at the building site necessary to erect, inspect and accept a power generating station and its associated installation. This definition applies unless otherwise indicated.

- Construction (ASME Section III Div.1) comprises all activities relating to materials, design fabrication, examination, testing, inspection and certification required in the manufacture and installation of items.

- Construction (ASME Section III Div. 2) includes all those operations required to build the component and its parts in accordance with the Design Drawings and Construction Specification which have been prepared by the Designer (AE).

2.32. Construction Tests Those tests necessary to verify that the installation of each component of a system is complete and complies with the applicable specifications, standards, codes, drawings and engineering information.

2.33. Contract (including purchase order)

A binding agreement between two or more persons or companies.

2.34. Contractor Any organization under contract for furnishing items or services. It includes the terms vendor, supplier, subcontractor, fabricator and sub-tier levels of these where appropriate. A "Code" contractor is a contractor holding a valid ASME Section III Certificate of Authorization.

2.35. Control Point In a sequential operation, a checkpoint at which certain data are taken, inspections are made or approval is required.

2.36. Control Stamp A stamp used to mark a unique identification of inspection or test status upon items, tags, labels, routing cards or records traceable to an item. Control stamp impressions clearly identify the person who applied it such that traceability to their authorization is provided.

2.37. Corrective Action Measures taken to rectify conditions adverse to quality, and, where necessary, to preclude repetition.

Page 4 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.38. Department When a responsibility is given to a department in this Manual it is meant that the department head has the responsibility.

2.39. Design Change Any change in design that may affect functional requirements, operating conditions, safety-, regulatory-, reliability-, and ASME Code-related requirements, performance objectives, plant reliability or design life and would require that affected documentation be changed.

2.40. Design Controls Methods for assuring that basic design requirements are formalized and translated into design documents with proper review to assure the scheduled release of a valid design.

2.41. Design Criteria Statements of the form, function and interface requirements within well defined limitations. "

2.42. Designer (Division 2)

As used in ASME Code Division 2 construction, the Designer (AE) is the organization responsible for the preparation and completion of the Design Report, design drawings, and construction specifications for applicable items.

2.43. Design Requirements Documents that set the functional requirements, operating conditions, safety requirements, performance objectives, design margins and design life. Included are any special requirements for size, weight, ruggedness, materials, fabrications or constructions, testing, maintenance, operating environments, safety margins and derating factors.

2.44. Design Review An analysis of design with respect to technical adequacy, interface control, inspectability, maintainability and conformance to applicable codes, standards, regulations and design criteria.

2.45. Design Specification A document that sets the functional requirements; design requirements; environmental conditions, including radiation; ASME Code classification; definition of the boundaries; and material requirements. Sufficient detail shall be contained within the document to provide a complete basis for design.

For Section III ASME Code, Division I: A document prepared by the owner or owner's designee which provides a complete basis for construction in accordance with the ASME Code, Section II1.

2.46. Desk Survey An evaluation of a supplier's quality control capability made from documented procedures and records of past performance.

Page 5 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.47. Destructive Test A test to determine the properties of a material or the behavior of an item which results in the destruction of the sample or item.

2.48. Deviation A non-conformance. Departure of a characteristic from specified requirements.

2.49. Discrepancy A non-conformance.

2.50. Documentation Any written or pictorial information describing, defining, specifying, reporting or certifying activities, requirements, procedures or results.

2.51. Drawing Manifest A document for transmitting drawings released for construction to an engineering, construction and/or production organization."

2.52. Erector An organization involved in assembling and building equipment or structures at the site.

2.53. Examination Specific actions by qualified personnel using qualified procedures to verify that items and fabrication processes are in conformance with specified requirements.

This term, when used in conjunction with qualification of personnel to perform quality-related activities shall mean a written examination.

2.54. Extended Quality Assurance Program (CPS Only)

The selected use of technical and management controls to improve the operational performance of equipment important to reliable station operation but not included in compliance based quality assurance programs.

2.55. Fabricator An organization involved in the manufacture of equipment.

2.56. Fabricator (ASME Section III Div. 2)

The NPT Certificate holder 2.57. Final Safety Analysis Report (FSAR)

A finalization of the preliminary safety analysis report prepared for the Nuclear Regulatory Commission prior to issuance of an operating license.

2.58. First Level Design Review A review conducted by the responsible project engineer within the design agency for a specific design discipline.

Revision 90 Page of 17 Page 66 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.59. Flow Chart A representation of the sequence of activities such as procurement, fabrication, processing, assembly, inspection and test, or the sequence of individual operations within one or more of those functions.

2.60. Hold Point A designated stopping place during or following a specific activity at which inspection or examination is required before further work can be performed.

2.61. Incident Occurrence of major damage, serious personal injury or significant schedule delay.

2.62. Independent Review Review completed by personnel not having direct responsibility for the work functions under review regardless of whether they operate as a part of an organizational unit or as individual staff members.

2.63. In-service Inspection A mandatory program of examinations, testing, inspections and control of repairs and replacements to ensure adequate safety in maintaining the nuclear power plant and to return the plant to service in a safe and expeditious manner.

2.64. Inspection A phase of quality verification that, by means of examination, observation or measurement, determines the conformance of materials, supplies, components, parts, appurtenances, systems, processes or structures to predetermined quality requirements.

2.65. Inspection and Test Plan A listing, with optimum sequencing, of all the inspections and tests required to be performed for a specific item, component, structure or service.

2.66. Interface When two or more organizations have responsibilities for accomplishing an activity, the functional relationship that one organization has to the others in completing the activity is called an "interface" relation. One example of interface is when one organization must perform a step, which is a prerequisite to another organization accomplishing its function. Interface can also mean that several organizations accomplishing similar activities are under the coordination control of one organization.

2.67. Interface control Consideration that components and structures are geometrically and functionally compatible and those materials are compatible with both process and environment.

Revision 90 Page 77 of Page 17 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.68. Item Any level of unit assembly, including structure, system, subsystem, subassembly, component, part or material. When ASME Code items are referenced, this means products constructed under a certificate of authorization and material.

2.69. Jurisdictional Boundaries The physical limits of an ASME Code item, which are identified to determine the applicability of ASME Code rules for that item.

2.70. Lifetime Record A record that meets one or more of the following criteria:

- those that would be of significant value in demonstrating capability for safe operation;

- those that would be of significant value in maintaining, reworking, repairing, replacing, or modifying an item;

- those that would be of significant value in understanding the cause of an accident or malfunction of an item;

- those that provide required baseline data for in-service inspections.

2.71. Like - for - Like Replacement The replacement of an item with an item that is identical in all physical and performance characteristics.

2.72. Local Purchase Order A purchase order initiated through the computer by a station for the purchase of only Company Stores Coded items.

2.73. Maintenance Repair, rework, or replacement of a structure, system or component with equipment of the same design, i.e., meeting the same engineering requirements.

2.74. Maintenance/Modification Work Package The complete set of documentation that enables the station to fabricate, examine, test and install ASME and safety related items. The work package consists of the work request, provisions for station traveler, document checklist and maintenance/modification procedures and supporting information such as, but not limited to, approved drawings, design specifications, and special process procedures.

2.75. Material A substance or combination of substances forming components, parts, pieces and equipment. (Intended to include such things as machinery, castings, liquids, formed steel shapes, aggregates and cement.)

When ASME Code material is referenced (this refers to metallic materials) which are manufactured to a SA, SB, or SEA Specification or any other material specification permitted by Section III of the ASME Code. For Division 2, refers to metallic materials, as well as to nonmetallic materials, conforming to the specifications permitted in Section III of the ASME Code.

Page 8 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.76. Material Supplier An organization which supplies material produced and certified by Material Manufacturers, but does not perform any operations that affect the material except when agreed upon by the Certificate Holder who uses the material in ASME Code construction or when so authorized by a Quality System Certificate (Materials). The Material Supplier may perform and certify the results of tests, examinations, repairs, or treatments required by the material specification that were not performed by the Material Manufacturer.

2.77. Measuring and Test Equipment (M&TE)

Equipment used to quantitatively generate or measure physical or electrical parameters with a known degree of accuracy for the purpose of calibration, inspection, test, or repair of plant mechanical, electrical, or instrument control equipment.

2.78. Modification A change to an item made necessary by, or resulting in, a change in design requirements (ASME - NCA 9000). A planned change in plant design or operation and accomplished in accordance with the requirements and limitation of applicable codes, standards, specifications, licenses and predetermined safety restrictions.

2.79. National Standards Standards maintained at or issued by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) or other designated institutions, and the values for natural physical constants and conversion factors recommended by NIST.

2.80. Non-compliance A failure to comply with a regulatory requirement 2.81. Nonconformance A nonconformance is a deficiency in characteristic, documentation, or procedure that renders the quality of a structure, system, or component (SSC) or activity unacceptable or indeterminate. Some examples of nonconforming conditions include the following:

- There is failure to conform to one or more applicable codes or standards specified in the UFSAR or procurement documents.

- As-built equipment, or as modified equipment, does not meet UFSAR descriptions or design bases.

- Requirements can not be substantiated with proper documentation.

- Physical defects.

- Test failures.

- Deviation from prescribed processing, inspection, or test procedures.

2.82. Nonpermanent Record A record that is required to show evidence that an activity was performed in accordance with the applicable requirements but do not meet the criteria for a lifetime record.

Page 9 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.83. NQA - 1 (ASME NQA - 1)

Quality Assurance Program Requirements for Nuclear Facilities. For ASME Section III activities, NQA - 1 is as modified by the ASME Code.

2.84. Nuclear Steam Supply System (NSSS)

That portion of the nuclear generating plant that provides steam from nuclear heat. It includes the reactor, its control systems, main coolant and steam generation systems, fuel handling equipment, emergency core cooling system and other safeguards, associated electrical equipment, instrumentation, spent fuel handling and radioactive waste disposal system.

2.85. Objective Evidence Any statement of fact, information or record, either quantitative or qualitative, pertaining to the quality of an item or service based on observations, measurements or tests that can be verified.

2.86. Operable/Operability A system, subsystem, train, component or device shall be operable or have operability when it is capable of performing its specified function(s) and when all necessary attendant instrumentation, controls, electrical power, cooling or seal water, lubrication or other auxiliary equipment that are required for the system, subsystem, train, component or device to perform its function(s) are also capable of performing their related support function(s). NOTE: Safe operation of the plant is determined by licensed operators.

2.87. Operational Tests Tests that are performed during the operations of the plant to verify continued satisfactory performance of safety-related structures, systems and components.

2.88. Personnel Access Data System (PADS)

A computerized and restricted access data system used by the domestic commercial nuclear power industry to share information necessary to process the applications of workers for unescorted access to nuclear power plants. This system is intended to meet regulatory requirements mandating that certain information be available to any power reactor licensee by retaining certain access information in a central computer database.

2.89. Permanently Installed Instrument and Control Devices The installed plant equipment including computer points used in determining acceptance criteria of Technical Specification surveillances (Category A and Surveillance Instruments for CPS).

2.90. Phased Replacement Where several identical items are to be replaced with a new model, they are replaced a few at a time to allow monitoring of the new items.

Revision 90 Page 10 of Page 10 17 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.91. Preliminary Safety Analysis Report (PSAR)

The initial detailed safety evaluation prepared for the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission prior to issuance of the site construction permit. The PSAR delineates design, normal and emergency operation, potential accidents and predicted consequences of such accidents and the means proposed to prevent such accidents and/or reduce their consequences to acceptable levels.

2.92. Pre-Operational Testing Preliminary testing prior to fuel loading and plant operation to assure that construction and installation are complete and to verify design and system functions.

2.93. Procedure A controlled document that specifies or describes how an activity is to be performed. It may include methods to be employed, equipment or materials to be used, accept/reject criteria and sequence of operations.

2.94. Proprietary Designs Designs engineered, produced and sold by manufacturers in accordance with their criteria and warranty.

2.95. Purchase Requisition The basic document describing a material, component or service that is converted into a purchase order for procurements.

2.96. Quality Assurance All those planned and systematic actions necessary to provide adequate confidence that an item or a facility will perform satisfactorily in service. For the ASME Code, Quality Assurance comprises all those planned and systematic actions necessary to provide adequate confidence that all items designed and constructed are in accordance with the applicable ASME Code.

2.97. Quality Assurance Program (QAP)

The Quality Assurance Program is the method for complying with the provisions of 10OCFR5O Appendix B for nuclear power plant systems, structures, and components that prevent or mitigate the consequences of postulated accidents that could cause undue risk to the health and safety of the public. The Quality Assurance Program is defined in the Quality Assurance Topical Report and implementing procedures.

2.98. Quality Assurance Topical Report (QATR)

A NRC approved regulatory document that describes quality assurance program elements for the operational phase of nuclear power plants. This term is synonymous with Quality Assurance Program Description (QAPD), Operation Quality Assurance Program (OQAP), and Quality Assurance Manual (QAM).

2.99. Quality Control See Quality verification Page 11 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.100. Quality Receipt Inspection Report A form utilized by station Quality Control to document technical receipt inspection of ASME Code and safety-related items received by the station.

2.101. Quality Related Activities which influence quality of safety-related items or work related to those systems, structures and components as identified in the USAR, Table 3.2-1, including design, purchasing, fabricating, handling, shipping, storing, cleaning, preserving, erecting, installing, inspecting, testing, operating, maintaining, repairing, refueling or modifying.

2.102. Quality Verification Those quality assurance examinations and actions that provide a means to control and measure the characteristics of an item, process or facility to determine or establish conformance to acceptance standards and specified requirements.

2.103. Receipt Inspection An inspection which verifies that items are in satisfactory condition, that they match the purchase order requirements and that required documentation accurately reflects the item(s) received. Visual and physical inspection will be performed as necessary to determine the acceptability of the item(s).

2.104. Receiving Inspection Notice (RIN)

A form initiated by the station upon receipt of ASME Code or safety-related items to record inspection for damage, to record receipt of documentation and to notify station Quality Control that item(s) are available for technical receipt inspection.

2.105. Record A completed document that:

- furnishes evidence of the quality of items or activities.

- furnishes evidence of compliance with regulations or requirements.

- is required by Technical Specifications.

Included are such related documents as drawings, specifications, procurement documents, procedures, operating logs, and reportable occurrences. Such documents may be originals or reproduced copies.

2.106. Registered Professional Engineer (RPE)

A person competent in the applicable field of design and qualified in accordance with the requirements of ASME Section III, Appendix XXIII.

2.107. Repair The process of restoring a nonconforming characteristic to a condition such that the capability of an item to function reliably and safely is unimpaired, even though that item still may not conform to the original requirements. For ASME Section III items, repair is the process of physically restoring a nonconformance to a condition such that an item complies with ASME Code requirements.

Page 12 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.108. Request for Bid Invitation made to suppliers or contractors to bid on a specific task for materials, goods and services.

2.109. Request for Purchase A generating station's document originated by supervisors or department heads that designates the required items and services and delineates the design specifications, applicable codes and standards, as well as, any special requirements. This document is the basis of initiating a Purchase Requisition.

2.110. Resolution (CPS Only) 2.111. The process by which a nonconforming item is corrected or determined to adequately perform its design function without adversely affecting safety. The resolution may contain controls or limitations that are to apply until the nonconformance is fully corrected.

2.112. Rework The process by which a nonconforming item is made to conform to a prior specified requirement by completion, re-machining, and re-assembling using previously approved procedural requirements. (For ASME Section III, rework is same as repair.)

2.113. Safety-Related Systems, structures and components, which are considered important to safety because they perform safety actions, required to avoid or mitigate the consequences of abnormal operation transients or accidents. In addition, design requirements are placed upon such equipment to assure the proper performance of safety actions, when required (Safety-related items are those designated Seismic Category 1, Safety Class 1, 2, 3, "Other" and Electrical Class 1E as identified in the CPS USAR, Section 3.2).

2.114. Second Level Design Review Independent objective assessment of a design by qualified personnel who have no direct project responsibility for the design.

2.115. Seismic Classification Plant structures, systems and components important to safety which are designed to withstand the effects of a safe shutdown earthquake and remain functional if they are necessary to assure:

- The integrity of the reactor coolant pressure boundary, or

- The capability to shutdown the reactor and maintain it in a safe condition, or

- The capability to prevent or mitigate the consequences of accidents which could result in potential offsite exposures comparable to the guideline exposures of 10CFR1 00.

(Plant structures, systems and components, including their foundations and supports, which are designed to remain functional in the event of an SSE are designated as Seismic Category 1 as indicated in Table 3.2-1 of the CPS USAR.)

Page 13 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.116. Significant Conditions (adverse to quality)

A condition, which if left uncorrected, could have a serious effect on safety or operability.

2.117. Source Acceptance Acceptance made at a vendor's plant prior to shipment of purchased items.

2.118. Source Inspection Inspection carried out at a vendor's plant prior to shipment of purchased items.

2.119. Special Process A process, the results of which are highly dependent on the control of the process or skill of the operator, or both.

2.120. Special Process Procedures Manual A compilation of Company procedures governing nondestructive examination and special processes such as welding and heat-treating.

2.121. Specification A concise set of requirements to be satisfied by a product, material or process.

The set of requirements may, also, indicate the procedure by which one may determine if the given requirements are satisfied.

2.122. Start Up Tests Tests that are performed after initial fuel loading and proceed through several power level plateaus to 100% power.

2.123. Stock Material Material which is or may be used for conversion to an ASME SA, SB, or SFA Specification or allowable ASTM Specification. As used in this Program, Stock Material is that material that has not been produced in accordance with an NCA 3800 QA Program.

2.124. Stop Work Collective term used to describe the following three levels of stopping work activities:

- The stopping of a single or specific work activity by NOS or Line personnel.

- A hold imposed by a Department Head on a department or general work activity.

- A Stop Work Action initiated by the NOS Manager.

2.125. Surveillance Examination of supplier's manufacturing, inspection and test operations and of records of work in progress. This activity is documented.

2.126. Survey A documented evaluation of an organization's ability to perform activities as verified by a determination of the adequacy of the organization's quality program and by a review of the implementation of that program at the location of work.

Page 14 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.127. System Safety Classifications (CPS Only)

Structures, systems and components are classified as Safety Class 1, Safety Class 2, Safety Class 3, Safety Class Other or Class 1E in accordance with the importance to Nuclear Safety. Equipment is assigned a specific safety class, recognizing that components within a system may be a differing safety importance. Definitions of various Safety Classes are:

2.127.1. Safety Class 1 (CPS Only)

Components of the reactor coolant pressure boundary or core support structure whose failure could cause a loss of reactor coolant at a rate in excess of the normal make-up system.

2.127.2. Safety Class 2 (CPS Only)

Structures, systems and components, other than service water systems, that are not Safety Class 1, but are necessary to accomplish the safety functions of:

1. Inserting negative reactivity to shut down the reactor,

2. Preventing rapid insertion of positive reactivity,

3. Maintaining core geometry appropriate to all plant process conditions,

4. Providing emergency core cooling,

5. Providing and maintaining containment,

6. Removing residual heat from the reactor and reactor core, or

7. Storing spent fuel.

2.127.3. Safety Class 3 (CPS Only)

Structures, systems and components that are not Safety Class 1 or Safety Class 2, but whose function is to process radioactive fluids and whose postulated failure would result in conservatively calculated offsite doses that exceed 0.5 remn to the whole body or its equivalent to any part of the body in accordance with Regulatory Guide 1.26.

2.127.4. Safety Class "Other"(CPS Only)

Structures, systems and components used in the power conversion or other portions of the facility which have no direct safety function, but which may be connected to or influenced by the equipment within the Safety Classes 1, 2 or 3.

2.127.5. Class 1E (CPS Only)

The safety classification of the electric equipment and systems that are essential to emergency reactor shutdown, containment isolation, reactor core cooling and containment and reactor heat removal or otherwise are essential in preventing significant release of radioactive material to the environment. (Structures, systems and component safety classifications and related Quality Assurance Program requirements classifications are summarized in Table 3.2-1 of the CPS USAR.)

2.128. Technical Review (nonconforming item)

A determination as to whether a nonconforming item will be accepted "as is",

reworked, repaired to an acceptable condition or rejected.

Page 15 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.129. Technical Specification The design and performance criteria and operating limits and principles of an operating license to be observed during initial fuel loading, critical testing, start-up, power operations, refueling and maintenance operations.

2.130. Test Determination of the physical and functional properties of an item by subjecting the item to a set of physical, chemical, environmental or operating conditions.

2.131. Test Plan An outline, narrative description or flow diagram indicating the tests to be performed, the methods to be used and the points in the process where they are to be executed. It may be in the form of a test procedure.

2.132. Traceability The ability to verify the history, location, or application of an item by means of recorded identification.

2.133. USAR Abbreviation for the Updated Safety Analysis Report, which is the document submitted by the Company to the Nuclear Regulatory Commission in accordance with 10OCFR50.71.

2.134. Use -As -Is A disposition which may be imposed for a nonconformance when it can be established that the discrepancy will result in no adverse conditions to safety and that the item under consideration will continue to meet all engineering functional requirements including performance, maintainability, fit and safety.

2.135. Variation A nonconformance. Departure of a characteristic from specified requirements.

2.136. Verification The act of confirming, substantiating, assuring, and documenting that a task, element, or condition is implemented in conformance with the specified requirements. Two commonly used type of verification as are described as follows:

- Concurrent Verification is also known as "apart-in-action" because the verification is being done concurrently as the action is implemented.

Concurrent Verification is accomplished when two individuals verify the actions concurrently and apart from each other as they perform the task.

Concurrent verification should be used for any action that if performed incorrectly, could result in an immediate threat to personnel safety, nuclear safety, reliable plant operation, or for an activity that can't be verified after it's completed.

- Independent Verification is also known as "apart-in-time" because the verification occurs at some time after the action has been performed. An independent verification is performed at a later time by a second qualified individual who is not part of the initial job performance checking the Page 16 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D actions previously performed by others. Independent verification may be used in cases were actions if done incorrectly, could significantly affect nuclear and personnel safety, regulatory or other issues important to safe and reliable plant operations, but would not result in immediate consequences.

2.137. Witness Points In a sequential operation, a notification to the Company, or its authorized agent, that a phase of work is about to be reached, so that it may be witnessed at a specific time, or in process, to verify acceptable performance of the phase.

Witness points may be established in the traveler, procedure or in the course of monitoring the work activity.

2.138. Work Instructions Actions to be completed by personnel while they are performing specific tasks in areas such as material controls and identification and fabrication or installation of equipment.

2.139. Workmanship That quality of an item expressing its skillful and artful manufacture, without apparent blemishes.

Revision 90 Page 17 Page of 17 17 of 17 Revision 90

CONTROL OF RADIOACTIVE WASTE APPENDIX E OR MATERIALS (SITE SPECIFIC) 1, SCOPE Measures shall be established and documented to assure that the requirements of the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 10, Part 71, Title 10, Part 20, and Title 49, Parts 100 through 199, applicable to the packaging and transporting of radioactive wastes or materials are satisfied

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General It is the Company's goal to minimize the generation of radioactive waste, consistent with the ALARA concept to minimize personnel exposures and environmental contamination. The elements contained within this appendix apply to Three Mile Island, Oyster Creek, and Clinton Power Station Part 20, requires that a quality control program be implemented to verify compliance with Title 10, Part 61.55 (Waste Classification) and Title 10, and Part 61.56 (Waste Characteristics). This Plan shall be implemented to the extent necessary to assure compliance with those Parts of Title 10, using a graded approach.

Subpart H to 10CFR71 identifies the quality assurance criteria applicable to the control of packaging to be utilized to ship radioactive wastes or materials. The portions of this Plan that relate to the criteria in Subpart H to 10CFR71 describe, to a large extent, the administrative controls and quality requirements to be applied in the control, packaging, and transportation of radioactive waste or material.

2.2. Three Mile IslandlOyster Creek 2.2.1. Procedures and administrative controls shall be developed and implemented to cover the following:

1. Processing of radioactive wastes, including the collection, handling and preparation for shipment of radioactive liquids and solids. These procedures shall be consistent with the ALARA program and shall clearly identify the administrative controls and organizational responsibilities.

2. Training and qualification of personnel operating radioactive waste processing equipment, health physics monitoring, packaging and shipping (which includes Waste Classification and establishment of Waste Characteristics) and other operations deemed appropriate by management.

Page 1 of 4 Revision 90

CONTROL OF RADIOACTIVE WASTE APPENDIX E OR MATERIALS (SITE SPECIFIC)

3. The activities associated with the packaging of radioactive wastes or materials shall include the proper selection of the receptacles to be used for containing the waste materials, the selection of the shipping containers (structures used to contain and support the receptacle and its contents), establishment of Waste Characteristics, radiological control inspections of the packaging prior to release, proper markings on the oUtside of the package, and the preparation of shipping papers and certificates. The activities shall be in accordance with 10CFR20, 10CFR61, 100FR71, and 49CFR.

4. Movement of radioactive wastes or materials within and outside the protected area to assure personnel protection at all times.

5. The shipment of radioactive wastes or materials from the Station shall be in accordance with the regulations of the U.S. Department of Transportation for the transportation of hazardous materials (49CFR) and of the NRC (10CFR71 and 10CFR20).

6. Design, fabrication, assembly, testing, and modification of packaging used for transportation of radioactive waste or material which exceed the limits specified by 10OCFR71 .10 shall not be performed by the Company.

Such packaging shall be purchased from an outside supplier and shall comply with 10CFR71 and 49CFR. The Company shall review and accept designs of packaging purchased from an outside supplier.

7. The packaging used for transporting of radioactive waste or material, which does not exceed the limits specified in 10CFR71.10, whether purchased from an outside supplier or designed by the Company, shall meet 49CFR.

8. Minimization of the generation of radioactive wastes through training programs, prudent scheduling and use of equipment and personnel, and good housekeeping practices.

2.2.2. The carriers to be used for transporting of radioactive waste or material shall be selected on the basis of their experience, knowledge of DOT regulations, control and maintenance of their equipment and the selection and control of their drivers. The carrier is required to have or shall be supplied documented procedures Covering acceptance of radioactive waste or material from a shipper, certification requirements, placarding, storage control, reporting of incidents and security. The Company shall review and accept carrier procedures specified by procurement documents covering the acceptance of radioactive waste or material for shipment.

2.2.3. Operations involving radioactive waste processing or radioactive material shall be controlled to minimize personnel exposures or environmental contamination, consistent with ALARA.

Page 2 of 4 Revision 90

CONTROL OF RADIOACTIVE WASTE APPENDIX E OR MATERIALS (SITE SPECIFIC) 2.2.4. Operations procedures relating to radioactive waste or material shipping and packaging shall be reviewed by Quality Verification to establish any necessary inspection points.

2.3. Clinton Power Station 2.3.1. Radioactive Waste/Augmented "D" Systems.

QATR Chapters that are applicable to Radioactive Waste/Augmented "D" Systems are I through 7, 9 through 11, and 13 through 18. Chapters 8 and 12 do not apply.

1. Chapter 4 - Specification of quality assurance program requirements for suppliers of radioactive waste/augmented 0 materials, equipment and services shall be on a case-by-case basis. Commercial grade or off-the-shelf items may provide an acceptable level of quality based on the nature of the item. This determination shall be made by Engineering personnel prior to issuance of procurement documents.

2. Chapter 7 - Suppliers providing material, equipment and services for Radioactive Waste/Augmented D shall be subject to source evaluation and surveillance. The extent of imposition of these requirements shall be determined on a case-by-case basis by the design organization responsible for review and approval of the procurement specifications.

Measures shall be established, and appropriate, for examination of products upon delivery.

3. Chapter 9 - Applicable to the qualification of welders and welding procedures (ASME Section IX)for Radioactive Waste systems.

(Pressure boundaries only.)

4. Chapter 10 - Applicable only to inspection of those items and activities affecting Radioactive Waste/Augmented D systems within the quality assurance boundaries as specified in the USAR, Table 3.2-1, and further amplified by the appropriate design drawings.

2.3.2. Packaging and Transportation of Radioactive Material QATR Chapters 1 through 18 are applicable to the packaging and transportation of radioactive material.

1. Chapter 3 - Applicable, design activities are not normally performed by CPS for radioactive material packaging, however, audits of suppliers establish that the design was accomplished under control of an NRC approved QA program.

Revision 90 Page 3 Page of 44 3 of Revision 90

CONTROL OF RADIOACTIVE WASTE APPENDIX E OR MATERIALS (SITE SPECIFIC)

2. Chapter 7 - Applicable, measures such as source surveillance and audits of records should be taken as appropriate to ensure that the design and fabrication of packaging were performed under the control of an NRC-approved QA program.

3. Chapter 9 - Applicable, special processes such as welding or nondestructive testing are not normally performed by OPS. However, if packaging requires major repairs necessitating use of special processes, e.g., welding or heat treating, measures shall be established to ensure that the special processes are controlled.

4. Chapter 10 - Applicable, visual inspections shall be performed upon receipt of packaging to ensure compliance with certificates of compliance.

5. Chapter 13 - Applicable, all conditions identified in a certificate of compliance when using packages shall be adhered to.

6. Chapter 16 - Applicable, measures are established for obtaining corrective actions from suppliers and for ensuring that follow-up is documented to verify that corrective actions were implemented and effective.

7. Chapter 17 - Applicable, records showing evidence of delivery of packages to a carrier and proof that all NRC and Department of Transportation (DOT) requirements have been satisfied shall also be retained.

8. Chapter 18 - Applicable, audits are performed on the supplier of packaging to ensure compliance with the certificate of compliance.

Revision 90 Page of 44 Page 44 of Revision 90

GRADED APPROACH (SITE SPECIFIC) APPENDIX APNI F

1. SCOPE The Company establishes measures that provide a graded approach to quality at Oyster Creek and Three Mile Island Stations. The extent to which the requirements of this appendix and its associated implementing documents are applied to an item will be based upon the effect of a malfunction or failure of the item on nuclear safety or safe plant operations.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General The quality requirements for items within the scope of this appendix shall be established using approved procedures. Quality requirements will be established by the responsible organizational element and subject to assessment by Nuclear Oversight.

The need for special controls, and surveillance or maintaining of processes, equipment and of operational activities will be applied consistent with:

- The design and fabrication complexity or uniqueness of the item.

- The degree to which functionality can be demonstrated by inspection or test.

- The quality history and degree of standardization of the item.

The extent to which the requirements of the QATR apply to activities will be based, as a minimum, on Operating License conditions and other plans previously submitted to the NRC for approval, other regulatory commitments as may have been made associated with activities, the text of this Plan, the unit's Technical Specifications, and Appendix C of the QATR.

Such other plans or regulatory commitments include, but are not limited to, those associated with emergency planning, physical plant security, safeguard contingency planning, radiological controls, radiological environmental controls, fire protection, in-service inspection, in-service testing, licensed operator qualification and re-qualification, process control, off-site dose calculation, Shift Technical Advisor training, environmental qualification of electrical equipment, security guard training and qualification, etc.

2.2. Quality Classification The scope of the Company's QATR includes but is not limited to items and activities related to safe nuclear plant operation, protection of personnel, and protection of the public. To ensure consistency in identifying those items and activities within the scope of the QATR, a classification process has been developed and documented. This process relies on the use of the terms "Safety Related," "Augmented Quality," and "QATR Scope."

Page 1 of 3 Revision 90

GRADED APPROACH (SITE SPECIFIC) APNI APPENDIX F 2.2.1. Nuclear Safety Related or Augmented Quality Items

1. Items within the scope of the QATR are designated as "Nuclear Safety Related" or "Augmented Quality." A quality classification process for Items has been developed. This classification process produces a Component Record List, which identifies the permanent plant structures, systems, and components that are within the scope of the QATR and their specific classification. New Items to which the QATR applies shall be added to the Component Record List subsequent to their installation.

The classification of structures, systems, and components shall be subject to independent design review as part of the classification process.

2. Spare or replacement parts and materials are not necessarily classified the same as the component of which they are a part. Such parts and materials that perform or contribute to the performance of a Safety Related or Augmented Quality function are within the scope of the QATR and classified similar to the component of which it is a part. For procurement of spare or replacement parts which are of a different classification, the classification will be determined by Procurement Engineering. The determinations will be documented, retained, and subject to review and assessment.

3. The classification of items and consumable items (such as chemicals, radwaste liners, diesel fuel, etc.) and the technical and quality requirements will be specified, documented and approved as part of the procurement process.

4. The QATR may be applied to items, other than those designated as "Safety Related" or "Augmented Quality" as specified by Company management.

2.2.2. QATR Scope Activities

1. Activities within the scope of the QATR are designated as within "QATR Scope." Activities that are within the scope are those directly related to nuclear and radiological safety and protection of the public and are delineated below.

2. Support activities within the scope of the QATR are quality classification, operating experience assessment, design, maintenance of environmental and fire protection qualification, nuclear fuel management, procurement, fabrication, handling, shipping, storage, cleaning, erecting, installing, testing, repairing, training, welding, in-service inspection, heat treatment, document control, records management, access authorization and fitness-for-duty.

3. Operational activities within the scope of the QATR are normal, abnormal and emergency operation, chemistry control, core performance monitoring, shift technical advice, equipment control, surveillance testing, in-service testing, maintenance, housekeeping, fire protection, security, Page 2 of 3 Revision 90

GRADED APPROACH (SITE SPECIFIC) APNI APPENDIX F radiological controls, radiological environmental monitoring, radwaste preparation for shipment, radwaste shipment, fuel handling/refueling, technical specification compliance, and emergency preparedness.

4. Assurance activities within the scope of the QATR are assessment (audit, document review, monitoring, survey, and surveillance), inspection, non-destructive examination, and safety review. Individuals who are not directly responsible for managing or performing the work or activity perform assurance activities. Nuclear Oversight personnel perform periodic assessments of the "assurance" activities performed by other organizational elements (e.g. NDEIISI) to assure effectiveness and adequacy.

5. The above stated activities are controlled through the use of approved documents which are, as a minimum, consistent with the requirements of the QATR, the unit Operating License, specific Regulatory Guides to the extent listed and committed to in Appendix C of the QATR, the Final Safety Analysis Report, and other regulatory requirements and commitments.

6. A specific task associated with the above activities will be classified as within scope of the QATR depending upon:

- Statements within the text and the Regulatory Guides identified in Appendix C of the QATR.

- The relationship of the task to the safe operation of the nuclear plant.

- The relationship of the task to the protection of personnel from the effects of radiation.

- The relationship of the task to protection of the health and safety of the public.

- The relationship of the task to regulatory requirements and commitments.

- Other factors specified by Company management.

Revision 90 Page of 3 3 of Page 3 3 Revision 90

SUPPLEMENTAL APPLICATIONS APNI APPENDIX G (SITE SPECIFIC)

1. SCOPE 10OCFR50 Appendix B requires a quality assurance program be established in writing and executed for activities affecting the safety-related function of designated structures, systems and components to an extent consistent with their importance to safety.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. Clinton Power Station (CPS)

The areas of Environmental, Fire Protection, and Security are specifically identified in Table 3.2-1 of the CPS USAR and/or highlighted in several Regulatory Guides that define and clarify its importance to the plant.

2.1.1. Environmental QATR Chapters 1, 2, 15, 16, and 18 apply to the Environmental area. QATR Chapters 3, 10, 11, and 12 do not apply to the Environmental area. QATR Chapters 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 14, and 17 apply to the Environmental area in the limited manner discussed below.

1. Chapter 4 - Applicable to procurement of monitoring services to be performed by contractors providing services dealing with radiological data and to radionuclide reference standards used for calibration of radiation measurement systems.

2. Chapter 5 - Applicable to all activities related to carrying out the radiological monitoring program including: sample collection; packaging, shipment and receipt of samples for off-site analysis; procurement, maintenance, storage and use of radioactivity reference standards; calibration and checks of radiation and radioactivity measurement systems; and reduction, evaluation and reporting of data.

3. Chapter 6 - Applicable to procedures and instructions required by Chapter 5.

4. Chapter 7 - Applicable to radionuclide reference standards used for calibration of radiation measurement systems and to radiological monitoring activities (services) provided by contractors.

5. Chapter 8 - Applicable only to radiological sample collection, identification, packaging, shipping, receiving, storage and analysis.

6. Chapter 9 - Applicable to radioactivity measurements of samples, instrument backgrounds, replicate samples and analytical blanks; data Page 1 of 3 Revision 90

SUPPLEMENTAL APPLICATIONS APNI APPENDIX G (SITE SPECIFIC) reduction and verification; computer program documentation and verification.

7. Chapter 9 - Applicable to laboratory instruments for radiation and radioactivity measurement, continuous radiological effluent monitoring systems and flow-rate measuring devices associated with radiological effluent monitoring systems.

8. Chapter 13 - Applicable to radiolog'ical samples only.

9. Chapter 14 - Applicable to continuous radiological effluent monitoring systems equipment only.

10. Chapter 17 - Applicable to personnel training and qualification; field and in-plant collection of samples; continuous effluent monitoring; sample receipt and laboratory identification; sample preparation and radiochemical processing; radioactivity measurements of samples, instrument backgrounds and analytical blanks; data reduction and verification; instrument calibration and calibration standards; computer program documentation; audits; and corrective action.

2.1.2. Fire Protection QATR Chapters that are applicable to the Fire Protection area are 1 through 7, 10, 11, and 14 through 18. Chapters 8, 9, 12 and 13 do not apply.

1. Chapter 4 - Applicable. Specification of quality assurance program requirements for suppliers of fire protection materials, equipment and services shall be on a case-by-case basis. Commercial grade or off-the-shelf items may provide an acceptable level of quality based on the nature of the item. This determination shall be made by Engineering personnel prior to issuance of procurement documents

2. Chapter 7 - Applicable. Suppliers providing material, equipment and services for fire protection shall be subject to source evaluation and surveillance. The extent of imposition of these requirements shall be determined on a case-by-case basis by the design organization responsible for review and approval of the procurement specifications.

Measures shall be established, as appropriate, for examination of products upon delivery.

3. Chapter 10 - Applicable only to inspection of those items and activities affecting the fire protection system within the quality assurance boundaries as specified in the USAR, Table 3.2-1 and further amplified by the appropriate design drawings.

4. Chapter 17 - Applicable to documents designated as Quality Assurance Records generated in the implementation of the Fire Protection Program and consistent with the requirements identified in Chapter 10 above.

Page 2 of 3 Revision 90

SUPPLEMENTAL APPLICATIONS APNI APPENDIX G (SITE SPECIFIC)

• Records are prepared and maintained to furnish evidence that the W applicable criteria discussed herein are being met for activities affecting the Fire Protection Program.

5. Chapter 18 - Applicable. Audits shall be performed and documented to verify compliance with the Fire Protection Program, including design and procurement documents, instructions, procedures and drawings and inspection and test activities.

2.1.3. Security QATR Chapters that are applicable to the Security area are 16 through 18.

Chapters 1 through 15 do not apply.

1. Chapter 17 - Applicable to those records required by the CPS Physical Security Plan.

2. Chapter 18 - Applicable to the physical security of CPS and designated records.

2.2 Oyster Creek Nuclear Generating Station (OCNGS) 2.2.1 Audits S1. Independent audits and reviews of Oyster Creek Environmental Technical Specifications (OCETS) will encompass:

A. Coordination of the OCETS with the safety technical specifications to avoid conflicts and maintain consistency.

B. Compliance of station activities and operations with the OCETS.

C. Adequacy of the programs and station procedures which are involved in ensuring the plant is operated in accordance with the OCETS.

D. The proper functioning in accordance with the responsibilities listed in Section 3.1 of the OCETS.

E. Proposed changes to the OCETS and the evaluation of the impacts resulting from the changes.

F. Proposed written procedures, as described in Section 3.4.1 [of the OCETS] and proposed changes thereto which affect the environmental impact of the plant.

G. Proposed changes or modifications to plant systems or equipment and a determination of the environmental impact resulting from the changes.

H. Adequacy of investigations of violations of the OCETS and adequacy of and implementation of the recommendations to prevent recurrence of the violations.

Revision 90 Page 3 Page of 3 3 of 3 Revision 90

PASSPORT DOCUMENT To  : *WTOL DESK Facility  : TMI Department: TRANSMITTAL Address From Address TMI-RM Records Management Exelon Nuclear Attention: Records Manager 111liiill Page: 1 I/l I i lNi1 TMI Station City MIDDLETOWN State: PA Postal Code: 17057 Country UNITED STATES Email Contact 0000102839 Date/Time Title  : 0/2 /21 9:5Tasmital Group Id:

Total Items: 00001 Trans No.  : 000678031 Item Facility Type Sub Document Number Sheet Doc Status Revision Doc Date Copy # Media Cpys

• 0001 TMI PROC NSP ACTIVE 090 DCl H3 01 Marked (*) documents require your acknowledgement.

Acknowledgement Date Sintue Signature:

If a document was not received or is no longer required check the response below and return to sender.

I Documents noted above not received (identify those not received).

I no longer require distribution of these documents (identify those no longer required).

Date: ____________ Signature:______ ___________________

GENERAL CONTROLLED COPY - VERIFY BEFORE USE Exelon Generation Company, LLC QUALITY ASSURANCE TOPICAL REPORT (QATR)

NO-AA-1 0 Revision 90 I

Exelon Nuclear Corporate Headquarters 4300 Winfield Road Warrenville, IL 60555

This Page Intentionally Left Blank Standard Quality Assurance Topical Report (NO-AA-I1O) - Revision 90 Transmittal and Summary of Changes To: All Site Document Control Centers These changes are approved, _December 18, 2015, with site and corporate implementation on January 25. 2016.

The Quality Assurance Topical Report (QATR) has been revised to:

• Clarify the reporting relationship for the Management Position responsible for Licensing and Regulatory Affairs.

• Re-organized the corporate and site assessment functions from Nuclear Oversight to the Organizational Effectiveness and Integrated Performance Assessment group.

• "Clarify that the audit function is credited with meeting the appendix B requirements.

• Include Clinton Station ISFSl requirements.

These changes have been reviewed in accordance with 10QCFR50.54 (a) and did not reduce Exelon's commitments previously approved by the NRC. (Ref. AT 680087-56 and 57 for supporting 50.54(a) evaluations). This revision to the QATR will be submitted to the NRC for post implementation review as tracked by Action Tracking Number 95188-09.

The specific changes are described as follows:

Table of Contents o Updated to coincide with the current revision.

Chapter 1 (Organization) o Section 2.2.3 was revised to include a description for the management position responsible for Regulatory Affairs and General Counsel.

o Section 2.2.3.1 was revised to clarify the reporting relationship for the management position responsible for Licensing and Regulatory Affairs.

o Section 2.2.4.5 was revised to include a description for the management position responsible for Organizational Effectiveness and Integrated Performance Assessment and defines the responsibility for fleet assessments.

o Section 2.2.4.6 was revised to re-organize the corporate and site assessment functions from Nuclear Oversight to the Organizational Effectiveness and Integrated Performance Assessment group a Section 2.2.4.6.A was revised to re-organize the reporting relationship for Quality Verification and Employee Concerns from the site NOS organization to the corporate NOS organization.

Page 1 of 3

Standard Quality Assurance Topical Report (NO-AA- 10) - Revision 90 Transmittal and Summary of Changes o Section 2.3.6 was revised to define the site position responsible for assessment activities.

o Section 2.3.7 was revised to define the site position responsible for Performance Improvement.

o Section 2.4 was revised to clarify that PORO is part of the three-tiered approach for accomplishing oversight of safety.

Chapter 18 (AssessmentslAudits) o Entire chapter 18 was revised to clarify that Audits are credited with meeting our Appendix B and NQA-1 Requirements o Section 1 was revised to clarify audits are performed in accordance with NQA-I.

o Section 2.1.1 B was revised to clarify that audits of Emergency Preparedness and Security are not subject to an extension.

o Section 2.1.1 was revised to clarify scheduling for Fleet Assessments.

o Section 2.1 .5.B was revised to define the reporting and follow-up requirements for Fleet Assessments.

o Section 2.2 was revised to clarify that vendors are audited, not assessed.

o Section 2.3 was revised to clarify that the independent review of the status and adequacy of the QAP is an audit.

Appendix A (Augmented Quality) o Section 2.5 was revised to include Calvert Cliffs and Nine Mile Point 1 and 2 within the Augmented Quality requirements for Station Blackout.

o Section 2.8.2 was revised to add the ISFSI requirements for Clinton Station.

Appendix C (Codes, Standards, and Guides) o Grammatical corrections were made throughout the entire Appendix.

o Section 1.3.4.18 b was revised to define Ginna Stations commitment to NFPA 805.

Page 2 of 3

Standard Quality Assurance Topical Report (NO-AA- 1O) - Revision 90 Transmittal and Summary of Changes This summary is provided to familiarize the readers with the changes included in Revision 90 of the QATR. Personnel engaged in activities covered by the Quality Assurance Program (QAP) are required to review the revised chapters. Affected procedures should be changed and training provided as needed to ensure compliance with the updated requirements.

Prepared By:,**2-',/Z/'

P"Nuclear Oversight Quality Assurance Specialist Approved BY: ________________ o'_S-Rob Radulovich / Date Nuclear Oversight Audit and Programs Director Page 3 of 3

TABLE OF CONTENTS O CHAPTER 1,ORGANIZATION 1..... SCOPE......................................................................................I 2 ..... REQU IREM ENTS ........................................................................ I 2.1. Organization ........................................................................... I 2.2. Corporate Organization............................................................... 2 2.2.1. President and Chief Executive Officer............................................... 2 2.2.2. Sr. Executive Vice President, Chief Commercial Officer, Exelon Corporation, and President and Chief Executive Officer, Exelon Generation Company..... 2 2.2.3. Sr. Vice President Regulatory Affairs and General Counsel..................... 2 2.2.4. Sr. Executive Vice President and President and Chief Nuclear Officer, Exelon Nuclear......................................................................... 3 2.3. Site Organization...................................................................... 10 2.4. Three-Tiered Approach .............................................................. 14 2.5. Decommissioning ............................................................. 14 2.6 Responsibility ......................................................................... 14 2.7 Authority ...................................................................... 15 CHAPTER 2, QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM

. 1 ..... SCOPE..................................................................................... 1 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS..........................................................................I 2.1. General................................................................................. 1 2.2. Supplier's Quality Assurance Program .............................................. 1 2.3. Planning................................................................................ 2 2.4. Program Description .................................................................. 2 2.5. Indoctrination & Training.............................................................. 2 2.6. Program Review....................................................................... 3 2.7. Quality Assurance Manual ........................................................... 3 CHAPTER 3, DESIGN CONTROL

1. SCOPE..................................................................................... 1

2. REQUIREMENTS..........................................................................I 2.1 General ................................................................................ 1 2.2 Design Input ........................................................................... 1 2.3 Design Process........................................................................ 2

.2.5 O

2.4

~2.5.1 Design Analyses.......................................................................

Design Verification .................................................................... 3 Extent of Design Verification ......................................................... 3 2

2.5.2 Design Reviews........................................................................ 4 Page 1 of 8 Revision 90

TABLE OF CONTENTS 2.6 Change Control........................................................................ 4

• 2.7 Design Errors ......................................................................... 5 2.8 Interface Control....................................................................... 5 2.9 Vendor Design Control ............................................................... 5 2.10 Modifications........................................................................... 6 2.11 Documentation and Records ......................................................... 6 CHAPTER 4, PROCUREMENT DOCUMENT CONTROL 1..... SCOPE..................................................................................... 1 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 1 2.1. General................................................................................. 1 2.2. Content of Procurement Documents ................................................ 1 2.2.1. Scope of Work ......................................................................... 1 2.2.2. Technical Requirements...............................................................I 2.2.3. Quality Assurance Program Requirements..............1 2.2.4. Non-conformances.................................................................... 2 2.2.5. Documentation Requirements........................................................ 2 2.2.6. Spare and Replacement Parts....................................................... 2

. 2.3.

2.4.

Procurement Document Review ..................................................... 2 Procurement Records 3 CHAPTER 5, INSTRUCTIONS, PROCEDURES, AND DRAWINGS 1..... SCOPE..................................................................................... 1 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 1 2.1. General ................................................................................ 1 2.2. Preparation and Review...............................................................I 2.3. Procedures and Programs ........................................................... 2 2.3.1. Technical Review and Control........................................................ 2 2.3.2. On-site Qualified Technical Review (Dresden Unit 1) ......................... .... 4 CHAPTER 6, DOCUMENT CONTROL 1..... SCOPE..................................................................................... 1 2..... REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 1 2.1. General................................................................................. 1 2.2. Reviews ................................................................................ 1

. 2.3.

2.4.

2.5.

Controlled Documents ................................................................ 2 Control Measures ...................................................................... 2 Document Changes................................................................... 3 Page 2 of 8 Revision 90

TABLE OF CONTENTS O CHAPTER 7, CONTROL OF PURCHASED MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES 1.....SCOPE ..................................................................................... 1 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 1 2.1. Supplier Selection......................................................................I 2.1.1. General..................................................................................I 2.1.2. Methods................................................................................ 1 2.2. Bid Evaluations ....................... ................................................ 2 2.3. Supplier In-Process Control.......................................................... 2 2.3.1. General........................... ...................................................... 2 2.3.2. In-Process Control and Verification Planning ....................................... 2 2.3.3. Programmatic Verification ............ ............................................... 3 2.3.4. Supplier and Verification of Supplier Performance Records....................... 3 2.3.5. Control of Procurement Changes.................................................... 3 2.4. Acceptance of Purchased Items and Services* .................................... 4 2.4.1. General ................................................................................ 4 2.4.2. Acceptance by Receiving Inspection ................................................ 4 2.4.3. Acceptance by Source Verification ................................................... 4

• ... Accep*tance byCetfce of Cofrac..........................5...............

2.4.5. Acceptance by Post Installation Testing............................................. 5 2.4.6. Accep3tance of Services Only ......................................................... 5 2.4.7. Commercial Grade Items............................................................. 6 2.4.8. Acceptance of Calibration Services............................................ 6 2.5. Presence of Documentary Evidence ................................................ 7 2.6. Spare or Replacement Items......................................................... 7 2.6.1. Procurement from Other Utilities..................................................... 8 2.6.2. Maintenance or Modification ......................................................... 8 CHAPTER 8, IDENTIFICATION AND CONTROL OF MATERIALS, PARTS, AND COMPONENTS 1I.....SCOPE....................................... *..............................................I 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 1 2.1!. General................................................................................. 1 2.2. Traceability ............................................................................. I 2.3. Identification Methods. ................................................................ I

.2.5.

2.4. Transfer of Markings.................................................. ................

Limited Life Items ...................................................................... 2 2

2.6. Stored Items ........................................................................... 2 Page 3 of 8 Revision 90

TABLE OF CONTENTS

. CHAPTER 9, CONTROL OF SPECIAL PROCESSES 1..... SCOPE.....................................................................................I 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 1 2.1. General..................................................................................I 2.2. Process Control........................................................................ 1 2.3. Special Processes ..................................................................... I 2.4. Personnel Qualification ............................................................... 2 2.5. Special Process Records............................................................. 3 CHAPTER 10, INSPECTION 1..... SCOPE.....................................................................................I 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................... I 2.1. General..................................................................................I 2.2. Inspection Plans....................................................................... 1 2.3. Inspection Personnel and Qualification ............................................. 2 2.4. Inspection Process.................................................................... 2 2.5. In-Service Inspections ................................................................ 3

• 2.6. Independent Verification.............................................................. 3 CHAPTER 11, TEST CONTROL 1..... SCOPE ..................................................................................... I 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................... I 2.1. General..................................................................................I 2.1.1. Testing Program....................................................................... 1 2.1.2. Test Procedures........................................................................I 2.2. Instrumentation and Control .................................................. ........ 4 2.3. Electrical Tests ........................................................................ 5 2.4. Mechanical Tests ....................................................................... 5 2.5. Physical and Chemical Tests ........................................................ 5 2.6. Surveillance Tests..................................................................... 6 2.7. Maintenance or Major Procedure Change.......................................... 6 CHAPTER 12, CONTROL OF MEASURING AND TEST EQUIPMENT 1.....SCOPE ..................................................................................... I 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 1 O 2.1. General..........................1 2.2. Control .................................................................................. 1 2.3. Labeling ................................................................................ 2 Page 4 of 8 Revision 90

TABLE OF CONTENTS 2.4. Accuracy............................................................................... 2

• 2.5. Traceability and Interval .............................................................. 2 2.6. Certified M&TE ........................................................................ 2 2.7. Corrective Actions..................................................................... 3 2.8. Vendor Control ........................................................................ 3 2.9. Commercial Devices.................................................................. 3 2.10. Calibration Records ................................................................... 3 CHAPTER 13, HANDLING, STORAGE, AND SHIPPING 1..... SCOPE..................................................................................... 1 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................... I 2.1. General ................................................................................. I 2.2. Special Equipment and Environments............................................... 1 2.3. Classification of Items..................................................................I 2.4. Special Handling Tools and Equipment ............................................. 2 2.5. Marking and Labeling.................................................................. 2 2.6. Storage................................................................................. 2 CHAPTER 14, INSPECTION, TEST, AND OPERATING STATUS

. . CP.....................................................................................

2 ..... REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 1 2.1. General................................................................................. 1 2.1.1. Procedures............................................................................. 2 2.2. Operating Status ......................................... ............................. 2 2.2.1. Release for Maintenance............................................................. 2 2.2.2. Preparation for Work ...... ........................................................... 2 2.2.3. Temporary Modifications ............................................................. 3 2.2.4. Return to Service ...................................................................... 3 CHAPTER 15, NONCONFORMING MATERIALS, PARTS, OR COMPONENTS 1..... SCOPE.................................................................................. ... 1 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................... I 2.1. General..................................................................................I 2.1.1. Supplier Nonconforming Items ....................................................... 1

. 2.2.

2.3.

2.4.

Identification ........................................................................... 2 Segregation............................................................................ 2 Disposition ........................................................................... 2 2.4.1. Control.................................................................................. 2 Page 5 of 8 Revision 90

TABLE OF CONTENTS

. 2.4.2.

2.4.3.

2.4.4.

Evaluation.............................................................................. 2 Personnel .............................................................................. 3 Documentation ........................................................................ 3 2.4.5. Repaired, Reworked, or Scrapped Items ........................................... 3 CHAPTER 16, CORRECTIVE ACTION 1..... SCOPE......................................................................................I 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 1 2.1. General..................................................................................I 2.2. Conditions Adverse to Quality ........................................................ I 2.2.1. Significant Conditions Adverse to Quality ............................................ 1 2.3. Verification and Follow-up .... ....................................................... 2 2.4. Evaluation and Qualification.......................................................... 3 2.5. Documentation and Reporting........................................................ 3 CHAPTER 17, QUALITY ASSURANCE RECORDS 1..... SCOPE..................................................................................... 1

. 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 1 2.1.

2.2.

Program.............................................................................1...

Administration..........................................................................I 2.3. Receipt and Transmittal .............................................................. 2 2.4. Storage and Preservation............................................................. 2 2.5. Safekeeping and Classification ...................................................... 3 2.6. Retention and Disposition ............................................................ 3 2.7. Plant Operating Records.............................................................. 3 2.7.1. Records and!/ or Logs, 5-Year Retention ........................................... 3 2.7.2 Lifetime Records ...................................................................... 5 CHAPTER 18, ASSESSMENTS / Audits 1..... SCOPE......................................................................................I 2..... REQUIREMENTS ...... :................................................................... 1 2.1. Assessments - General ............................................................... 1 2.1.1. Scheduling................. ............................................................. I 2.1.2. Preparation............................................................................. 2

. 2.1.3.

2.1.4.

2.1.5.

Personnel .............................................................................. 2 Performance ........................................................................... 2 Reporting and Follow-up.............................................................. 3 2.1.6. Records ................................................................................ 4 Page 6 of 8 Revision 90

TABLE OF CONTENTS 2.2. Vendor Audits.......................................................................... 4 2.3. Independent Management Assessment ........................................ ,.... 4 APPENDIX A, AUGMENTED QUALITY 1..... SCOPE..................................................................................... 1 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 1 2.1. Health Physics and ALARA (As Low As Reasonably Achievable)................ 1 2.2. Transport of Radioactive W aste ......................................

2.3. Services ................ ............................................................... 2 2.4. Fire Protection ......................................................................... 2 2.5. Station Blackout (Reg. Guide 1.155) ........................................ ........ 2 2.6. Augmented Quality Requirements for Dresden 1, and Peach Bottom 1I......... 2 2.7. Repairs and Alterations............................................................... 3 2.7.1. State of Illinois ......................................................................... 3 2.8. Dry Cask Storage System............................................................ 4 2.8.1. Limerick, Peach Bottom, and Oyster Creek ........................................ 4 2.8.2. Braidwood, Byron, Dresden, LaSalle and Quad Cities Station(s)................. 4 2.9 Emergency Planning........................................................... 5 2.10 Security ...............  :.........................................................5 2.11 License Renewal............................................................... 5 APPENDIX B, AUDIT FREQUENCY 1..... TABLE...................................................................................... 1 APPENDIX C, CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES 1.1. Codes and Standards ................................................................. 1 1.2. Regulatory Guides ...................................................................... 2 1.3. Site Specific Clarifications and Exceptions.......................................... 3 1.3.1. Limerick (LGS) and Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station (PBAPS) .............. 3 1.3.2. Oyster Creek (OCNGS) and Three Mile Island (TMI) Stations.................... 5 1.3.3. Clinton Power Station (CPS)......................................................... 11 1.3.4. Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, and Nine Mile Point ...................................... 11 APPENDIX D, DEFINITIONS 1I.....SCOPE ...................................................................................... I 2 ..... GLOSSARY OF TERMS ................................................................. 1 Page 7 of 8 Revision 90

TABLE OF CONTENTS

. APPENDIX E, CONTROL OF RADIOACTIVE WASTE OR MATERIALS (SITE SPECIFIC)

1. SCOPE .......................................................................................... I

2. REQUIREMENTS............................................................................. 1 2.1. Generai................................................................................. 1 2.2. Three Mile Island/Oyster Creek.......................................................I 2.3. Clinton Power Station ................................................................. 3 2.3.1. Radioactive Waste/Augmented "D" Systems ....................................... 3 2.3.2. Packaging and Transportation of Radioactive Waste .............................. 3 APPENDIX F, GRADED APPROACH (SITE SPECIFIC) 1..... SCOPE..................................................................................... 1 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................... I 2.1. General................................................................................. 1 2.2. Quality Classification...................................................................I 2.2.1. Nuclear Safety Related or Augmented Quality Items .............................. 2 2.2.2. QATR Scope Activities................................................................ 2 O APPENDIX G, SUPPLEMENTAL APPLICATIONS(STSPCF) 1.....SCOPE ..................................................................................... 1 2 ..... REQUIREMENTS..........................................................................I 2.1. Clinton Power Station (CPS)..........................................................I 2.1.1. Environmental .................... .................................................... 1 2.1.2. Fire Protection ................................................................... 2 2.1.3. Security........................................................................ 3 2.2. Oyster Creek Nuclear Generating Station (OCNGS) ............................ 3 2.2.1. Audits........................................................................... 3 Page 8 of 8 Revision 90

EXELON NUCLEAR POLICY

1. POLICY STATEMENT The Quality Assurance Topical Report (QATR), NO-AA-1 0, is the highest tiered document that assigns major functional responsibilities plants owned or operated by Exelon Generation Company, LLC. Implementing documents assign more specific responsibilities and tasks and define the organizational interfaces involved in conducting activities and tasks within the scope of this Plan. These requirements apply to those organizations and positions, which manage and perform activities within its scope.

The Company organization is structured on the basis that the attainment of the objectives of this Plan relies on those who manage, perform, and support the performance of activities within the scope of this plan. Assurance of this attainment relies on those who have no direct responsibility for managing or performing the activity.

The Company will maintain and operate its nuclear plants in a manner that will ensure the health and safety of the public and our workers. All facilities shall be at a minimum compliance with the requirements on the Code of Federal Regulations, NRC Operating Licenses, and the applicable laws and regulations of the state and local governments.

2. APPLICABILITY All Company personnel who work directly, or indirectly, for the Company are responsible for the achievement of quality in their work. Accordingly, all Company personnel and its contractors engaged in supporting nuclear generation activities shall comply with the requirements of our Quality Assurance Program (QAP).

Revision 90 Page lofI Page 1 of I Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1

1. SCOPE This chapter identifies those portions of the Company organization as it applies to the Quality Assurance Program (QAP), and defines the responsibility and authority for establishing, executing, and verifying its implementation. The responsibility for the program is retained and executed by the Company exclusively.

Organizational responsibilities are described for assuring that activities affecting quality are prescribed and implemented by documented instructions, procedures, and drawings. The achievement of quality in the performance of quality related activities are the responsibility of each individual in support of nuclear operations.

The requirements and commitments contained in the QAP are mandatory and must be implemented, enforced, and adhered to by all individuals and organizations.

2. REQUIREMENTS Note: Minor variations may occur between the titles contained herein and those used in practice. Specific position descriptions may be contained in approved Company documents.

2.1. Organization The organizational structure of the Company consists of corporate functions, and the nuclear facilities. Organizational titles for the quality assurance functions described are identified in Company policies and procedures.

Lines of authority and responsibility are established from the highest management level through intermediate levels to the implementing personnel.

The responsibility, authority, and relationships of the various personnel and organizations are documented and maintained current.

The authority to accomplish the quality assurance functions described herein may be delegated to the incumbent's staff as necessary to fulfill the identified responsibilities.

Revision 90 Page 1 Page 1 ofl6 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1 2.2. Corporate Organization 2.2.1. President and Chief Executive Officer The President and Chief Executive Officer (CEO), Exelon Corporation, is responsible for overall corporate policy and provides executive direction and guidance for the corporation as well as promulgates corporate policy through the Company 's senior management staff. A management position responsible for New Business Development reports to this position through the Sr. Executive Vice President and Chief Strategy Officer, Exelon Corporation.

2.2.2. Sr. Executive Vice President, Chief Commercial Officer, Exelon Corporation, and President and Chief Executive Officer, Exelon Generation Company The Sr. Executive Vice President, Chief Commercial Officer of Exelon Corporation, President and Chief Executive Officer, Exelon Generation, is responsible for Exelon Generation policy and provides executive direction and guidance for Exelon Generation as well as promulgates corporate policy through Exelon Generation senior management staff. Overall responsibility for the implementation of the QAP is delegated to the Sr. Executive Vice President, Exelon Generation and President and Chief Nuclear Officer, Exelon Nuclear.

2.2.3. Sr. Vice President Regulatory Affairs and General Counsel The Senior Vice President and General Counsel serves as the primary legal and regulatory advisor to the company's senior management with respect to all legal and regulatory matters within his or her area of expertise, sets the company vision and overall legal strategy for his or her area of expertise, is responsible for all legal and regulatory services relating to one or more practice areas and provides leadership for and manages attorneys and other legal and regulatory professionals in those practice areas throughout the company. This position performs legal and regulatory services involving high-level or complex legal matters in his or her practice area. The following management position reports to this position.

1. A management position responsible for licensing and regulatory affairs provides organizational support and management oversight of the stations to ensure prompt and proper disposition of regulatory issues, develops regulatory positions and advises senior management on priorities and activities affecting regulatory issues at the nuclear sites. Other responsibilities include developing policies and standardized processes and procedures for the maintenance of the licensing basis, the preparation of submittals to the NRC and other regulatory organizations, the dissemination of regulatory experience information and the NSRB. Sr. Executive Vice President, Exelon Generation and President and Chief Nuclear Officer, Exelon Nuclear Revision 90 Page 2 Page of 16 2 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1 2.2.4 The Sr. Executive Vice President, Exelon Generation and President and Chief Nuclear Officer (ONO), Exelon Nuclear, reports to the Sr. Executive Vice President, Chief Commercial Officer, Exelon Corporation, and President and Chief Executive Officer, Exelon Generation Company and has overall responsibility for the safe and reliable operation of the Company's nuclear stations. This is the senior executive responsible for setting and implementing policies, objectives, expectations, and priorities to ensure activities are performed in accordance with QAP and other requirements. The following management positions and committees report to and / or receive direction from the CNO with respect to their assigned roles and responsibilities associated with the execution of the Exelon Nuclear Quality Assurance Program:

1. The Chief Nuclear Officer (CNO), CENG Senior Vice President Operations is responsible to provide management and oversight and support of the day-to-day operations of the CENG stations for the safe and efficient operation of the CENG nuclear fleet in compliance with the CENG QAP. In addition, the CNO, CENG is the CENG role for all industry, legal and regulatory requirements for plants owned under the CENG joint venture; and fulfill the acting CEO role reporting to the CENG Board.

2. The Chief Operating Officer (COO), Fleet Operations, Exelon Nuclear, is responsible to provide management oversight and support of the day-to-day operations of the stations for the safe and efficient operation of the nuclear fleet in compliance with the QAP. The COO is responsible for planning, organizing, and directing and controlling the operations, maintenance and improvement of the nuclear facilities. This position participates in the formulation of nuclear group strategy and policy, and provides leadership and direction to implement industry best practices. The following management positions report to the COO:

A management position responsible for Mid-Atlantic operations provides management oversight and support of the day-to-day operations of the Mid-Atlantic stations. This position implements policies, goals, and objectives, in accordance with the QAP and other requirements, to assure the safe and reliable operation of the Mid-Atlantic nuclear stations This position participates in the formulation of nuclear group strategy and policy, and provides leadership and direction to implement industry best practices.

• Management positions responsible for Midwest operations provide management oversight and support of the day-to-day operations of the Midwest stations. These positions implement policies, goals, and objectives, in accordance with the QAP and other requirements, to assure the safe and reliable operation of the Midwest nuclear stations These positions participate in the formulation of nuclear group strategy Page 3 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1 and policy, and provide leadership and direction to implement industry best practices.

• A management position responsible for Nuclear Project Management who is responsible for the oversight and support of Project management activities for Exelon Nuclear.

3. A management position for operations support who is accountable for defining standard programs and processes, delivering effective services and support, providing technical oversight of program implementation, and supporting the deployment and sharing of best practices throughout the nuclear organization in accordance with the QAP and other requirements, as applicable. Other responsibilities include providing overall direction and management oversight for environmental issues. Reporting to this position is a staff of management, administrative, and technical personnel.

Functional areas of responsibilities include:

- security, chemistry, industrial safety, maintenance and work control, outage planning and services, operations, radiation protection, radioactive waste, emergency planning, environmental.

-Laboratory services including calibration and maintenance of measuring and test equipment, calibration of radiation protection equipment and test & analysis services.

4. The management position responsible for engineering & technical services provides oversight and support and is accountable for defining standard programs, processes, policies, procedures, delivering effective services and support, providing technical oversight of program implementation, and supporting the deployment and sharing of best practices throughout the nuclear organization in accordance with the QAP, regulatory requirements, and the ASME Code. Reporting to this position is a staff of management, administrative, and technical personnel. Functional areas of responsibility include;

-Engineering that provides support to the nuclear stations, design authority under the ASME Code, configuration management programs, special processes, and generic programs for technical and regulatory issues. A support staff provides the necessary discipline and expert support for setting technical policy, developing design standards, performing engineering discipline reviews, and performing the document control and records management programs. This staff develops and supports common approaches for technical and regulatory engineering issues, as well as develops and coaches engineers. Corporate procurement engineering provides governance and oversight of the nuclear organization's procurement engineering process and technical operations. This includes parts evaluation, upgrading of stock material, equivalent item evaluation, and examination and testing Page 4 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1 in accordance with the applicable ASME Code and Federal Regulations.

- nuclear fuels management providing BWR/PWR nuclear fuel procurement and fabrication services, technical support to monitor fuel reliability and certain in-core components, design and licensing analyses for core reloads, safety analyses, wet and dry spent fuel storage governance, oversight and technical support, long-term spent fuel management strategies, and decommissioning activities including cost estimating, governance, oversight and technical support.. This position is responsible for reactivity management oversight and corporate support of reactor operations to ensure safe and reliable plant operations, as the manager of nuclear materials, and for controls and reports associated with special nuclear material accountability.

- a management position responsible for license renewal

- project management including power uprate and other projects

- risk management

5. The Management position responsible for Organizational Effectiveness and Integrated Performance Assessments (OR&IPA). This position is responsible for the independent assessment program, initiating, trending, and recommending solutions for deficiencies, initiating stop work, ordering a unit shutdown, or requesting any other actions deemed necessary to avoid unsafe plant conditions or a significant violation of the QAP, periodic assessments to determine that the Quality Assurance Policy is being carried out, and maintaining a suitably trained and qualified staff as appropriate.

This position is independent of station responsibilities and is responsible to prioritize and communicate common quality issues to appropriate senior management including the resolution of these issues. The following management positions report to the OR&IPA SVP:

Revision 90 PageS of 16 Page 5 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1

-A management position responsible for Organizational Performance, which includes functional results and organizational effectiveness performance. This position is responsible for the independent assessment program including regularly scheduled assessments and any assessment required based on analysis of an emergent performance issues. In addition, this position is also responsible for performance improvement which includes the administration of the fleet Operational Experience and Corrective Action Programs. This position maintains authority and responsibility to escalate issues and stop work or request any other actions to avoid unsafe plant conditions.

oReporting to the management position for Organizational Performance is a management position responsible for Fleet Assessments oAlso reporting to the management position for Organizational Performance is a management position for Performance Improvement.

- A management position responsible for Innovation.

- A management position responsible for Training.

-Maintaining a dotted line reporting relationship to the management position responsible for OR&IPA is a management position responsible for Talent Management & Organization Development (TMOD).

6. The management position responsible for Nuclear Oversight (NOS) activities is independent of production and assures that an appropriate QAP is established, maintained, and effectively executed throughout the nuclear organization. This position provides overall direction for the implementation of the QAP and for the effective implementation of quality assurance functions that verify activities affecting safety-related functions. A staff of supervisory, administrative, and technical personnel supports assessment and quality verification. Functional responsibilities include:

- employee concern program activities.

- establishing quality assurance practices and policies.

- quality verification activities.

Revision 90 Page of 16 6 of Page 6 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1

-initiating stop work, ordering unit shutdown, or request any other actions deemed necessary to avoid unsafe plant conditions or a significant violation of the QAP.

-initiating, trending, and recommending solutions for deficiencies identified by NOS.

-maintaining a trained and qualified staff of personnel within the NOS organization.

-maintenance and approval of revisions to the Quality Assurance Topical Report (QATR) and the program for employee concerns.

-overseeing nuclear site NOS activities.

-participation in joint membership groups.

-periodic audits to determine that the Quality Assurance Policy is being carried out.

-periodic review of the independent assessment program.

-periodically apprising the President and ONO and the Nuclear Safety Review Board of the status of the quality assurance aspects at Company facilities and immediately apprise them of significant problems affecting quality.

-settling disputes between NOS and other organizations.

-the certifying authority for NOS audit personnel.

-the Independent audit oversight program.

-verifying implementation of solutions for significant conditions adverse to quality identified by NOS.

A. Reporting to the management position responsible for NOS is a management position responsible for auditing and programs.

Functional areas of responsibility include:

- maintaining the regulatory required compliance auditing program.

- maintaining the Quality Verification (QV) program

- managing supplier assessments, audits, or surveys (including their sub-tier suppliers) as required. Verifies that supplier quality assurance programs comply with Company requirements and has the authority and responsibility for QA Page 7 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1 activities applicable to supplier evaluation including, stop work as deemed necessary when a violation of the QAP is identified.

- establishing, maintaining, and interpreting Company quality assurance policies and procedures

- providing training on quality assurance subjects.

- establishing the requirements for auditor and inspector certification.

- controlling and maintaining the QATR.

- provides an offsite point of contact for station Quality Verification personnel if assistance is necessary for quality verification activities.

- provide management with periodic reports on the adequacy of the QAP.

- managing implementation of the program for employee concerns.

Personnel performing Quality Verification functions including: planning, inspecting, and reporting, shall be trained and qualified for their assigned functions.

With the exception of receipt inspection activities, inspection personnel shall:

-report to the Management Position responsible for QV when performing Quality Verification functions, even though they may functionally report to another organization for their other assigned activities

- have their qualifications approved by the Management Position responsible for QV prior to performing inspection activities.

- not perform independent inspections on any work that they have performed or directly supervised.

- be subject to audit by NOS.

The receipt inspection activities are controlled by the Nuclear Supply organization.

This structure assures adequate independence between performance and verification of activities is maintained.

Revision 90 Page of 16 8 of Page 8 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1

7. The Nuclear Safety Review Board (NSRB) is an offsite committee that reports to and advises the Sr. Executive Vice President, Exelon Generation and President and Chief Nuclear Officer of the results of their independent oversight of plant operations related to safe operation of the station and the Company's nuclear program relative to nuclear safety. The NSRB is responsible for the independent safety review function and functions in accordance with written procedures and instructions which delineates committee composition, responsibility, authority, member qualifications, meeting frequency, subjects to be reviewed, reporting requirements, and administrative controls under which the board operates. The NSRB:

- conducts independent reviews of station performance and operations to determine if the facility is being operated and maintained in a manner that promotes safety and provides feedback to the organization on suggested improvements.

- focuses primarily in the areas of Operations, Maintenance, Engineering, Plant Support, Regulatory and Nuclear Oversight, or other matters relating to safety.

- reviews station materials and activities and advises the CNO and management responsible for NOS on the following activities:

-, any issue potentially affecting the safe operation of the facility.

- station nuclear safety performance determined by discussion and interviews with station and Exelon Nuclear individuals, plant tours, oversight of meetings, and review of documents distributed for NSRB review.

- effectiveness of the station program for oversight including audits, assessments, and self-assessments.

- corrective actions for degraded or non-conforming conditions involving violations of the NRC license requirements, plant transients or forced shutdowns, or the submission of a Licensee Event Report (LER).

- oversight of activities of the on-site safety review function.

8. The management role of Integration, Business Development

9. The management role of Strategy and planning

10. The management position of strategy with Exelon Nuclear Partners (ENP)

Functional areas that also maintain a dotted line report to CNO supporting the Exelon Nuclear organization are:

• Legal

• Human Resources

• Communication

• Information Technology Page 9 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER1 Information technology is no longer a functional area exclusively within the nuclear organizational structure but now supports the entire Exelon Corporation. The management position responsible for operations support will supply oversight and governance for the functional area of information systems as it applies to Exelon Nuclear.

The oversight and governance of this functional area is performed to ensure that organizational and functional responsibilities and the reporting relationship to the management position responsible for all nuclear activities, the CNO, is maintained within the requirements stated within the QATR. This includes all regulatory requirements committed to by the QATR. Specifically, the management position responsible for operations support supplies oversight and governance for management and supervision of information systems related services and activities including the software quality assurance program (DTSQA). This includes the creation, acquisition, the enhancement of computer hardware, communication, and software systems to support operational requirements.

-The management position responsible for business operations provides integrated support to senior management and the nuclear sites for all business functions. This position dotted line reports to the CNO. Reporting to this position is a staff of supervisory, administrative, and technical personnel. Functional areas of responsibility includes:

- business planning and process improvement.

- communications.

- decommissioning financial reporting and trust fund reimbursements.

Supply is no longer a functional area exclusively within the nuclear organizational structure but now supports the entire Exelon Corporation and has a dotted line to the CNO. This management position will supply oversight and governance for the functional area of supply as it applies to Exelon Nuclear in the procurement and warehousing areas. The oversight and governance of this functional area is performed to ensure that organizational and functional responsibilities and the reporting relationship to the management position responsible for all nuclear activities, the CNO, is maintained within the requirements stated within the QATR. This includes all regulatory requirements committed to by the QATR. The management position responsible for business operations supplies oversight and governance for:

- the Exelon Nuclear supply function including the establishment of priorities and providing operational control of the purchase of non-fuel goods and services required for nuclear operations. This organization is also responsible for the areas of material procurement, services procurement, supply programs, inventory management, and investment recovery. Supply establishes policies, common Page 10 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER1 administrative controls and processes to ensure compliance with applicable requirements and effective use of resources.

2.3. Site Organization A management position for each nuclear site reports through the applicable management position responsible for each designated operating group including the MidAtlantic and the Midwest and is responsible for overall plant nuclear safety and the implementation of the Company's QAP. This position is also responsible for the station compliance with its NRC operating license, governmental regulations, and ASME Code requirements: Day to-day direction and management oversight of activities associated with the safe and reliable operation of a nuclear station is provided. The following site management positions report to the respective Senior Vice President MW Operations or Senior Vice President MA Operations through the Site Plant Manager or Site Vice President.

The Site Vice President has overall responsibility and accountability for the safe and efficient operation of a nuclear power plant. The following positions report to the Site Vice President 2.3.1. The Plant Manager has the day-to-day responsibility for managing the safe and efficient operation of a nuclear power plant. This management position assures the safe, reliable, and efficient operation of the plant within the constraints of applicable regulatory requirements, operating license, and the QAP.

Supervisory direction is provided for the Technical Review Program, including approval of individuals as technical reviewers, and the Plant Operations Review Committee (PORC). During periods that exceed three months, when unavailable, responsibility is designated in writing to an established alternate who satisfies the experience requirements of this position. The following positions report to the plant manager:

- Operations and Support Including:

• a management position responsible for safe, reliable, and efficient plant operations within the constraints of the operating license and regulatory requirements. This position is also responsible for the development and implementation of appropriate controls in accordance with the QAP and other requirements.

• management position(s) responsible for operations shift crews and administration, direction and supervision of operating staff. This position is also responsible for routine plant operations activities and evolutions that are performed within the constraints of the operating license, the QAP, and other requirements. Typically this position is the senior individual on site who holds a Senior Reactor Operator license.

Page 11 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1

• management position(s) responsible for the day-to-day operation of O the nuclear unit(s) ) including reactor engineering and overall command and control of shift activities including operations of the radioactive waste system.

• management position(s) responsible for supervision for control of work and of the plant and field supervision that coordinates and/or assists in the control of shift operations. This position directs control room personnel, field operations, has the primary responsibility for authorizing removal and restoration of systems to support maintenance activities and holds a Senior Reactor Operator License.

• a management position responsible for advisory technical support to shift management in the areas of thermal hydraulics, reactor engineering and plant analysis with regards to the safe operations of the facility. In addition, this position shall meet the qualifications as specified by the NRC.

- The management position(s) for maintenance are responsible for the performance of corrective, predictive and preventive maintenance, cleanliness controls and modification installation of mechanical and electrical equipment and instrumentation in accordance with the QAP and other requirements. A staff of supervisory, technical, administrative, and

• contract personnel supports day-to-day maintenance of equipment within their functional area.

- The management position(s) responsible for control of work coordinate, administer, execute, and monitor daily and outage work schedules. This position is also responsible for material management and site supply, which coordinates parts requirements, specifies and evaluates parts, procures all materials for the site, ships and receives material, and controls the onsite inventory. The site supply chain provides and coordinates scope and priority for station procurement engineering efforts.

- The management position(s) responsible for chemistry activities, laboratory and system processes, related procedures and programs.

• environmental services.

• radioactive waste.

• radiological environmental monitoring

- The management position health physics/radiological protection.

- The management position responsible for performa~nce improvement.

- The management position responsible for safety.

2.3.2. The management position for engineering and design has the responsibility and O authority for day-to-day engineering support activities, develops and maintains engineering programs, policies, procedures, and provides engineering services in accordance with the QAP. A staff of supervisory, technical, and administrative Page 12 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1 personnel supports maintenance activities. Functional areas of responsibility include:

- design engineering.

- engineering administration.

- modifications and their implementation.

- plant configuration control.

- system engineering.

- system testing.

technical support.

- dotted line accountability for document control and quality assurance records management.

2.3.3. The management position responsible for regulatory assurance maintains an interface and liaison between the station and federal and state regulators..

Functional responsibilities include:

- emergency preparedness 2.3.4. The management position responsible for training provides direction, control, and overall supervision of personnel as required by regulations and training for all site personnel as required. Functional areas of responsibility include:

- learning services.

- maintenance technical training.

- operations training.

2.3.5. The Plant Operations Review Committee (PORC) is a multi-disciplined committee responsible for review of activities that affect nuclear safety, reports to, and advises the management position responsible for plant operation on matters related to nuclear safety. The PORC shall ensure that plant activities are conducted safely and do not require NRC review and approval prior to implementation or changes to the Technical Specifications. The PORO functions in accordance with written instructions which delineate committee composition, responsibility, authority, member qualifications, meeting frequency, subjects to be reviewed, reporting requirements, and administrative controls under which the group operates.

In discharging its independent review responsibilities, PORC shall keep safety considerations paramount when opposed to cost or schedule considerations.

Should a voting member have direct responsibility for preparation or technical review of the item requiring PORC independent review, where conflict of such considerations is likely, that member shall be replaced (to fill the quorum) by another voting member not having such potential conflict.

2.3.6. A position responsible for site assessment activities reports to the management position responsible for Fleet Assessments. This position has the organizational freedom and authority to identify problems, has a reporting relationship with the Page 13 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER 1 senior management position responsible for overall plant nuclear safety, and ensures compliance with QAP and nuclear safety requirements.

Significant safety or quality issues requiring escalated action will be directed through the management position responsible for Organizational Effectiveness and Integrated Performance Assessments (OR&IPA)to the President and CNO.

This individual, supported by the fleet organization, is functionally responsible for:

- authority and responsibility to escalate matters.

- conducting independent assessments of line and support activities and safety reviews.

- initiate, trend and recommend solutions for deficiencies identified by OR&I PA.

- monitoring day-to-day station activities.

- provide OR&IPA management periodic reports on the status and adequacy of the QAP.

- promptly communicate significant issues to OR&IPA and appropriate site management.

- stop work or request any other actions to avoid unsafe plant conditions.

2.3.7. The Management Position responsible for Performance Improvement.

Functional responsibilities include:

- Corrective Action Program

- Self-Assessments/Benchmarking

- Operating Experience 2.3.8. The management position responsible for security.

2.3.9. The management position(s) responsible for project management.

2.3.10. The following management positions maintain a dotted line reporting relationship to the Site Vice President.

- The management position(s) responsible for Business Operations.

- The management position(s) responsible for Human Resources.

- The management position(s) responsible for Communications.

2.4 The Company uses a three-tiered approach to accomplish the oversight of safety which are:

- A collection of program elements for implementing and/or reviewing areas of quality of plant operations and nuclear safety. These elements include system performance monitoring, review of operating experience information, operability evaluations, and reviews of changes to technical specifications and final safety analysis reports that affect design bases.

Specific guidance is contained in applicable procedures and programs.

Page 14 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER1

- A NOS staff who assesses and performs quality verification inspection aspects of Company activities within the scope of the QATR relating to safety. This provides for an overview of activities affecting or potentially affecting safety.

- A PORC which is an on-site committee that reports to and advises the Plant Manager on all matters related to nuclear safety in plant operations.

A NSRB which is an off-site committee that reports to and advises the Sr.

Executive Vice President, Exelon Generation and Chief Nuclear Officer, Exelon Nuclear, of the results of independent oversight of plant operation relative to nuclear safety.

2.5 Decommissioning Site Organization Similar to the operating units, the management position responsible for plant operations is also responsible for the management oversight, directing, and implementing appropriate controls to maintain the site within the requirements and constraints applicable to a permanently shutdown station or unit (or those stations or units not under the control of an NRC approved decommissioning plan), and to ensure the safe storage of spent nuclear fuel.

2.6. Responsibility Each holder of position as identified in this Chapter, has the responsibility for the scope and effective implementation of the QAP and may delegate all or part of the activities of planning, establishing, and implementing the QAP to others, but retains the responsibility for the program's effectiveness.

The Company is responsible for ensuring that the applicable portion(s) of the QATR is properly documented, approved, and implemented before an activity within the scope of the QAP is undertaken by the Company or by others.

Personnel performing oversight functions for the Company have the responsibility, authority, organizational freedom, and sufficient independence from cost and schedule to:

- assure that further processing, delivery, installation, or use is controlled until proper disposition of a nonconformance, deficiency, or unsatisfactory condition has occurred.

- identify quality problems.

- initiate, recommend, or provide solutions to quality problems through designated channels.

- initiate stop work, order unit shutdown, or request any other actions deemed necessary to avoid unsafe plant conditions or a significant violation of the QAP Page 15 of 16 Revision 90

ORGANIZATION CHAPTER1

- verify implementation of solutions for significant conditions adverse to quality.

The Company may delegate certain phases of the work to non-company labor and contracted services, which act as the Company's agents in assigned areas.

They shall work to a Company accepted quality program (or in accordance with the Company's program) under overall site direction and document their organization and any delegated responsibilities necessary to establish, execute, and verify their quality program. The Company may also assign the authority for certification and stamping in accordance with the ASME Code.

2.7. Authority When the Company delegates responsibility for planning, establishing, or implementing any part of the overall QAP, sufficient authority to accomplish the assigned responsibilities is delegated. Regardless of delegation, the Company retains responsibility.

Revision 90 Page 16 Page 16 of 16 of 16 Revision 90

QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM CHAPTER2

1. SCOPE The purpose of this chapter is to define how the Company's QAP applies to those activities such as design, procurement, fabrication, installation, modification, maintenance, repair, refueling, operation, inspection, and tests related to systems, structures, and components. The QAP also applies to certain non-safety related structures, systems, components and activities to a degree consistent with their importance to safety. Policies, directives, procedures, guidelines, manuals, or instructions shall be reviewed, approved, distributed, and revised in accordance with administrative procedures.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General The QAP comprises all those planned and systematic actions necessary to provide adequate confidence that structures, systems, and components will perform satisfactorily in service. Quality assurance includes quality verification, which comprises the examination of those physical characteristics of material, structure, component, or system which provide a means to control the quality of the material, structure, component, or system to predetermined requirements.

All persons and organizations involved in activities in support of the nuclear sites and governed by this program are responsible for implementing the requirements of this manual.

The QAP is based upon 10OCFR50, Appendix B, "Quality Assurance Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants and Fuel Reprocessing Plants." The requirements of 10CFR50.54, "Conditions of License," 10CFR50.55a, "Codes and Standards,"

10OCFR50.59, "Changes, Test, and Experiments," 10OCFR50 Appendix A, "General Design Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants," 10OCFR50 Appendix R, "Fire Protection Programs for Nuclear Power Plants," are included in the basis for the QAP.

The requirements of 10CFR21, Reporting of Defects and Non-Compliance,"

10OCFR71, Subpart H, "Quality Assurance for Packaging and Transportation of Radioactive Material," and 10CFR72, Subpart G, "Quality Assurance for Licensing Requirements for the Independent Storage of Spent Nuclear Fuel and High-Level Radioactive Waste," are also included. The Company is committed to carrying out the provisions of various NRC regulatory guides and industry standards which further define Quality Assurance Program requirements (see attached Appendix C).

2.2. Supplier's Quality Assurance Program The Company's procurement documents require that each vendor, supplier, or contractor maintain a quality assurance program that satisfies the applicable portions of:

Page 1 of 3 Revision 90

QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM CHAPTER 2

- ASME NQA-1 and the ANSI N45.2 Standards not covered by NQA-1 or the ANSI N45.2 series of standards for previously accepted non-ASME quality assurance programs.

- ANSI N18.7 Standards

- ASME Section III, Appendix XXII for suppliers of ASME Code Design services.

2.3. Planning Planning establishes the systematic, sequential progression of actions to meet the defined requirements. The Company documents these plans in appropriate communications, approvals, instructions, and procedures. Activities described in the QAP are accomplished under controlled conditions that include appropriate equipment, qualified personnel, suitable environment, and use of appropriate procedures.

2.4. Program Description The Company's total program for providing administrative controls and quality assurance is incorporated in many diverse documents. The Company's nuclear document hierarchy describes the implementation of the QAP. Approved implementing procedures and instructions are written to the extent necessary to implement the quality requirements of 10CFR50 Appendix B. Line, staff, administrative, and quality oversight organizations issue and control these implementing procedures. All activities affecting quality are described in sufficient detail to assure quality.

2.5. Indoctrination & Training Formal indoctrination and training programs for personnel performing or verifying activities within the scope of this Plan are established and maintained. A training organizational element is established and staffed with qualified instructors and is responsible for planning, scheduling, developing and providing training to Company personnel. The indoctrination and training programs are established by on-site and by off-site organizational units responsible for the performance or verification of activities within the scope of the QAP.

Indoctrination, training, and qualification programs are established such that:

- personnel responsible for performing quality-affected activities are instructed as to the purpose, scope, and implementation of the quality-related manuals, instructions, and procedures.

- personnel verifying activities affecting quality are trained and qualified in the principles, techniques, and requirements of the activity being performed.

- formal training and qualification programs documentation includes the objective, content of the program, attendees, and date of attendance.

Page 2 of 3 Revision 90 I

QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM CHAPTER2

- proficiency tests are given to those personnel performing and verifying activities affecting quality, and the acceptance criteria are developed to determine if individuals are properly trained and qualified.

- certificate of qualification clearly delineates the specific functions personnel are qualified to perform and the criteria used to qualify personnel in each function.

- proficiency of personnel performing and verifying activities affecting quality is maintained by re-training, re-examining, re-qualifying, and/or re-certifying as determined by management or program commitment.

2.6. Program Review The effectiveness of the QAP and its implementation is periodically reviewed by various organizations at various levels. The results of these reviews are documented in reports to senior management for evaluation and corrective action is initiated as required. The effectiveness of the QAP is evaluated and reported by NOS through the monitoring, assessment, and inspection functions.

Other organizational elements provide additional information!/evaluations as requested.

2.7. Quality Assurance Manual This Quality Assurance Manual (QAM) contains the Company's QAP. The QAM is made available to NRC, Company personnel, the Authorized Nuclear Inspector, and other regulatory authorities. The Company submits revisions to the QAP document (as a topical report) to the NRC for acceptance.

Revision 90 Page of 3 Page 33 of 3 Revision 90 J

DESIGN CONTROL CHAPTER 3

1. SCOPE The purpose of this chapter is to establish the requirements and control measures for assuring design bases and regulatory requirements are correctly translated into design documents. The scope of design control covers all phases of engineering design, including: identification of design inputs (criteria and bases); identification and control of design interfaces; production of design documents, calculations and analyses; procurement related engineering and design verification.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General The Company has overall responsibility for design and design control activities including, preparing, reviewing, approving, and verifying design documents related to the plant's structures, systems, and components within the scope of the QAP. Additionally, the Company is responsible for reactor core design analysis, core design specifications and design reviews, for nuclear fuel and in-core components.

Qualified personnel perform detailed design activities or review and control design work involving electrical, mechanical, structural, and instrumentation and control designs. Design activities are conducted to written procedures that include consideration of quality standards, quality assurance requirements, suitability of material parts, equipment, and processes, control of design interfaces, analytical or testing requirements, design basis, and configuration management.

2.2. Design Input The Company has the responsibility to properly translate applicable safety analysis reports, regulatory requirements, ASME Code requirements, and design bases into specifications, drawings, procedures and instructions. The Company is responsible for electrical, mechanical, structural, instrumentation and control; nuclear engineering activities involved in nuclear station modifications, and also maintains a configuration management program.

Design inputs, such as design bases, performance requirements, regulatory requirements, codes, and standards shall be identified and documented. Their selection shall be reviewed and approved by the responsible design organization. The design input shall be specified and approved in a timely manner and be to the level of detail necessary to provide a consistent basis for making design decisions, accomplishing design verification, and evaluating design changes. Changes from approved design inputs, including the reason for the changes shall be identified, approved, documented, and controlled.

Page 1 of 6 Revision 90

DESIGN CONTROL CHAPTER 3 2.3. Design Process The Company is responsible for design changes, performs detailed design activities, and issues design documents in accordance with approved procedures. The responsible design organization shall prescribe and document design activities in a timely manner and to the level of detail necessary to permit verification that the design meets requirements.

Included in this scope of activities are considerations for field design engineering, fire hazards, human factors, physics, seismic, stress, compatibility of materials, application of special process, associated computer programs, thermal, hydraulic, ALARA and radiation factors, the safety analysis accident scenarios, and accessibility for in-service inspection, maintenance and repairs, and quality standards. Design documents shall be adequate to support facility design, construction, and operation. Selection of the appropriate quality standards shall be documented, reviewed and approved.

Reasons for changes from specified quality standards, shall be identified, documented, approved and controlled. Design methods, materials, parts, equipment, and processes that are essential to the function of the structure, system, or component shall be selected and reviewed for suitability of application. Applicable industry experience, as set forth in reports or other documentation, shall be made available to cognizant design personnel.

The final design output documents and approved changes thereto shall be relatable to the design input by documentation in sufficient detail to permit design verification. The final design shall identify assemblies and/or components that are part of the item being designed. If materials, parts, equipment, or processes are different from the published supplier information, these differences shall be documented.

Commercially standard (catalog items) materials, parts, or equipment, which have been previously approved for different applications, are reviewed for suitability in the design process.

2.4. Design Analyses Design analyses shall be performed in a planned, controlled, and documented manner. Design analysis documents shall be legible and suitable for reproduction, filing, and retrieval. They shall be sufficiently detailed as to purpose, method, assumptions, design input, references, and units such that a person technically qualified in the subject can review, understand the analysis, and verify the adequacy of the results without recourse to the originator.

Calculations shall be identified for retrievability by subject including structure, system, component, originator, reviewer, and date or by other unique identifiers.

Revision 90 Page 2 Page of 6 2 of 6 Revision 90

DESIGN CONTROL CHAPTER 3 Computer programs shall be controlled to assure that changes are documented and approved. Verification shall be required for changes to previously verified computer programs including evaluation of the effects of these changes as specified below.

Computer programs may be utilized for design analysis without individual verification of the program for each application provided:

- the computer program has been verified to show that it produces correct solutions for the encoded mathematical model within defined limits for each parameter employed.

- the encoded mathematical model has been shown to produce a valid solution to the physical problem associated with the particular application.

2.5. Design Verification Design control measures shall be applied to verify the adequacy of design, such as by one or more of the following:

- performance of design reviews.

- use of alternate calculations.

- performance of qualification tests.

The results of design verification shall be documented *including the identification of the verifier. Design verification shall be performed by competent individual(s) other than those who performed the original design but may be from the same organization. This verification may be performed by the originator's supervisor, provided the supervisor did not specify a singular design approach, rule out certain design considerations, did not establish the design inputs used in the design, or the supervisor is the only individual in the organization competent to perform the verification. Cursory supervisory reviews do not satisfy the intent of design verification.

Verification shall be performed in a timely manner. Design verification, for the stage of design activity accomplished, shall be performed prior to release for procurement, manufacture, construction, or release to another organization for use in other design activities provided sufficient data exists. Any unverified portion of the design shall be identified and controlled. In all cases the design verification shall be completed prior to relying upon the component, system, structure, or computer program to perform its function.

2.5.1. Extent of Design Verification The extent of the design verification required is a function of the importance to safety, the complexity of the design, the degree of standardization, the state of the art, and the similarity with previously proven designs.

Revision 90 Page 3 Page of 66 3 of Revision 90

DESIGN CONTROL CHAPTER 3 Where the design has been subjected to a verification process, the process need not be duplicated for identical designs. For each application the applicability of standardized or previously proven designs for design inputs shall be verified.

Known problems affecting the standard or previously proven designs and their effects on other features shall be considered. The original design and associated verification shall be adequately documented and referenced in subsequent applications.

Design verification shall be required for changes to previously verified designs.

This includes evaluation of the effects of those changes on the overali design and on any affected design analyses.

2.5.2. Design Reviews Verification consists of a check of design adequacy by such methods as design reviews, use of alternate calculations or methods, or performance of verification or qualification testing. The method, or combination of methods, used to verify a design will be selected on a case-by-case basis Acceptable verification methods include one or more of the following items:

- alternate calculations using alternate methods that verify the correctness of original calculations or analyses.

- critical design reviews providing assurance that the final design is correct and satisfactory.

- where design adequacy is to be verified by qualification tests, the tests are iden'tified.

2.6. Change Control Changes to final designs, field changes, modifications to operating facilities, and nonconforming items dispositioned use-as-is or repair shall be justified and subject to design control measures commensurate with those applied to the original design.

These measures shall include assurance that the design analyses for the structure, system, or components are still valid. A 10OCFR50.59/72.48 review is performed for changes to the facility.

Changes shall be approved by the same affected groups or organizations, which reviewed and approved the original design documents. In the case where the original organization is no longer responsible for design approval, then a new responsible design organization shall be designated. The designated organization shall have demonstrated competence in the specific design area of interest and have an adequate understanding of the requirements and intent of the original design.

Page 4 of 6 Revision 90

DESIGN CONTROL CHAPTER 3 When a design change is approved, other than by revision to the affected design documents, measures shall be established to incorporate, where appropriate the change into these documents. Plant personnel will be made aware of design changes/modifications, which may affect the performance of their duties. Where a significant design change is necessary because of an incorrect design, the design process and verification procedure shall be reviewed and modified as necessary.

2.7. Design Errors The Company detects deficiencies or errors in design or in the design quality assurance program by:

- actual failure during operation.

- assessments.

- design verification measures.

- other means.

- personnel using the design documents.

- tests conducted.

2.8. interface Control Design interfaces shall be identified and controlled. The Company shall coordinate design efforts among the participating organizations. Interface controls shall include the assignment of responsibility and the establishment of procedures among participating design organizations. Controls shall be established for the review, approval, release, distribution and revision of documents involving design interfaces. Design information transmitted across interfaces shall be documented and controlled.

2.9. Vendor Design Control The Company reviews and accepts the specifications and drawings for electrical, mechanical, instrumentation, nuclear and structural material, equipment, and erection work, prepared by the Architect Engineer and NSSS Supplier. The purpose of these reviews is to verify inclusion of inspection, testing and acceptance criteria.

The Architect Engineer's evaluation of fabricator and erector's detailed designs, drawings, and work instructions are reviewed for reasonableness and completeness. Audits are conducted by the company for design review systems of architect engineers, nuclear fuel, and NSSS suppliers.

Revision 90 Page of 6 Page 55 of 6 Revision 90

DESIGN CONTROL CHAPTER 3 The Company assures that:

- personnel certifying ASME Section III design activities are qualified Registered Professional Engineers in accordance with ASME Section III, Appendix XXIII.

- architect engineers and NSSS suppliers maintain procedures to assure that their personnel certifying ASME Section III design activities are qualified Registered Professional Engineers in accordance with ASME Section III, Appendix XXIII.

The Company provides qualified personnel to review and approve the resolution of non-conformances relating to electrical, mechanical, instrumentation and structural portions of the plant and to evaluate discrepant modification test results for operating plants.

2.10. Modifications The Company performs modifications that may affect the function of safety-related structures, systems, or components in a manner to assure quality at least equivalent to that specified in original design bases and requirements, materials specifications, and inspection requirements.

2.11. Documentation and Records The Company notifies jurisdictional authorities of the location of ASME Code related permanent records. Design documentation and records which provide evidence that the design and design verification process were performed in accordance with the requirements of this chapter, shall be stored and maintained.

Documentation of design analyses shall include the following:

- statement of the objective of the analyses.

- list of design inputs and their sources.

- results of literature searches or other applicable background data.

- list of assumptions and indication of those that must be verified as the design proceeds.

- list of any computer calculation and the bases for its use.

- review and approval.

Revision 90 Page of 66 Page 66 of Revision 90

PROCUREMENT DOCUMENT CONTROLCHPE4 CHAPTER4

1. SCOPE This Chapter identifies the requirements for preparation, review, approval, release, and retention of procurement documents.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General The Company establishes measures for the preparation, review, and approval of procurement documents for those items and activities within the scope of the QATR. Procurement documents at all tiers include or reference the appropriate regulatory, technical, and quality requirements necessary to assure adequate quality. These requirements include reference to 10CFR21 when applicable.

2.2. Content of Procurement Documents Procurement documents at all tiers include the following items as deemed necessary by the Company.

2.2.1. Scope of Work Procurement documents describe the scope of the items or services to be furnished by a supplier. For those items that are important to plant safety, applicable requirements should be specified in the procurement document.

2.2.2. Technical Requirements The Company establishes measures in controlled procedures to; specify technical requirements by reference to the appropriate specific drawings, specifications, codes, standards, regulations, procedures, or instructions, including revisions thereto that describe the items or services to be furnished.

The procurement documents identify test, inspection and acceptance requirements as appropriate. These documents identify as appropriate special instructions and requirements for such activities as design, material and component identification, fabrication, special process controls, cleaning, erecting, packaging, handling, shipping, and extended storage.

2.2.3. Quality Assurance Program Requirements Measures are established, in controlled procedures, to ensure the appropriate technical and quality requirements are established, by qualified personnel, for the material, equipment, and services purchased from vendors, suppliers, or contractors.

Revision 90 Page 1 Page of 3 I of 3 Revision 90

PROCUREMENT DOCUMENT CONTROL CHAPTER 4 Any changes to these requirements require prior approval by the Company.

Each vendor, supplier, or contractor has an acceptable quality assurance program, which is consistent with applicable regulatory requirements for the item or service.

The Nuclear Oversight Vendor Audit Group (NOVA) maintains a controlled list of evaluated suppliers that are audited on a triennial basis. The evaluated list of such vendors, suppliers, and contractors is described in controlling procedures for the appropriate safety classification except for procurement from other licensees that has a NRC approved quality program.

Procurement documents require the vendors to incorporate quality assurance program requirements in sub-tier procurement documents and allow right of access to the vendors, sub-tier vendors, and contractors facilities and records for inspection or audit by the Company or designated representative.

2.2.4. Non-conformances

,The Company procurement documents specify the requirements for reporting and approving the disposition of supplier non-conformances. "Use as is" or "Repair" requires approval of the supplier disposition by the appropriate Company representative.

2.2.5. Documentation Requirements The procurement documents shall identify, at all tiers, the documentation required to be submitted for information, review, and approval including the time requirements for submittal. The Company procurement documents require the supplier to maintain specific quality assurance documents including retention times and disposition requirements.

2.2.6. Spare and Replacement Parts The procurement documents require the identification of appropriate spare and replacement parts or assemblies and the appropriate delineation of the technical and quality assurance related data required for ordering these parts or assemblies. These spare parts and replacement items are at least equivalent to the original design requirements or those specified by a properly reviewed and approved revision.

2.3. Procurement Document Review Measures are established in controlled procedures to ensure the appropriate technical and quality requirements are established for the material, equipment, and services purchased from vendors, suppliers, or contractors prior to release for bid and contract award.

Revision 90 Page 2 Page of 33 2 of Revision 90

PROCUREMENT DOCUMENT CONTROLCHPE4 CHAPTER4 These documented reviews, including changes to the specification or purchase order, ensure the technical and quality requirements are correctly stated, inspectable, and controllable and have adequate acceptance and rejection criteria and are prepared, reviewed, and approved in accordance with QAP requirements.

Review of the exceptions or changes requested by the supplier shall be analyzed to ensure they do not change or impact the technical or quality requirements and are incorporated in to the procurement documents, prior to the supplier proceeding, using the same review and approval process as appropriate except for commercial terms and editorial changes.

Personnel who have access to pertinent information and who have an adequate understanding of the requirements and intent of the procurement documents shall perform reviews required by this chapter.

2.4. Procurement Records Records as required by the procurement documents or the QATR are retained in the Company's department files, vendor files, or both locations.

Revision 90 Page of 3 3 of Page 3 3 Revision 90

INSTRUCTIONS, PROCEDURES, AND CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS

1. SCOPE Activities governed by the Company's QAP shall be performed as directed by documented instructions, procedures, and drawings appropriate for the activity.

The requirements for the use of these procedures shall also be prescribed in writing. These instructions, procedures, and drawings shall include responsibilities and acceptance criteria as applicable or appropriate for the activity.

Those participating in any activity shall be aware of and use the proper and current revision of instructions, procedures, drawings, and engineering requirements for performing the activity. Procedures may include reference to vendor equipment manuals, design drawings and specifications, prerequisites, special precautions, and the delineation of work to be performed. Equipment Manuals and manufacturers instructions shall be readily available for use.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General Operation, maintenance, or modification of equipment shall be preplanned and performed in accordance with written procedures that are appropriate to the circumstances and that conform to applicable codes, standards, specifications, and criteria. Documents identify and specify the content of records to be generated in conducting the activity. The establishment and execution of quality procedures shall be used by the station staff or those under their direction, for operating, maintenance, modifications, in-service inspection, refueling, and stores activities.

Temporary procedures may be issued to provide guidance in unusual situations that are not within the scope of the normal procedures. Temporary procedures shall be subject to review and approval, and shall include designation of the time period during which they may be used. In the event of an emergency not covered by an approved procedure, authorized personnel shall provide appropriate direction to minimize personnel injury and damage to the facility and to protect the health and safety of plant personnel and the general public.

2.2. Preparation and Review Procedures shall be prepared, reviewed, approved, and used as prescribed in writing, and shall contain step by step instructions in the degree of detail necessary for qualified individuals to perform the required function or task.

Where appropriate, these procedures will include checklists containing the necessary attributes to be observed or measured.

Page 1 of 4 Revision 90

INSTRUCTIONS, PROCEDURES, AND CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS These documents shall include or reference appropriate quantitative or qualitative acceptance criteria for determining that prescribed activities have been satisfactorily accomplished.

The procedures will be independently reviewed and evaluated by other involved company organizations with interface responsibilities and the comments forwarded to the issuing department.

2.3. Procedures and Programs Review and approval of site procedures are performed in accordance with technical specification requirements as delineated in the Technical Review or Station Qualified Review (SQR) programs.

2.3.1. Technical Review and Control

1. Procedures required by a station's Technical Specifications and other procedures which affect nuclear safety, as determined by the manager responsible for station operation, and changes thereto, other than editorial or typographical changes, shall be reviewed as follows prior to implementation, except as noted in item 5 (below).

- Each procedure or procedure change shall be independently reviewed by a qualified individual knowledgeable in the area affected other than the individual who prepared the procedure or procedure change. This review shall include a determination of whether or not additional cross-disciplinary reviews are necessary.

If deemed necessary, the reviews shall be performed by the qualified review personnel of the appropriate discipline(s).

- Changes to the approved fire protection program may be made without prior Plant Operations Review Committee (PORC) approval provided that the changes would not adversely affect the ability to achieve and maintain safe shutdown in the event of a fire, and specific features of the approved program may be altered provided such changes do not otherwise involve a change to the Operating License or technical specifications, or require an exemption.

- Reviews of procedures or changes to procedures, that describe the means for controlling or operating structure, systems, and/or components as described in the UFSAR, will include a review to determine if NRC review and approval is necessary prior to the implementation of the procedure activity. This review is based on the review of a written 10CFR50.59/72.48 review and evaluation prepared by qualified individual(s), or documentation that a 10CFR50.59/72.48 evaluation is not required. The PORC shall review and recommend approval of items requiring NRC review and approval prior to station approval for implementation. NRC Page 2 of 4 Revision 90

INSTRUCTIONS, PROCEDURES, AND CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS approval shall also be obtained prior to station approval for implementation.

- Department head approval authority shall be as specified in station procedures.

- Written records of reviews performed in accordance with this specification shall be prepared and maintained.

- Editorial and typographical changes shall be made in accordance with station procedures.

2. Technical reviewers shall advise their supervisors and/or PORO on all matters related to nuclear safety that are identified during reviews. The reviewer shall be other than the originator. The reviewer shall determine if additional cross-disciplinary reviews are required to ensure all applicable technical disciplines are included. This review shall ensure technical accuracy, compliance with regulatory requirements, and shall verify the originator's determination of whether items reviewed constitutes a change to the Technical Specifications, Operating License, or if NRC review and approval is required prior to implementation.

3. Technical reviewers shall be qualified to perform technical reviews based on the individual's training, experience, and knowledge level. Technical reviewers, assigned the responsibility for reviewing 10OCFR50.59/72.48 reviews and evaluations, shall receive training in this process. Technical reviewers shall be qualified to perform this function and meet the experience requirements per applicable standards. Personnel shall have expertise in one or more of the following disciplines as appropriate, for the subject or subjects being reviewed:

- chemistry

- instrumentation and controls

- mechanical and electrical systems

- nuclear power plant technology

- radiological controls

- reactor engineering

- reactor operations

4. Technical reviews shall be documented and records maintained.

5. Temporary Changes Temporary changes to procedures required by 2.3.1.1 (above) may be made provided:

- the intent of the original procedure is not altered.

- the change is approved by two members of the plant management Staff knowledgeable in the areas affected by the procedures, at least Page 3 of 4 Revision 90

INSTRUCTIONS, PROCEDURES, AND CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS one of whom holds a Senior Reactor Operator's License on the unit affected.

-the change is documented, reviewed, and approved in accordance with 2.3.1 (above) within 14 days of implementation.

2.3.2. On-site Qualified Technical Review (Dresden Unit 1)

A Qualified Technical Reviewer shall conduct thorough reviews of the documents specified below. Persons performing these reviews shall be knowledgeable in the subject area being reviewed. Qualified technical reviews must be completed prior to implementation of proposed activities.

1. Qualified Technical Reviewers shall be individuals without direct responsibility for the document under review; these reviewers may be from the same functionally cognizant organization as the individual or group performing the original work.

2. Qualified Technical Reviewers shall have at least 5 years of professional experience and either a Bachelor's degree in Engineering or the Physical Sciences or shall have equivalent qualifications evaluated on a case by case basis and approved by the manager responsible for decommissioning activities. The appointment of Qualified Technical Reviewers shall be documented.

3. A Qualified Technical Reviewer shall independently review the following subjects:

- Proposed changes to the license, technical specifications, or bases.

- Proposed changes to the programs required by the Technical Specifications to verify that such changes do not involve a change to the Technical Specifications and will not require NRC review and approval as defined in 100FR50.59/72.48.

- 10OCFR50.59 evaluations for changes in the facility as described in the De-fueled Safety Analysis Report (DSAR), changes in procedures as described in the DSAR, and tests or experiments not described in the DSAR to verify that such actions do not involve a change to the Technical Specifications or will not require NRC review and approval as defined in 10OCFR50.59.

Revision 90 Page of 4 Page 44 of 4 Revision 90

DOCUMENT CONTROL CHAPTER 6

1. SCOPE Measures shall be established to control and coordinate the classification, review, approval, issuance, revision, and change of documents that prescribe methods or provide the technical and/or quality requirements for activities and items within the scope of this program. These measures shall ensure that such documents are reviewed for adequacy, approved for release and use, and distributed to the location where the activity is performed

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General The Company document control process ensures that procedures are reviewed and approved before initial use. The Company has in place programmatic controls, which ensure that procedures are technically and administratively correct before use. These programmatic controls ensure that procedures are reviewed and revised as needed, when pertinent source material is changed, when the plant design is changed, or when deficiencies are identified and corrected. Provisions shall be established to ensure that infrequently used procedures are reviewed prior to use, unless they have been reviewed within the previous two years. The periodic biennial review requirements are satisfied by implementation of several processes and programs. Except as noted in appendix C, due to their importance to safety, biennial review of abnormal procedures (such as emergency operating procedures) shall continue. These processes and programs provide the programmatic controls that ensure the required reviews are accomplished and include the following:

- Commitment Management and Tracking Process.

- Integrated Reporting/Corrective Action Program.

- Operational Experience Feedback Program.

- Plant Modification Program.

- Procedure Feedback Process.

- Technical Specification and Updated Final Safety Analysis Report Revision Programs.

- Vendor Information Program.

2.2. Reviews The company has also established provisions to ensure that the following reviews are conducted:

- inspection, identification of inspection personnel, and documentation of inspection results.

- maintenance, modification, and inspection procedures are reviewed by qualified personnel, knowledgeable in quality assurance disciplines.

Page 1 of 3 Revision 90

DOCUMENT CONTROL CHAPTER 6

- necessary inspection requirements, methods, and acceptance criteria have been identified.

2.3. Controlled Documents Written document control procedures shall be established to provide for the control of approved documents. Documents that are controlled include, but are not limited to, the following items:

- administrative procedures

- as-built and design drawings.

- assessments

- calibration procedures.

- computer codes and software.

- corrective action reports.

- design specifications.

- emergency operating procedures.

- engineering calculations.

- inspection and test reports.

- maintenance procedures

- nonconformance reports.

- NOS procedures.

- operating procedures.

- purchase orders and related documents.

- safety analysis reports.

- supplier audit and surveillance procedures.

- technical specifications (station and Independent Spent Fuel Storage Installation)

- temporary and emergency procedure changes.

- topical reports.

- work instructions and procedures.

2.4. Control Measures The Company document control process includes the following document control measures:

- coordinating and controlling interface documents.

- distributing documents approved for issuance in accordance with updated and current distribution lists.

- establishing document control procedures to assure that proper documents are accessible and are being used.

- establishing lists of documents controlled by organizations involved with activities affecting quality.

Page 2 of 3 Revision 90

DOCUMENT CONTROL CHAPTER 6

- establishing procedural requirements for the protection of safeguards information

- identifying and assuring that proper documents are used in performing activities affecting quality.

- identifying qualified individuals or organizations responsible for preparing, reviewing, approving and issuing documents, including revisions.

- recalling or identifying obsolete documents.

2.5. Document Changes The Company document control process ensures changes, to documents are reviewed and approved by the same organizations that performed the original review and approval, unless delegated to another responsible organization. The reviewing organization has access to pertinent background data or information upon which to base their approval. To avoid a possible omission of a required review, the Company document control process includes provisions to control minor changes.

Revision 90 Page of 3 3 of Page 3 3 Revision 90

CONTROL OF PURCHASED MATERIAL, CHAPTER 7 EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES

1. SCOPE The Company establishes measures to assure the quality of purchased material, equipment and services conform to procurement document requirements for items contained within the QATR.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. Supplier Selection 2.1.1. General The Company establishes measures to assure that purchased material, equipment, and services conform to the procurement documents for safety related and ASME code specifications as appropriate. This assurance is accomplished by controlling both the selection of procurement sources and acceptance of the product at the source and/or upon receipt at the appropriate location.

The company procedures, which address the procurement process and receipt and storage of material and equipment, clearly define the responsibilities and interfaces between the line requisitioning organization, engineering, supply and quality assurance.

2.1.2. Methods The Company establishes and implements measures for the evaluation and selection of procurement sources. These measures must be completed prior to the award of contract. These measures include one or more of the following:

- evaluation of the supplier's history of providing an identical or similar product that performs satisfactorily in actual use.

- supplier's current quality records supported by documented qualitative and quantitative information that can be objectively evaluated.

- supplier's technical and quality capability of meeting the applicable quality requirements of 100FR50 Appendix B as determined by a direct evaluation of its facilities and personnel and the implementation of its quality assurance program.

- review and evaluation of audits, surveys, and inspections conducted by other utilities, or American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).

- if there is insufficient evidence of implementation of a QA program, the initial evaluation is of the existence of a QA program addressing the scope of the services to be provided. The initial audit is performed after the supplier has completed sufficient work to demonstrate that its organization is implementing a QA program.

Page 1 of 8 Revision 90

CONTROL OF PURCHASED MATERIAL, CHAPTER 7 EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES The Company documents and files the results of these measures and maintains an evaluated list of suppliers.

2.2. Bid Evaluations The Company reviews and evaluates bids and awards contracts using written procedures and documents the results. The Company designates individuals or organizations to review bids to assure that they conform to the procurement document requirements and the supplier has the appropriate technical ability, Quality Program, production capability, personnel, and acceptable past performance to supply the product or service. The Company obtains commitments to resolve unacceptable quality conditions identified as part of the bid evaluation before award of the contract and ensure exceptions and alternatives do not impact the technical or quality requirements.

2.3. Supplier In-Process Control 2.3.1. General The Company establishes measures to interface with and to verify supplier performance. These measures include the following items:

- establishing an understanding between the Company and the supplier of the provisions and specifications contained in the procurement documents.

- establishing a method of document information exchange between the Company and the supplier.

- establishing the extent of source surveillance and inspection activities.

- identifying and processing necessary change information.

- requiring the supplier to identify planning techniques, tests, inspections, and processes to be used in fulfilling procurement document requirements.

- reviewing supplier documents that are generated or processed during activities fulfilling procurement requirements.

2.3.2. In-Process Control and Verification Planning The Company and the supplier, establish as appropriate, notification points, including hold and witness points and incorporate into the appropriate documents based upon the complexity and scope of the item or service. When required by the procurement document or specification, surveillances and evaluations at the supplier's facility are conducted to verify continued compliance with the quality assurance requirements of the procurement documents.

Qualified individuals or its agents accomplish source inspections at the supplier's facility to verify that the procurement item or service is being supplied in accordance with the requirements of the procurement documents.

Page 2 of 8 Revision 90

CONTROL OF PURCHASED MATERIAL, CHAPTER 7 EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES Such inspections, examinations or tests are accomplished in accordance with written procedures, plans, and/or checklists containing or referencing appropriate acceptance criteria. Upon acceptance by source verification, the Company furnishes documented evidence of acceptance to the receiving destination of the item, to the purchaser, and to the supplier.

2.3.3. Programmatic Verification The Company or its agents verify the effectiveness of the supplier's quality program by survey, audit or surveillance. Verification is performed at intervals consistent with the importance to safety, complexity and quality of the product or services furnished. Activities are witnessed or observed and the results documented when source verification is performed.

The Company conducts audits per the requirements established in Chapter 18 or reviews audits performed by other license holders as defined in procedures.

The results of these audits are used to support the maintenance of the list of evaluated suppliers. Verification activities are conducted as early as practicable so that subsequent activities do not prevent disclosure of deficiencies. The Company's verification activities do not relieve the supplier of its responsibility for quality verification.

2.3.4. Supplier and Verification of Supplier Performance Records The Company establishes methods to control, handle and approve supplier documents. Suppliers submit their documents per procurement requirements.

Acceptance criteria is used for the acquisition, processing, and record evaluation of technical inspection and test data.

The Company records activities to verify supplier conformance with the requirements of procurement documents. Source surveillances, procurement plans, inspections, audits, surveys, receiving inspections, non-conformance dispositions, waivers and corrective actions concerning supplier activities are documented. This documentation is used to determine the supplier's quality assurance program effectiveness.

2.3.5. Control of Procurement Changes The Company documents changes to procurement documents involving technical or quality assurance matters. These changes are subjected to the same review and approval process as the original procurement document except for commercial terms and conditions and editorial changes.

Revision 90 Page 3 Page of 8 3 of 8 Revision 90

CONTROL OF PURCHASED MATERIAL, CHAPTER 7 EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES 2.4. Acceptance of Purchased Items and Services 2.4.1. General Upon receipt the applicable materials, parts, and components are controlled.

Qualified inspection personnel are responsible for inspecting, releasing, and maintaining the inspection status of purchased material and equipment. After receipt inspection, the purchased material is placed in a controlled storage area or issued for installation or further work.

2.4.2. Acceptance by Receiving Inspection The Company uses approved procedures to accept purchased items and services. Acceptance of an item or service from a supplier includes certificate of conformance, source verification, receiving inspection or post installation testing at the plant location or a combination thereof. Items are inspected during receipt using approved procedures and checklists.

The Company does receiving inspections using procedures and inspection instructions to verify conformance to the specified requirements, using objective evidence to check such features as: complete documentation and visual inspection of: proper configuration; identification; dimensional, physical and other characteristics; freedom from shipping damage; and cleanliness. Items, which can not meet the purchase order requirements, will be segregated and controlled as defined in the applicable procedures.

The Company coordinates the review of supplier documentation with the receiving inspection when procurement documents require such documentation to be furnished prior to the receiving inspection. Source verification and audit activities are factored into the receipt inspection activities as appropriate.

2.4.3. Acceptance by Source Verification The Company considers acceptance by source verification when the item or service is:

- vital to plant safety; or

- difficult to verify quality characteristics after delivery; or

- complex in design, manufacture, and test.

Source verification shall be implemented in accordance with plans to perform inspections, examinations, or tests at pre-determined points. Upon acceptance by source verification, the Company furnishes documented evidence of acceptance to the receiving destination of the item, to the purchaser, and to the supplier.

Revision 90 Page of 88 Page 44 of Revision 90

CONTROL OF PURCHASED MATERIAL, CHAPTER 7 EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES 2.4.4. Acceptance by Certificate of Conformance The supplier's certificate of conformance attests the product or service provided is in accordance with the procurement documents is reviewed during source and/or receipt inspections to verify compliance. This document provides the purchase order number; codes, standards or other specifications required to be met in the purchase order. Requirements which cannot be met must be included with an explanation why and a means to resolve the non-conformances. A person who is responsible for quality assurance function attests to this certificate The validity of a supplier's certificate of conformance is ascertained through any of the following methods source inspection, independent inspection agency, receipt inspections, surveillance, testing of hardware, quality assurance audits or surveillances at intervals commensurate with the suppliers past performance.

Inspection and test activities verify that the hardware performs in accordance with applicable technical requirements and serve to demonstrate that the hardware meets the requirements stated in a certificate of conformance.

The results of the source and/or receipt inspections, the acceptability of supplier furnished documentation, and the resulting determination of conformance or nonconformance is documented.

2.4.5. Acceptance by Post Installation Testing When post-installation testing is used, the Company establishes post-installation test requirements, giving due consideration to supplier recommendations.

Acceptance by this method is satisfactory when performed following the accomplishment of at least one preceding method and when:

- it is difficult to verify the quality characteristics of the item without it being installed and in use; or

- the item requires an integrated system checkout or test with other items to verify its quality characteristics; or

- the item cannot prove its ability to perform its intended function except when in use.

2.4.6. Acceptance of Services Only In cases involving procurement of services only, the Company accepts the service by any of the following methods:

- technical verification of data produced.

- surveillance, audit, survey, or assessment of the activity.

- review of objective evidence for conformance to the procurement document requirements such as certifications, stress reports, etc.

Page 5 of 8 Revision 90

CONTROL OF PURCHASED MATERIAL, CHAPTER 7 EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES In lieu of the above the Company performs a receiving inspection for items arriving back onsite that were sent offsite for repair, testing, or rework.

2.4.7. Commercial Grade Items Where the safety related design utilizes commercial grade items, the following requirements are a permissible alternative for acceptance, to other requirements of this Chapter:

1. An approved design document identifies the commercial grade item. (An alternate commercial grade item may be applied, provided the cognizant design organization provided verification that the alternate commercial grade item will perform the intended function and will meet design requirements applicable to both the replaced item and its application.)

2. The Company performs source evaluation and selection, where determined necessary, based on complexity and importance to safety.

- commercial grade dedication plans for use in a safety related applications state responsibility for 10CFR21 requirements.

- the Company identifies commercial grade items in the purchase order by the supplier's published product description.

3. One or a combination of the following methods shall be utilized to provide reasonable assurance that the item meets the acceptance criteria for the characteristics identified to be verified for acceptance:

- acceptable supplier/item performance records.

- commercial grade survey of the supplier.

- source verification.

- special test(s) or inspection(s) or both.

4. After receipt of a commercial grade item, the Company determines the following:

- damage was not sustained during shipment.

- documentation, as applicable to the item, was received and is acceptable.

- inspection and/or testing are accomplished, as required by the purchaser, to assure conformance with the manufacturer's published requirements.

- the item received was the item ordered.

2.4.8 Acceptance of Calibration Services For suppliers of commercial-grade calibration services with accreditation by a nationally recognized accrediting body, a documented review of the supplier's accreditation by the purchaser may be used in lieu of inspections or tests following Page 6 of 8 Revision 90

CONTROL OF PURCHASED MATERIAL, CHAPTER 7 EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES delivery or in-process surveillances during performance of the service. This review shall include, at a minimum, all of the following:

1. The accreditation is to ANSI/ISO/lEC 17025.

2. The calibration laboratory holds a domestic accreditation by one of the following accrediting bodies, which are recognized by the International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation (ILAC) Mutual Recognition Arrangement (MRA):

- National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), administered by NIST

- American Association for Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA)

- ACLASS Accreditation Services (ACLASS)

- International Accreditation Service (lAS)

- Laboratory Accreditation Bureau (L-A-B)

3. The published scope of accreditation for the calibration laboratory covers the needed measurement parameters, ranges, and uncertainties.

4. The purchase documents impose additional technical and administrative requirements, as necessary, to satisfy the Exelon QATR program and technical requirements. The technical requirements will also include the following requirements:

- The calibration certificate/report shall include identification of the laboratory equipment/standards used.

- The calibration certificate/report shall include as-found and as-left data.

5. The purchase documents require reporting as-found calibration data when calibrated items are found to be out-of-tolerance.

2.5. Presence of Documentary Evidence Documented evidence that material or equipment conforms to procurement requirements is present at the site before use or installation. This documentary evidence is traceable to the item and shall be retained at the nuclear power plant site and shall be sufficient to identify the specific requirements such as codes, standards, or specifications met by the purchased material and equipment.

2.6. Spare or Replacement Items Procedures control the procurement, storage and issuance of materials and components including spare and replacement parts. Procurement documents Page 7 of 8 Revision 90

CONTROL OF PURCHASED MATERIAL, CHAPTER 7 EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES for these items identify the appropriate technical and quality related requirements. The Company purchases spare parts and replacement items, equipment and components to at least the original design requirements or those specified by a properly reviewed and approved revision.

Where the QA requirements of the original item cannot be determined, qualified individuals conduct an engineering evaluation to establish appropriate requirements and controls. This evaluation insures that interfaces, interchangeability, safety, fit and function are not adversely affected or are contrary to applicable regulatory or ASME Code requirements. The evaluators document their results.

Where the company procured the original item with no specifically identified quality assurance program requirements or from an Original Equipment Manufacturer/Supplier (QEM/QES) who no longer is on a list of evaluated suppliers, identical (like-for-like) items may be similarly procured from the OEM/QES through the use of procurement plans.

In such cases, the Company conducts a joint technical engineering and quality assurance documented evaluation to established requirements and controls to assure at least equivalent product performance. The evaluation shall assure that interfaces, interchangeability, safety, fit and function are not adversely affected or are not contrary to applicable regulatory or ASME Code requirements.

2.6.1. Procurement from Other Utilities Purchases of safety related items can be made from other utilities who have had an NRC approved QA Program in effect at the time of their procurement and receipt and such utility has maintained a quality system program for storage, handling, and maintenance with documented traceability to the manufacturer of the items.

Certificates-of-Conformance to the above requirements and associated required documentation are provided.

2.6.2. Maintenance or Modification The Company performs maintenance or modifications that may affect the function of safety related structures, systems, or components in a manner to assure quality at least equivalent to that specified in original design bases and requirements, materials specifications, and inspection requirements.

Revision 90 Page 8 of 8 8 of 8 Revision 90

IDENTIFICATION AND CONTROL OF CHAPTER 8 MATERIALS, PARTS, AND COMPONENTS

1. SCOPE Controls are established to assure that only correct and accepted items are used or installed. Identification shall be maintained on the items or in documents traceable to the items, or in a manner, which assures that identification is established and maintained.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General The Company establishes measures for the identification and control of materials, parts and components, including partially fabricated assemblies, and assures that only correct and accepted items are used or installed* Identification is maintained on the items or in documents traceable to the items. Physical identification shall be used to the maximum extent possible.

Provisions are in place to maintain markings, which could be damaged during shipping or handling or deterioration due to environmental exposure. Provisions are also established to control nonconforming items and maintain parts, material, and equipment in storage traceable to quality assurance documents.

2.2. Traceability Items within the scope of the QAP shall be identified, so that they can be traced to the appropriate documentation, which provides objective evidence that the technical and quality requirements are met.

Responsible organizations document and maintain identification and traceability of items from initial receipt, throughout fabrication, installation, and use of the items such as: subassemblies, components, equipment numbers, part numbers, serial number, heat treatment number, batch or lot numbers.

When installed material or equipment is removed for maintenance, repair, or modification, control measures are implemented to ensure proper identification and traceability is maintained. Before use or installation of an item, the installer verifies that identification has been maintained.

2.3. Identification Methods Identification is on the item where practicable. Identification is clear, unambiguous and indelible. Identification does not affect the fit, function, quality, and service life of the item. If the item cannot be practicably marked, the Company uses records traceable to the item for identification.

Page 1 of 2 Revision 90

IDENTIFICATION AND CONTROL OF CHAPTER 8 MATERIALS, PARTS, AND COMPONENTS If physical identification is either impractical or insufficient for proper control, the Company controls an item by physical separation, procedural control or other appropriate means.

2.4. Transfer of Markings Prior to cutting or dividing material, each new piece shall be marked with the same traceability markings of the original piece to ensure that the traceability of the material is maintained. These markings shall not be obliterated or hidden by surface treatment or coatings unless other means of identification are substituted. The Company independently verifies proper identification of each piece.

2.5 Limited Life Items The Company identifies and controls items having limited life to preclude use of items whose shelf life or operating life has expired.

2.6 Stored Items The Company uses procedures to assure proper control of identification for items in storage.

Revision 90 Page of 22 Page 22 of Revision 90

CONTROL OF SPECIAL PROCESSES CHAPTER 9

1. SCOPE Processes affecting quality of items or services shall be controlled. Special processes that control or verify quality, shall be performed by qualified personnel, using qualified procedures, in accordance with specified requirements and are properly documented and evaluated. These requirements are defined in codes, standards, specifications, or special instructions. The quality of such processes is assured through reliance on operator skill and in-process control. Examples of special processes include, but are not limited to welding, heat treating, chemical cleaning, and non-destructive examination (NDE).

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General The Company organization directing work during repair, replacement, modification, or in-service inspection (ISI) activities is responsible for controlling special processes. Special process controls are assured through independent assessment and inspection activities.

2.2. Process Control Instructions, procedures, drawings, checklists, or other appropriate means control processes. Process controls specify the prerequisite steps, processing details, conditions to be maintained during the process, equipment requirements, inspection and test requirements, acceptance criteria, and record requirements. Controlling includes:

- maintenance and retention of records.

- personnel qualification.

- procedure development and qualification.

- procedure implementation.

- qualification of equipment.

2.3. Special Processes Measures shall be established and documented to assure that special processes are accomplished under controlled conditions in accordance with applicable codes, standards, applications criteria, regulatory requirements and Commitments, and other special requirements including the use of qualified personnel and procedures. Special processes are controlled by instructions, procedures, drawings, checklists, travelers, or other appropriate means.

Revision 90 Page 1 Page of 3 1 of 3 Revision 90

CONTROL OF SPECIAL PROCESSES CHAPTER 9 Special process controls specify the preparatory steps, processing details, conditions to be maintained during the process, equipment requirements, inspection and test requirements, acceptance criteria, and record requirements.

Special process procedures are written and qualified in accordance with applicable requirements. Special process procedures are reviewed and approved as follows:

- Coating and ASME Code concrete placement procedures are reviewed and approved by the appropriate Company organizations.

- Company, contractor and subcontractor heat treating, welding, and brazing procedures are reviewed in accordance with the company welding program as approved by Engineering.

- Company NDE procedures are reviewed and approved by the appropriate Company Level Ill.

- Contractor, subcontractor,Section III, XI, and other ISI-related NDE procedures that will be utilized on site are reviewed and approved by a Company NDE Level Ill.

- The responsible Company engineering organization reviews contractor and subcontractor non-welding special process procedures.

When permitted by applicable requirements, the Company may direct contractors or subcontractors to use Company special process procedures.

When there is a specific reason to question whether special process procedure requirements are being met, the Company, or the Authorized Inspection Agency (AlA) may require re-evaluation of the procedure before work may proceed.

For special processes not covered by the existing codes or standards, or when the quality requirements of an item exceed the requirements of established codes or standards, the necessary qualifications of personnel, procedures and equipment shall be defined in the procedure.

2.4. Personnel Qualification Company and contractor personnel performing special processes are trained, tested, qualified, or certified in accordance with a company procedure that meets applicable requirements.

For NDE personnel, the Company and contractor personnel performing NDE are trained, tested, qualified, or certified in accordance with a company procedure that meets applicable requirements of 10CFR50.55a and ASME Section Xl with specific exceptions and clarifications. When permitted by applicable requirements, the Company may qualify and control contractor personnel certifications.

Revision 90 Page Page 2 of 3 2 of 3 Revision 90

CONTROL OF SPECIAL PROCESSES CHAPTER 9 The Company assures compliance with the ASME Code through an agreement with an AlA who verifies compliance in accordance with their procedure that describes the ANI duties and responsibilities. When there is a specific reason to question the ability of an individual performing special processes, the Company, or the AlA may require re-evaluation before that individual will be permitted to resume work. Individuals failing any retest will be removed from applicable operations pending re-qualification.

The Company designates a principal(s) NDE Level Ill and they are responsible for personnel qualification and procedure development to ASME Code requirements for nondestructive examination. These NDE personnel are qualified and certified in accordance with the Company procedure and may designate other NDE Level Ill's for certification of personnel. NDE Level Ill's have authority for the interpretation of any NDE indication that has been recorded by a company or supplemental vendor Level IlIll1 Examiner.

Training and certification of NDE personnel associated with nondestructive examination are carried out in accordance with the requirements of 10OCFR50.55a and ASME Section XI with specific exceptions and clarifications are met. The company develops and maintains a procedure detailing the program that will be used for qualification and certification and has ultimate responsibility for determination of the qualification process. Qualified personnel administer all ASME Code examination activities.

2.5. Special Process Records Special process records provide evidence that special processes were performed in accordance with approved procedures by qualified personnel.

These records are retained by the Company or by the contractor or subcontractor as required by procurement documents. Records are maintained for currently qualified personnel, processes, and equipment for each special process.

Revision 90 Page of 3 3 of Page 3 3 Revision 90

INSPECTION CHAPTER 10

1. SCOPE The Company plans and executes an inspection program to verify that activities affecting the quality of safety-related structures, systems, and components conform to documented requirements. For modification and non-routine maintenance activities, inspections are conducted in a manner similar (i.e.

frequency, type and personnel performing such inspections) to those associated with construction phase activities. The independent inspections described in this Chapter are not intended to dilute or replace the clear responsibility of the first line supervisors for the quality of work performed under their supervision or personnel performing the activity.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General The Company establishes controls for coordination and execution of inspection plans. Company quality verification organizations or other qualified organizations are responsible for implementation of established inspection plans. If an inspection plan includes inspections by personnel other than those in a quality verification organization, the inspection requirements, personnel qualification criteria, and inspector independence will be accepted by the responsible quality organization prior to implementation.

2.2. Inspection Plans The Company prepares documented inspection plans. These inspection plans are applied when the activity is started. The inspection plans may be separate documents or an integral part of approved instructions, procedures or drawings.

Related codes, standards, specifications and design documents are used to develop the inspection plans. Procedures used for documenting inspection plans are selectively reviewed, as appropriate, by NOS to assure that necessary verification points and inspection criteria are included. The plans identify:

- acceptance criteria.

- activities to be inspected.

- inspection characteristics.

- inspection techniques/equipment (including accuracy requirements).

- provisions for inspection and test status.

- provisions for the recording of inspection results.

- qualification requirements.

- responsible organizations.

Revision 90 Page 1 Page of 3 1 of 3 Revision 90

INSPECTION CHAPTER 10 2.3. Inspection Personnel and Qualification A qualification program is established and documented to conform to applicable codes, standards, or licensing requirements. Qualifications and certifications are kept current.

Qualified personnel perform inspections. Inspectors with valid certifications perform inspections for acceptance. Inspectors are independent of those who perform or directly supervise the activity being inspected. On-the-Job training inspections shall be performed under the direct supervision of qualified personnel.

Second line supervisory personnel or other qualified personnel not assigned first line supervisory responsibility for the conduct of the work may conduct inspection of operating activities. Operating activities are defined as work functions associated with normal operations of the plant, routine maintenance, and certain technical services routinely assigned to the onsite operating organization.

2.4. Inspection Process Inspections are performed using approved instructions, procedures, process sheets, travelers, or checklists and applicable drawings.

- Inspections are performed for each work or operating activity where necessary to verify quality. Where inspection sampling is used to verify the acceptability of a group of items, the sampling procedure shall be based on recognized standard practices.

- Process monitoring may be used when inspection of processed material or products is impossible or impractical. When necessary, to ensure quality throughout the duration of the process, both inspection and process monitoring will be systematically used to verify conformance to requirements.

- When inspections must be performed before work can continue, hold points are established in appropriate documents. Consent to waive hold points are recorded prior to continuation of work. When inspection is desired, but not mandatory before work can continue, witness points are established. Completion of hold and witness points is documented.

- When acceptance criteria are not met, corrected areas are re-inspected.

Such inspections are documented in the Corrective Action Program.

- Changes to, or rework of, an item after inspection requires re-inspection of the affected areas.

- A final evaluation is performed. Inspection results are reviewed to confirm that required inspections and quality records have been completed, identified non-conformances have been resolved and the item conforms to specified requirements. Engineering, Maintenance, Operations or Quality Verification approves final acceptance of the item.

Page 2 of 3 Revision 90

INSPECTION CHAPTER 10

-Inspection records are of sufficient detail to confirm completion and, as a minimum, identify:

- authorized individual approving results.

- date of inspection.

- inspector/Data recorder.

- item inspected.

- M&TE used.

- reference to action taken in connection with identified non-conformances.

- results or acceptability.

- type of observation.

- When the inspection activity is performed using a procedure not referenced or included within the work package, the procedure and its revision should be recorded.

2.5. In-Service Inspections A program for the required ISI/IST inspection of completed systems, structures and components shall be planned and executed by or for the organization.

responsible for the operation of the plant to assure that plant components perform satisfactorily under all operating conditions.

Inspection methods shall be established and executed to applicable codes, standards and regulations, including baseline examinations and subsequent periodic examinations, which continue through the life of the plant in accordance applicable technical specifications.

2.6. Independent Verification Independent verifications are conducted by qualified personnel using approved procedures. Characteristics to be verified and methods to be employed shall be specified. Verification results and unacceptable conditions identified shall be documented. Verifications shall be performed by persons other than those who performed or directly supervised the work being verified.

Revision 90 Page of 3 3 of Page 3 3 Revision 90

TEST CONTROL CHAPTER 11

1. SCOPE A documented test program shall be established in accordance with applicable technical specifications, license conditions, and design documents to assure that all testing required demonstrating that the structures, systems, or components within the scope of this QAP will perform satisfactorily in service.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General 2.1.1. Testing Program The Company establishes and controls a test program to assure that design and performance criteria have been satisfied and assures that testing does not adversely affect the safe operation of the plant. The test program includes, as appropriate, procedures to ensure those structures, systems, subsystems, and components will perform in service. Testing is conducted by appropriately trained and qualified personnel. The extent of testing shall be based on the complexity of the modification, replacement, or repair. The test program covers all required tests including:

- operational tests.

- production tests.

- prototype qualification tests.

- tests during design.

- tests during fabrication.

- the demonstration of satisfactory performance following plant maintenance and modifications or procedural changes.

- those tests required by plant maintenance or modifications.

2.1.2. Test Procedures The program uses written test procedures which include the requirements and acceptance limits from applicable design documents. The Company reviews and approves test procedures and changes to test procedures, including changes that alter test sequence, in a similar manner to the original.

The organization responsible for the design of the item to be tested establishes the test requirements and acceptance criteria. Test requirements and acceptance criteria are based upon specified requirements contained in applicable design or other pertinent documents. Test requirements include specific characteristics to be tested.

Revision 90 Page 1 Page of 6 1 of 6 Revision 90

TEST CONTROL CHAPTER 11 The Company specifies specific test methods when they must be employed, uses written procedures or checklists, and documents the status of equipment both before and after testing.

The Company may use appropriate sections of related documents, such as ASTM methods, supplier manuals, equipment maintenance instructions, or approved drawings or travelers with acceptance criteria in lieu of specially prepared written test procedures. Such documents must include adequate instructions to assure the required quality of work. Test and inspection procedures contain:

- a description of objectives.

- acceptance criteria or limits contained in applicable design or other source documents, such as vendor's literature, engineering drawings or

• plant specifications that will be used to evaluate results.

- any special equipment or calibrations required to Conduct the test or inspection.

- responsibilities.

- instructions or checklists used to verify or document that affected plant systems are arranged in their correct lineup and for restoring the system to the condition consistent with the normal operating status.

- limiting conditions.

- prerequisites for, or checks to be made prior to performing the tests or inspections including any special conditions to be used to simulate normal or abnormal operating conditions.

- data documentation is in compliance with test procedures.

- equipment to be tested is properly released for testing.

- inspections and tests are done under suitable environmental conditions.

- proper calibrated inspection and test instruments are used.

- retention control of test data documentation is adequate.

- test or inspection requirements contained in applicable design documents.

Where tests and inspections are to be witnessed, the procedure identifies hold points or witness points in the testing sequence to permit witnessing. The procedure requires appropriate approval for the test to continue beyond the designated hold point.

1. Prerequisites Prerequisites include the following, as applicable:

Revision 90 Page of 6 2 of Page 2 6 Revision 90

TEST CONTROL CHAPTER 11

- appropriate test equipment.

- calibrated instrumentation in accordance with Chapter 12, "Control of Measuring and Test Equipment."

- condition of test equipment and the item to be tested.

- provisions for data acquisition.

- suitable environmental conditions.

- trained personnel.

Procedures ensure that prerequisite steps for equipment testing have been or will be performed. Such steps include:

- completion of necessary construction maintenance and modification activities.

- formal release for testing.

- measures to preserve equipment status.

- prior testing.

- safety precautions.

A detailed prescribed physical inspection of equipment components and facilities is performed to ensure readiness for operation. Typical inspection items include:

- calibration of instruments.

- cleanliness.

- lubrication.

- presence of safety devices.

- setting of limit switches.

2. Schedule Schedules are provided to assure that all necessary tests are performed and properly evaluated on a timely basis. Testing is scheduled so that the safety of the plant is never dependent on the performance of an untested system.

3. Test Results and Records Appropriate Company personnel evaluate test results to assure conformance with design and performance requirements. Inspection and test results are documented in a test report or data sheet. Each report identifies the following:

- acceptability of the test.

- actions taken to correct the deviations noted.

- any deviation of test results from acceptance criteria (nonconformance).

- as-found condition.

Page 3 of 6 Revision 90

TEST CONTROL CHAPTER 11

- as-left condition.

- completion date and other significant dates and times.

- data sheets completed during the tests.

- documents that provide acceptance criteria.

- identification of the conditions encountered which were not anticipated.

- identity of inspector or tester.

- item to which it applies.

- location where testing was performed or where test samples were taken.

- measuring and test equipment used.

- person evaluating test results.

- procedures or instructions followed in performing the task.

- test procedures.

- test results.

2.2. Instrumentation and Control The Company tests instrumentation and control channels to assure that they are properly calibrated. In addition, specific tests are performed at critical levels such as "set points" in a manner simulating the approach toward the set point.

These calibrations are made with the devices in their normal positions if the calibration is dependent upon location or attitude.

Testing determines that a proper response is obtained over the operating range of the device. It gives particular attention to verifying independence and dependence, as appropriate, of the elements of the systems. Calibration documentation includes indicating the date and identity of the person that performed the calibration.

The Company prepares and documents installation, inspection and test procedures and work instructions for instrumentation and electrical equipment.

These documents are kept current and revised as necessary to assure that installation, inspections and tests are performed in accordance with latest information. They include as appropriate:

- approvals.

- data report forms.

- frequency of inspection or test.

- identification of test equipment and date for required re-calibration where required for interpretation of test results.

- inspection and test acceptance limits.

- inspection and test equipment required.

- inspection and test objectives.

- installation specifications.

Page 4 of 6 Revision 90

TEST CONTROL CHAPTER 11

- precautions to avoid component or system damage during testing or inspection.

- prerequisites.

- sequence of tests (ifapplicable).

- sequential actions to be performed.

2.3. Electrical Tests Electrical tests include as appropriate:

- continuity tests, short circuit tests, polarity and rotational tests

- control system tests including indicating meters, recorders, transducers, targets and lamps, annunciators and alarms, controls and interlocks

- insulation resistance measurements as specified

- over potential (HIPOT) tests as specified. Overpotential tests conform to the applicable codes and standards. The manufacturer's recommendations are considered.

- voltage breakdown tests on liquid insulation 2.4. Mechanical Tests The Company performs mechanical tests to ascertain that electric and/or instrumentation components or systems can withstand system pressure ratings.

As a minimum, the Company applies such tests to pressure sensing and transmitting devices operating in steam, hydraulic, and vacuum systems and their hydraulic or pneumatic interconnecting piping or tubing and associated instruments.

• Pressurized equipment that is part of electrical apparatus such as heat exchangers, circulating systems, actuating systems, and electric and instrumentation containment penetrations are likewise tested if site assembled or fabricated. Tests are conducted after the assembly is complete even though the components may have been tested previously. These tests are performed in accordance with the applicable codes and standards.

2.5. Physical and Chemical Tests Physical and chemical tests, in accordance with the applicable codes, include, as appropriate:

- chemical analysis of fluids for oxygen or moisture content and purity.

- radiation sensitivity testing to confirm that radiation sensor and controlling devices is properly functioning.

Revision 90 Page 5 Page of 6 5 of 6 Revision 90

TEST CONTROL CHAPTER 11 2.6. Surveillance Tests The Company's test program covers surveillance testing during the operational phase to provide assurances that failures or substandard performance do not remain undetected and that the required reliability of safety related systems is maintained.

2.7. Maintenance or Major Procedure Change The Company performs tests following plant modification or significant changes in operating procedures to confirm that the modification or changes produce expected results. These tests also demonstrate that the change does not produce an unsafe operating condition.

Revision 90 Page of 6 Page 66 of 6 Revision 90

CONTROL OF MEASURING AND TEST CHAPTER 12 EQUIPMENT

1. SCOPE Measures and responsibilities are established to assure tools, gauges, instruments, and other Measuring and Testing Equipment (M&TE) used in activities affecting quality are properly controlled, calibrated, and adjusted at specified periods to maintain accuracy within specified limits. Measures shall also be established for the control of permanently installed instrument and control devices.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General Power Labs is responsible for the governance of M&TE and oversight of the site calibration process for Exelon plants. This includes the establishment of calibration practices, intervals, accuracy requirements, certification/de-certification, and equivalency decisions (except where accuracy is impactive non-conservatively), as well as the resolution of technical issues regarding M&TE calibration.

Corporate Maintenance is responsible for governance and oversight of site M&TE Control. This includes assessment of site compliance to the control of M&TE as defined in corporate maintenance procedural guidance.

The engineering organizations are responsible for decisions regarding the acceptability of changes to M&TE specifications where accuracies are less conservative than those currently established. The engineering organization performs M&TE equivalency calculations for these items to assure associated specifications are consistent with plant design, test procedures, and accuracy requirements (excluded are analytical chemistry and radiochemistry instruments).

The stations are responsible for the control and maintenance of calibrated M&TE for the station. The stations are also responsible for the control of station analytical chemistry instrumentation, radiochemistry instrumentation, and standard solutions.

2.2. Control A control program specifies how M&TE are stored, handled, and used. As a minimum the following items are addressed:

- administrative controls (including equipment marking and traceability to calibration records).

- certification requirements.

- damaged or suspect M&TE.

Page 1 of 3 Revision 90

CONTROL OF MEASURING AND TEST CHAPTER 12 EQUIPMENT

- environmental restrictions.

- items not requiring certification.

- M&TE selection.

- out of tolerance resolution.

- personnel qualifications.

- repairs and maintenance.

- status and usage history.

2.3. Labeling Equipment shall be suitably marked to indicate calibration status. Where neither

• labeling nor coding is practical, procedures shall provide for monitoring of records to ensure control.

2.4. Accuracy Calibration of M&TE should be against reference standards that have an accuracy of at least four times the required accuracy of M&TE. Calibration of reference standards will be against hierarchical standards more accurate than the reference standards calibrated. When this is not possible, standards must have an accuracy that assures the M&TE is within the required tolerance, and that the basis for acceptance is documented and authorized by responsible management.

2.5. Traceability and Interval M&TE is calibrated against and traceable to certified standards having valid relationships to nationally recognized standards. Where national standards do not exist, provisions are established to document the basis for calibration.

Calibration intervals are established for all M&TE and the Company program specifies how this interval is established.

2.6. Certified M&TE Certified M&TE is required where measurements with specific accuracy/tolerance requirements are delineated:

- calibration of other M&TE.

- environmental monitoring.

- safety-related and applicable ASME applications.

- technical Specification related applications (including balance of plant systems).

- verification of design parameters.

Certified M&TE is not required when measurements do not require specific accuracy or when commercial devices (such as rulers, tape measures, levels)

Page 2 of 3 Revision 90

CONTROL OF MEASURING AND TEST CHAPTER 12 EQUIPMENT provide adequate accuracy. Electronic stopwatches are not required to be calibrated.

2.7. Corrective Actions When M&TE is found to be out-of-tolerance, an evaluation is made of its previous uses to determine corrective action. Suspect equipment is identified and segregated to prevent inadvertent use. Devices that are consistently found out of calibration are repaired or replaced.

2.8. Vendor Control Vendors supplying calibration services are on the Company's approved suppliers list.

2.9. Commercial Devices Control measures are not required for rulers, tape measures, levels, and other such commercial devices, if such equipment provides adequate accuracy.

2.10. Calibration Records M&TE calibration records contain, as a minimum:

- as found/as left condition.

- calibration data.

- calibration procedure used.

- calibration results.

- equipment location.

- established accuracy.

- individual performing calibration.

- last calibration date.

- next calibration date.

- out of tolerance notification.

- repairs (if any).

- serial number.

- standards used.

Revision 90 Page 3 Page of 33 3 of Revision 90

HANDLING, STORAGE, AND SHIPPING CHAPTER 13

1. SCOPE The Company establishes measures to control and specify special protective conditions in accordance with an item's design and procurement requirements, as necessary, to prevent damage or deterioration of materials, components, and systems during handling, packaging, preservation, storage, and shipping.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General The Company uses written procedures or instructions for cleaning, packaging, shipping, storage, preservation, and to specify detailed requirements for access to storage areas, housekeeping, and removal of items from storage. Procedures include provisions for inspection, examination, testing and documentation.

These procedures specify special protective conditions necessary to prevent damage, deterioration or loss before and after receipt of materials, equipment, special nuclear material, and radioactive wastes.

Procurement documents or the vendor's quality program specifies the establishment of controls, to assure through the use of shipping procedures to provide protection during loading and transit and inspections, that items are delivered in acceptable condition.

2.2. Special Equipment and Environments When required, the Company:

- provides special equipment and special protective environments

- specifies special equipment (such as containers, shock absorbers and accelerometers)

- specifies special protective environments (such as inert gas atmosphere, specific moisture content levels and temperature levels)

- verifies the maintenance of special equipment and special protective environments 2.3. Classification of Items Levels and methods of storage are classified to minimize the possibility of damage, deterioration, or contamination of items. This is based on the important physical characteristics and the importance to safety and reliability of the item.

This classification considers the manufacturer's requirements.

The Company packages, ships, receives, stores, and handles items according to established manufacturers requirements or the Company' s' prescribed level.

When a package or assembly contains items of different levels, the Company classifies it to the highest level designated for any of the items contained.

Page 1 of 2 Revision 90

HANDLING, STORAGE, AND SHIPPING CHAPTER 13 CATR1 2.4. Special Handling Tools and Equipment The Company inspects and tests special handling tools and equipment using procedures at specified time intervals to verify adequate maintenance. The Company provides special handling procedures and instructions for items that are susceptible to handling damage. These procedures delineate acceptable techniques, necessary qualifications and precautions for maintenance and use.

Operators of special handling and lifting equipment have experience or are trained in their usage.

2.5. Marking and Labeling The Company establishes instructions for marking and labeling to identify, maintain, and preserve an item, including indication of the presence of special environments or the need for special controls.

Consumable materials such as chemicals, reagents, and lubricants maintained in storerooms and warehouses are controlled procedurally by an inventory control system, which includes provisions for identifying storage requirements and shelf lives by commodity, when applicable. Disposal of commodities whose shelf life has expired is addressed and controlled by procedures.

2.6. Storage Periodic monitoring is performed to assure that storage areas are being maintained in accordance with applicable requirements. Access to storage areas shall be controlled and limited. Cleanliness and good housekeeping practices shall be enforced at all times in the storage areas. Fire protection measures commensurate with the type of storage area shall be provided and maintained.

Revision 90 Page 2 Page of 22 2 of Revision 90

INSPECTION, TEST, AND OPERATING CHAPTER 14 STATUS 1, SCOPE Measures shall be established and documented to identify inspection, test, and operating status of structures, systems, and components in the scope of this QAP. Such measures shall provide means for assuring that required inspections and tests are performed and that the acceptability of items with regard to inspections and tests performed is known throughout procurement, installation, and operation in order to preclude inadvertent bypassing or altering the sequence of such inspections and tests.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General The Company uses markings, tags, stamps, routing cards, labels, forms, inspection records, or other means to identify the operating status of plant equipment. This identification helps avoid inadvertent bypassing of the inspections and tests required prior to its use.

In cases where documentary evidence is not available to confirm that an item has passed required inspections and tests, that item shall be considered nonconforming. An operability determination for the nonconforming item with timeliness commensurate with the potential safety significance of the issue is performed. The operability determination is focused on whether the non-conforming item is capable of performing or supporting its specified functions of prevention or mitigation as described in the current licensing basis and will result in the determination of continued plant operation. If operability is assured based on this prompt determination, plant operation can continue while an appropriate corrective action program is implemented to restore qualification of the non-conforming item.

Control procedures describe the use of such tags, stamps, routing cards, labels, forms, inspection records, and other methods. The authority for application and removal of tags, markings, labels and stamps is specified. Tagging, labeling, color-coding, physical separation, or using an inventory system identifies acceptable or unacceptable items for installation.

The Company:

- clearly identifies and documents all temporary connections, such as jumpers and bypass lines, and temporary set points of control equipment to allow restoration before placing the item in service.

- conditionally releases items for installation pending subsequent correction of any non-conformances.

- indicates the date the item was placed in the acceptable or unacceptable installation status.

Page I of 4 Revision 90

INSPECTION, TEST, AND OPERATING CHAPTER 14 STATUS

- maintains records, marks equipment to indicate calibration status, and identifies test equipment found out of calibration.

2.1.1. Procedures The Company uses procedures for control of equipment to maintain personnel and reactor safety and to avoid unauthorized operation of equipment. These procedures require control measures such as locking or tagging to secure and identify equipment in a controlled status. The procedures require independent verifications, where appropriate, to ensure that necessary measures, such as equipment tagging, have been done correctly.

2.2. Operating Status 2.2.1. Release for Maintenance Operating personnel, including a senior reactor operator, as applicable, may grant permission to release plant systems or equipment for maintenance or surveillance testing. Prior to granting permission, such operating personnel:

- verify that the equipment or system can be released.

- determine how long it may be out of service.

- determine what functional testing or redundant systems are required prior to and during the out-of-service period.

The Company documents such permission. The Company uses independent verification to the extent necessary to ensure that the proper system was removed from service. The Company considers the degraded protection available when one subsystem of a redundant safety system has been removed for maintenance or surveillance testing.

2.2.2. Preparation for Work After permission has been granted to take the equipment out of service, measures provide for protection of equipment and workers. The Company clearly identifies the status of equipment and systems at any location where the equipment can be operated. The Company enforces strict control measures for such equipment. The operating staff can easily identify equipment, which is in other than normal conditions.

In addition to the requirements of the technical specifications, conditions to be considered in preparing equipment for maintenance or surveillance testing include, for example:

- electrical hazards.

- entry into closed vessels.

- establishment of a path for decay heat removal.

- handling hazardous materials.

- hazardous atmospheres and ALARA considerations.

Page 2 of 4 Revision 90

INSPECTION, TEST, AND OPERATING CHAPTER 14 STATUS

- method of emergency core cooling.

- shutdown margin.

- temperature and pressure of the system.

- valves between work and hazardous materials.

- venting, draining, and flushing.

When entering a closed system, the Company prevents the entry of extraneous material and removes foreign material before re-closing the system. Appropriate personnel inform control room supervision of changes in equipment status, including temporary modifications, and the effects of such changes.

2.2.3. Temporary Modifications The Company controls temporary modifications, such as temporary bypass lines, electrical jumpers, lifted electrical leads, and temporary trip point settings with approved procedures. These procedures include requirements for the period of time when the temporary modification is in effect. They also include a requirement for:

- a verification by a second person of the proper installation or removal of the temporary modification, or

- a functional test which conclusively proves the proper installation or removal of the temporary modification.

The Company maintains a log or other documented evidence for the current status of such- temporary modifications. The Company reviews temporary modifications periodically to assess their continued need and propriety.

2.2.4. Return to Service When equipment is ready to be returned to service, operating personnel place the equipment in operation and verify and document its functional acceptability.

The Company assures return to normal conditions using approved procedures, including:

- removal of electrical jumpers.

- removal of signals used during testing.

- returning valves, breakers, or switches to proper start-up or operating positions.

- assuring that all alarms, which are indicative of inoperative status, are cleared.

A second qualified person verifies proper alignment of equipment unless:

- all equipment, valves and switches involved in the activity can be proven to be in their correct alignment by functional testing without adversely affecting the safety of the plant, or

- such verification would result in significant radiation exposure.

Page 3 of 4 Revision 90

INSPECTION, TEST, AND OPERATING CHAPTER 14 STATUS The person who performs verifications (independent or concurrent) is qualified to perform such tasks. When placed into service, equipment receives additional surveillance during the run-in period. The on-duty supervisor responsible for the unit formally accepts equipment, which is returned to service.

Revision 90 Page of 44 Page 44 of Revision 90

NONCONFORMING MATERIALS, CHAPTER 15 PARTS, OR COMPONENTS

1. SCOPE Controls shall provide for identification, evaluation, segregation when practical, disposition of nonconforming items, and for notification to affected organizations.

Items that do not conform to specified requirements shall be controlled to prevent inadvertent installation or use.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General Nonconforming items are processed in accordance with the corrective action program and / or documented procedures. The Company uses written procedures to identify and control items, services or activities that do not conform to requirements. These procedures address the:

- disposition of nonconforming items.

- documentation of identified nonconformances.

- identification of nonconforming items.

- notification of affected organizations.

- operability determination of the SSC with the identified nonconforming condition

- segregation of nonconforming items.

Implementation of these procedures prevents the inadvertent use, operation, or unauthorized installation of nonconforming items.

2.1.1. Supplier Nonconforming Items The Company and its suppliers establish and document measures for the identification, control and disposition of items and services that do not meet procurement document requirements. These measures provide for:

- a review of nonconforming items.

- supplier notification to the Company of a nonconformance. These notifications include a supplier recommended disposition (e.g. "use - as -

is" or "repair") and technical justification. The supplier submits nonconformances to the Company for approval if:

- the supplier has violated a technical or material requirement, or

- the supplier has violated a requirement in supplier documents, which have been approved by the Company, or

- the supplier cannot correct the nonconformance by continuation of the original manufacturing process or by rework, or Revision 90 Page 1 Page of 44 I of Revision 90

NONCONFORMING MATERIALS, CHAPTER 15 PARTS, OR COMPONENTS

- the item does not conform to the original procurement requirement even though the item can be restored to a condition such that the capability of the item to function is unimpaired.

- Company disposition of supplier recommendations.

- verification of disposition for nonconformances.

- maintenance of records for supplier nonconformances.

2.2. Identification The Company identifies nonconforming items by marking, tagging, or other methods, which do not adversely affect the end use of the item. The identification is legible and easily recognizable.

2.3. Segregation When practical, the Company segregates nonconforming items by placing them in a clearly identified and designated hold area until properly dispositioned.

When segregation is impractical or impossible due to physical conditions such as size, weight or access limitations, other precautions are employed to preclude inadvertent use of a nonconforming item.

2.4. Disposition 2.4.1. Control Nonconforming characteristics shall be reviewed and recommended dispositions of nonconforming items shall be proposed and approved in accordance with documented procedures. Further processing, delivery, installation, or use of a nonconforming item shall be controlled pending an evaluation and an approved disposition by authorized personnel.

2.4.2. Evaluation The Company has responsibility for resolution of nonconformances in accordance with written procedures. Where ASME Code requirements are involved, the Authorized Inspection Agency reviews and accepts or rejects the disposition and justification. Engineering provides technical justification and independent review of nonconformances dispositioned as repair or use-as-is.

For items under a contractor's direct control, the Company may delegate to the contractor the authority to perform a technical evaluation of nonconformances, if the contractor has an acceptable procedure for handling nonconforming items.

Where the Company delegates such authority, the contractor is responsible for establishing that:

- all actions fall within the requirements set by the Company.

- an accepted nonconformance meets the design intent.

- ASME Code items meet the requirements of the ASME Code.

Page 2 of 4 Revision 90

NONCONFORMING MATERIALS, CHAPTER 15 PARTS, OR COMPONENTS

- personnel performing the evaluation meet the requirements of section 2.4.3 below.

When a technical evaluation has not been delegated to a supplier, the Company makes a technical evaluation of all pertinent data relating to the nonconformity, including the cause, where known, and the corrective action either taken or planned to prevent recurrence per the corrective action program. The Company retains the responsibility for the satisfactory resolution of supplier nonconformances.

2.4.3. Personnel Personnel having expertise in the pertinent discipline determine whether a nonconforming item may be accepted "as - is," may be repaired to an acceptable condition, or must be rejected. These personnel have adequate competence and knowledge necessary to make this evaluation and have access to pertinent background information.

2.4.4. Documentation The Company identifies nonconforming items and documents their disposition as applicable (e.g. use - as - is, reject, repair, or rework). Technical justification for the acceptability of a nonconforming item, dispositioned as repair, or use-as-is, is documented and traceable to each item. Appropriate documentation is retained.

Nonconformances to design requirements that are dispositioned as "use - as -

is" or "repair" is subject to design control measures commensurate with those applied to the original design. The Company technically justifies dispositions designated "use - as - is," and "repair" to assure that the final condition of any nonconforming item meets applicable code requirements and will not adversely affect the safety, operability, or maintainability of the item, or of the component or system in which it is installed. The "as - built" records, if such records are required, reflect the accepted deviation.

If the nonconformance can be corrected after installation, the item may be released for installation on a conditional release basis. The Company documents the authority and technical justification for the conditional release of the item and makes it part of the documentation.

2.4.5. Repaired, Reworked, or Scrapped Items The Company re-examines repaired or reworked items using procedures and the original acceptance criteria unless the nonconforming item's disposition has established alternate acceptance criteria. Items that have been corrected are re-inspected or re-tested as required by the approved disposition.

Revision 90 Page 3 Page of 44 3 of Revision 90

NONCONFORMING MATERIALS, CHAPTER 15 PARTS, OR COMPONENTS The area of inspection may be confined to the area of the nonconformance.

When it has been determined that the corrected item is satisfactory, the status of the item is changed to "acceptable" and an appropriate entry is made in the documentation after acceptance is determined.

The Company scraps, discards or transfers to training usage a nonconforming item that cannot be corrected or accepted "as - is." Nonconforming items that are being used for training must be controlled (e.g. administratively controlled, permanently identified, marked, obliterate Material ID Tag or Q level indicators) to prevent inadvertent or inappropriate use of the item.

Revision 90 Page of 44 Page 44 of Revision 90

CORRECTIVE ACTION CHAPTER 16

1. SCOPE This Chapter describes the Company program to identify and correct conditions adverse to quality.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General The Company implements a Corrective Action Program to promptly identify and correct items or occurrences that are adverse to quality or might adversely affect the safe operation of a nuclear generating station. These items or occurrences are screened for reportability, operability, Part 21, etc. The Company makes a thorough investigation of occurrences and identifies corrective action to prevent recurrence of an event, as appropriate. Events may include reactor trips, failed equipment, personnel errors, and procedural infractions. Measures are taken to assure that the cause of any significant condition adverse to quality is determined and takes corrective action to prevent recurrence.

2.2. Conditions Adverse to Quality Measures are established to assure that conditions adverse to quality are identified and corrected. Examples of conditions adverse to quality are provided in procedures. Examples include failures, malfunctions, adverse trends, deficiencies (including programmatic), deviations, defective material, design errors, equipment, and nonconformance to specified requirements.

An independent review body reviews violations, deviations and reportable events that require a report to the NRC in accordance with regulatory requirements and company procedures. This includes the review of results of any investigations made and the recommendations resulting from such investigations. These include items such as:

- Licensee Event Reports (LER)

- significant operating abnormalities or deviations from normal or expected performance of plant safety-related structures, systems, or components.

- violations of applicable codes, regulations, orders, technical specifications, license requirements or internal procedures or instructions having safety significance.

2.2.1. Significant Conditions Adverse to Quality In cases of significant conditions adverse to quality the cause of the condition is determined and documented, resolution determined and documented, and corrective action taken and documented to preclude recurrence.

Revision 90 Page of 44 Page 11 of Revision 90

CORRECTIVE ACTION CHAPTER 16

1. Procurement The Company uses procedures that include methods for the identification of conditions adverse to quality and for timely corrective action. The Company requires individual vendors and their contractors to include corrective action measures in their quality assurance programs. In cases of significant conditions adverse to quality that arise during the procurement process, the Company uses procedures to describe the method used to:

- identify and document deviations and non-conformances.

- review and evaluate the conditions to determine the cause, extent and measures needed to correct and prevent recurrence.

- report the conditions and corrective action to the appropriate levels of management.

- implement and maintain required corrective action.

2. Plant Hardware Malfunctions The causes of malfunctions are determined, evaluated, and recorded, as appropriate. Experience with the malfunctioning equipment and similar components are reviewed and evaluated to determine if a replacement component of the same type can be expected to perform the function reliably. If evidence indicates that common components in safety-related systems have performed unsatisfactorily, corrective measures are planned prior to replacement or repair of all such components.

Appropriate procedures are revised in a timely manner to prevent recurrence of equipment malfunction or abnormal operation.

3. Incorrect Design When a significant design change is necessary because of an incorrect design, the Company reviews and modifies the design process and verification procedures, as appropriate. In cases of significant or recurring deficiencies (or errors), the Company follows written procedures to correct the deficiency (or error), determine the cause and make changes in the design process and the QAP to prevent similar types of deficiencies (or errors) from recurring.

2.3. Verification and Follow-up The Company verifies completion of corrective actions for maintenance, repair, refueling, operation activities, completion of corrective action taken for assessment deficiencies (including programmatic), and performs assessments of site corrective action. The Company tracks and verifies completion of corrective action taken for independent assessment findings and approves the completion of corrective actions.

Revision 90 Page of 4 2 of Page 2 4 Revision 90

CORRECTIVE ACTION CHAPTER 16 Trending and assessment results are evaluated to assure that corrective measures are implemented effectively and that actions to prevent recurrence are effective as appropriate. The Company also requires contractors and vendors to follow-up on corrective action commitments within their quality programs.

The Company regularly reviews and analyzes records to:

- assure that the causes of a nonconformance and the corrective action have been clearly described.

- assure that authorized Company personnel have evaluated the overall effect resulting from the use of nonconforming items.

- determine whether corrective measures will preclude recurrence.

2.4. Evaluation and Qualification Personnel performing the evaluation function are responsible for considering the cause and the feasibility of corrective action to assure that the necessary quality of an item is not deteriorated. Where it is determined that the cause cannot be corrected immediately, the due date of corrective action will be determined during the review and evaluation. Evaluation may indicate the need for investigations to assure that corrective measures are considered complete and may also indicate that the nature of the deficient condition is minor and does not require corrective action.

Qualified personnel are responsible for determining the root cause(s) of an event and developing recommendations to preclude recurrence. These personnel report the results of their determination to appropriate station personnel and Company management.

2.5. Documentation and Reporting The Company documents the identification of significant conditions adverse to quality, the cause of the condition, the corrective action taken, and reports these items to the appropriate levels of management, NSRB, and as applicable, PORC, If the identified issue is not an indication of a significant failure in any portion of the QAP, the Company does not require reporting to management.

Reports are made immediately if prompt corrective action is required. Formal reports are filed with the appropriate regulatory agency, when required. Reports of investigations include a detailed description of the occurrence, the findings of the investigation, and the recommended corrective measures. The Company notifies the rest of the nuclear industry of significant events with generic implications and its circumstances to help preclude a similar event occurring at another plant.

The Company keeps records to identify incidents (e.g., major damage, personal injury, major schedule delays.), non-conforming items, unfavorable conditions, programmatic deficiencies identified in assessment reports, significant equipment failures, and malfunctions that occur during station operation.

Page 3 of 4 Revision 90

CORRECTIVE ACTION CHAPTER 16 The Company tracks the completion of corrective actions for conditions adverse to quality and maintains records of their resolution. Parts or all of this system may be electronically monitored and electronic records may be used as the sole record of such a system.

Revision 90 of 44 Page 44 of Revision 90

QUALITY ASSURANCE RECORDS CHAPTER 17

1. SCOPE The Company establishes and implements a program, which defines requirements and responsibilities for identification, generation, collection, compilation, storage, maintenance, retention, and retrieval of records necessary to provide evidence of quality in assessment, corrective action, decommissioning, design, engineering, fabrication, installation, inspection, maintenance, modification, operations, testing, and associated reviews.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. Program The records program provides for:

- administration.

- generation

- receipt and transmittal.

- storage and preservation ( includes temporary and permanent records)

- safekeeping and classification.

- retention and disposition.

2.2. Administration Authority and responsibility for record control activities are delineated in procedures. Records are administered through a system, which includes an index of record type, retention period, and storage location. Distribution of records shall be controlled in accordance with written procedures. Measures are established for replacement, restoration, or substitution of lost or damaged records.

Records are legible, accurate, complete, identifiable, and retrievable. Records are considered valid and complete when dated and stamped, initialed, signed, or otherwise authenticated. Corrections, revisions, or supplements to completed records are reviewed and approved by an authorized individual in the originating organization. Such changes are dated and stamped, initialed, signed, or otherwise authenticated including the use of electronic approval and authorization.

Records may be stored in electronic media provided that the process for managing and storing data is documented in procedures that comply with applicable regulations, including NRC guidance in RIS 2000-1 8. Media used for the retention of records include (but are not limited to): microform, compact disk-recordable (CD-R), and magnetic media including videotape, computer tape, optical disks, and hard disk storage. Electronic records retention must be an integral component of the Corporate Records Management Program, approved by the management position responsible for Nuclear Generation records. The Page 1 of 5 Revision 90

QUALITY ASSURANCE RECORDS CHAPTER 17 format used must be capable of producing legible, accurate, and complete documents during the required retention period. Electronic approval and authorization procedures are established to assure that only those persons authorized grant the required approvals.

2.3. Receipt and Transmittal A system for receipt control of records is established. Receipt control is required for records transferred between Company locations, vendors and the Company, and from Company department files to final storage locations. Systems are established to transfer records between Company locations and between vendors and the Company. Records transferred from Company department files to a final storage location are also under such systems. The system of receipt control of records for permanent or temporary storage includes inventory of transmitted records, receipt acknowledgment, and control of records during receipt.

2.4. Storage and Preservation Record storage facilities are established and maintained in a manner that minimizes the risk of damage or destruction. Records may be kept by suppliers and maintained on an available basis for a specified period of time. Storage and Preservation systems provide for:

- assignment of responsibilities.

- attachment in binders, folders, or envelopes for storage in steel file cabinets or on shelving in containers.

- control and accountability of records removed.

- damage from natural disasters such as winds, floods, and fires.

- following manufacturer recommendations for special recording media.

- protection from environmental conditions such as high and low temperatures and humidity.

- protection from infestation of insects, mold, or rodents etc.

- special processed records such as radiographs, photographs, negatives, microfilm, and magnetic media to prevent damage from excessive light, stacking, electromagnetic fields, temperature and humidity.

Permanent storage alternative below applies to Calvert Cliffs Nuclear Power Plant. In lieu of the reinforced concrete, concrete block, masonry, or equal construction requirements of Supplement 17S-1, Section 4.4.1(a), the records vault is entirely enveloped by a structurally sound, fire-resistive building. The vault rests on a reinforced slab on grade and its walls extend fully to the underside of the structural deck. The walls of the vault are constructed of gypsum wallboard on metal studs per Underwriters Laboratory Test Number U41 2, assuring the equivalent of 2-hour fire resistant construction. This is equal construction to concrete block in terms of fire protection. The walls carry no structural load; hence, they provide equivalent structural integrity to that needed of concrete block. Supplement 17S-1 Section 4.4.1(b) requires floor and roof Page 2 of 5 Revision 90

QUALITY ASSURANCE RECORDS CHAPTER 17 drainage control. If a floor drain is provided, a check valve (or equal) shall be included. In lieu of this requirement, the vault is contained within an environmentally protected building. As such, it has no roof, or need for floor drain.

Interim storage provisions shall be established to properly maintain and protect records until they are permanently transferred to record storage facilities for retention and shall meet one of the following conditions:

1. Records shall be stored in steel cabinets located in a fire-resistant building or non-combustible building with a fire suppression system.

A fire-resistant building must meet the following: A facility constructed to resist the initiation or spreading of fire; fire-suppressive and/or non-combustible materials used; building certified as fire-resistant by a person who specializes in the technical field of fire prevention and fire extinguishing.

2. Temporary storage per section 2.4.1.

2.4.1. Temporary Storage Measures are established for temporary storage of records when required by an organization's procedures for activities such as; for processing, review, or use.

These measures require that these records are stored in a 1-hour fire rated container and that a maximum allowable storage time limit is specified.

2.5. Safekeeping and Classification Measures are established to prevent access to records by unauthorized personnel. These measures guard against theft and vandalism. Records are classified and retained in accordance with applicable regulations.

2.6. Retention and Disposition Record retention periods are established to meet regulatory, UFSAR, and License requirements. The most stringent retention period is implemented when multiple requirements exist. Records are dispositioned at the end of the prescribed retention period.

2.7. Plant Operating Records 2.7.1. Records andlor Logs, 5-Year Retention (unless otherwise noted)

Records and/or logs relative to the following items shall be kept in a manner convenient for review and shall be retained for at least 5 years unless otherwise noted. These items apply to Braidwood, Byron, Calvert Cliffs, Clinton, Dresden, Ginna, LaSalle, Limerick, Nine Mile Point, Peach Bottom (inclUding the Page 3 of 5 Revision 90

QUALITY ASSURANCE RECORDS CHAPTER 17 Independent Spent Fuel Storage Installation), and Quad Cities Stations unless otherwise noted:

- records of normal plant operation, including power levels and periods of operation at each power level.

- records and periodic checks, inspection and/or calibrations performed to verify that the surveillance requirements of the Technical Specifications (and Fire Protection Program at Clinton) are being met. All equipment failing to meet surveillance requirements and the corrective action taken shall be recorded.

- records of physics tests and other tests pertaining to nuclear safety.

(Braidwood, Byron, Dresden, LaSalle, Peach Bottom, Quad Cities)

- records of changes to procedures required by a station's Technical Specifications and other procedures, which affect nuclear safety, as determined by the management position holder responsible for plant operation.

- shift manager/engineers' logs (Braidwood, Byron, Dresden, LaSalle, Quad Cities)

- records of principal maintenance activities, including inspection and repair, (and replacement for Braidwood, Byron, Limerick and Peach Bottom) regarding principal items of equipment pertaining to nuclear safety.

- records of changes made to the equipment or reviews of tests and experiments to comply with 10OCFR50.59 (Dresden and Quad Cities).

- records of changes made to the procedures as required by Technical Specifications and the Operational Requirements Manual (Clinton).

- reportable events required by 10CFR50.73 and 10CFR72.216 as applicable (Clinton 10CFR50.73 only, Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, Limerick, Nine Mile Point, and Peach Bottom).

- records of radioactive shipments (Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, Limerick, and Nine Mile Point)

- records of secondary water sampling and water quality. (Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, Nine Mile Point) (Lifetime)

- records of the service lives of all snubbers, including the date at which the service life commences and associated installation and maintenance records. (Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, Nine Mile Point Unit 2) (Lifetime)

- records of evaluations performed for changes made to procedures or equipment or evaluations of tests and experiments pursuant to 10 CFR 50.59 or 10 CFR 72.48. (Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, Nine Mile Point) (Lifetime)

- records of QA activities required by this QATR and not otherwise listed.

(Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, Nine Mile Point) (Lifetime)

Revision 90 Page of 5 Page 44 of 5 Revision 90

QUALITY ASSURANCE RECORDS CHAPTER 17 2.7.2. Lifetime Records Lifetime records are those that are specified by applicable regulations, standards, codes, and licensing basis documents.

Revision 90 Page of 5 Page 55 of 5 Revision 90

ASSESSMENTS/AUDITS CHAPTER 18

1. SCOPE A documented, comprehensive system consisting of regulatory audits and performance assessments of the Company and its vendors are conducted to verify QAP compliance, adequacy, and effectiveness. Audits and assessments are conducted in accordance with written procedures or checklists. Audits are performed to the requirements of ASME NQA-1 to evaluate the audited organization and to assure completion of required corrective actions, commitments, or improvements and determine effectiveness in meeting program objectives.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. Assessments and Audits General -

2.1.1. Scheduling The internal audit program is conducted on a performance driven frequency that is commensurate with the status and importance of the activity to be completed but does not exceed 24-months. Internal audit frequencies required by regulation that are different than the 24-month period are indicated within Appendix B, "Audit Frequency." Audit frequencies are determined based on a consideration of the risk and consequences with respect to the activities being audited.

Audits may be extended beyond their originally scheduled due date based on the following criteria:

A. Audits shall be performed at the intervals designated in Appendix B, "Audit Frequency". Schedules are based on the month in which the audit starts.

B. A maximum extension not to exceed 25 percent of the audit interval is allowed. That is to say that, for audits on a 24-month frequency, the maximum time between specific audits does not exceed 30 months.

Likewise, audits on an annual (12-month) frequency do not extend beyond 15 months. Audits of Emergency Preparedness and Security are not subject to the extension and will be performed on a frequency not to exceed 12 months (or not to exceed 24 months if performed on a 24-month frequency).

C. When an audit interval extension greater than one month is used, the next audit for that particular audit area is scheduled from the original anniversary month rather than from the month of the extended audit.

The NSRB activities will be periodically reviewed for effectiveness at a frequency not to exceed 2 years by experienced Nuclear Oversight personnel and/or industry peers. This review will include an evaluation of the NSRB activities for compliance with the QATR requirements.

Page 1 of 4 Revision 90

ASSESSMENTS/AUDITS CHAPTER 18 ASSESSMENTSIAUDITS CHAPTER 18 D. Item B applies to supplier audits and evaluations except that a total combined interval for any three consecutive inspection or audit intervals does not exceed 3.25 times the specified inspection or audit interval.

Fleet assessment activities are conducted to identify performance gaps and enable the site to drive towards sustainable performance excellence. These planned internal assessment activities are performed to a schedule that is approved by the management position responsible for Fleet Assessments, or designated staff member(s).

2.1.2. Preparation A documented plan or an agenda identifies an audit or assessment scope, requirements, audit or assessment personnel, activities to be evaluated, organizations to be notified, applicable documents, and schedule. An approved checklist or procedure for each scheduled audit or assessment identifies the requirements of the area or items to be evaluated. Audit plans, agendas, checklists, and procedures as applicable are prepared in advance under the direction of an Audit Team Leader.

2.1.3. Personnel Experienced and qualified personnel perform assessments and audits and are familiar with written procedures, standards, and processes applicable to the area being evaluated. Assessment and audit personnel shall have sufficient authority and organizational freedom to make the assessment and audit process meaningful and effective and shall not have direct responsibilities in the areas to be assessed or audited. They shall have access to the plant records necessary to fulfill their function.

The Audit Team Leader shall organize and direct audits and ensure the team collectively has the required experience or training for the activities to be evaluated. Technical Specialists may supplement the team to provide additional experience and competence.

2.1.4. Performance Performance assessments are conducted to assess specific activities, processes, and records on the basis of their impact and importance relative to safety, reliability, and functionality with respect to risks and consequences.

Assessments can be focused on areas most in need of improvement.

Audits are initiated early to assure effective quality assurance during design, procurement, manufacturing, construction, installation, inspection, testing, and operations. Additional unscheduled audits/assessments may also be performed at various stages of activities, based on the nature and safety significance of the work being done; to verify continued adherence to and effectiveness of the 7/

quality systems. Objective evidence shall be examined to the extent necessary J Revision 90 Page 2 Page of 44 2 of Revision 90

ASSESSMENTSIAUDITS CHAPTER 18 ASSESSMENTSIAUDITS CHAPTER 18 to determine that a quality program is being effectively implemented.

2.1.5. Reporting and Follow-up A. Audits An audit report includes the description of the audit scope, identification of the team and personnel contacted during audit activities, a summary of results (including a statement on effectiveness of the QAP elements), and a description of each finding. The ATL shall sign the audit report for which he or she is responsible.

Audit results are documented and distributed to the management position responsible for NOS, and to the appropriate managerial level of the organization having responsibility for the area or activity audited. Findings or deficiencies requiring prompt corrective action are reported immediately to the management of the audited organization.

Findings, deficiencies and recommendations of each audit shall be reported to appropriate site management and the management position responsible for NOS. All findings of noncompliance with NRC requirements, and any significant nuclear safety or quality issues requiring escalated action, will be directed through the management position responsible for NOS to the President and ONO in accordance with procedural requirements.

Responsible management shall take the necessary actions to correct findings identified in the audit. They will identify the corrective action to be taken, actions that will prevent recurrence, and a schedule for implementing these actions.

Responses to audit findings are reviewed for adequacy.

Follow-up verification of the completion of scheduled corrective action commitments are performed by NOS to assure findings or adverse conditions are corrected in accordance with procedural requirements. Follow-up action of previous deficient areas or adverse conditions (including re-audit) is taken to verify that corrective action has been completed, is effective, implementation continues, and is properly documented, when indicated.

B. Assessments Assessment reports will include a description of the assessment scope, identification of the team, a summary of results, and a description of each assessment identified issue. Issues will be reported to the appropriate site!

corporate management and to the management position responsible for Organizational Effectiveness and Integrated Performance Assessments (OR&IPA). All significant issues requiring escalated action will be directed through the management position responsible for OR&IPA to the President and CNO in accordance with procedural requirements. Follow-up of previously identified assessment issues will be performed in accordance with procedural requirements.

Page 3 of 4 Revision 90

ASSESSMENTSIAUDITS CHAPTER 18 ASSESSMENTSIAUDITS CHAPTER 18 2.1.6. Records Audit and Assessment results are documented and reports are generated and retained as applicable. Associated documentation is on file at the appropriate location. Personnel qualification records for assessment and audit team members are established, maintained, and reviewed as required.

2.2. Vendor Audits Audits, or surveys of vendors and their sub-tier suppliers are performed to a pre-established schedule. Audits are performed on a triennial basis. Documented supplier performance monitoring is performed in accordance with approved procedures as an acceptable alternate to the performance of the annual evaluation of suppliers. The management position responsible for audits and programs or designee, shall review and approve the audit/survey schedule and checklists, and sign reports. Schedules are reviewed semi-annually and revised

'accordingly to assure that suppliers are audited, or surveyed as required.

Audit program requirements are imposed on suppliers by appropriate contract or procurement documents. The Company's active participation in nuclear industry audits provides an alternative means to fulfilling its responsibility for examining supplier activities.

2.3. Independent Management Audit A periodic audit (not to exceed 24 months) of the status and adequacy of the QAP is performed by an independent organization to assure that audits are being accomplished to program requirements. In addition, this will include an evaluation of the NSRB activities for compliance with the QATR requirements.

The management position responsible for NOS submits the results of this audit to the President and CNO.

Page 4 of 4 Revision 90

AUGMENTED QUALITY APPENDIX A

1. SCOPE It is the Company's policy to assure a high degree of availability and reliability for its nuclear plants while ensuring the health and safety of the public and its workers. Therefore, the Quality Assurance Program is applied in a graded manner to certain areas and activities that are not clearly defined as safety related. The Company calls this application Augmented Quality. Augmented Quality includes systems and components that are subject to the requirements of ASME Code Sections: I "Power Boilers," IV "Hot Water Heaters," and VIII "Non-fired Pressure Vessels" (see sub-section 2.7. below). This appendix applies to all sites unless otherwise noted below or in Appendices B through G.

2. REQUIREMENTS The Company applies the following augmented quality requirements to certain systems, structures, components (SSC), and activities that are not safety related to a degree consistent with their importance to safety. Unless otherwise noted:

- routine audits are performed of the program's content and implementation.

- deficiencies are addressed in accordance with the corrective action program.

- program records of audits and reviews are maintained as required.

2.1. Health Physics and ALARA (As Low As Reasonably Achievable)

The Company develops, documents, and implements a radiation protection program sufficient to ensure compliance with the provisions of 10OCFR20. The Company uses, to the extent practical, procedures and engineering controls based on sound radiation protection principles to achieve occupational doses and doses to the public that are as low as reasonably achievable.

2.2. Transport of Radioactive Waste When the Company contracts with vendors to transport radioactive waste in NRC approved shipping packages, it meets the requirements of IOCFR71, Subpart H. The Company assures that this service is procured from an organization with a QA program and if applicable, includes a NRC licensed transport system. Loading, surveying, closure, placarding, and inspections are conducted in accordance with written procedures and instructions.

Transport casks and trailers are inspected before release in accordance with Department of Transportation (DOT) 49CFR.

Shipping manifests, including final radiation surveys, are completed and retained. Radioactive waste shipments not meeting the requirements for NRC approved packaging, shall meet the requirements of DOT 49CFR.

Page 1 of 6 Revision 90

AUGMENTED QUALITY APPENDIX A 2.3. Services The Company procures services from qualified suppliers. It is not necessary that these suppliers have a quality assurance program approved by the licensee, however, suppliers should provide a quality assurance program that includes the quality assurance program elements presented in Reg. Guide 4.15, and routinely provide program data summaries sufficiently detailed to permit evaluation of the program for the following areas:

- meteorology.

- Offsite Dose Calculation Manual.

- radiological environmental monitoring.

2.4. Fire Protection 10OCFR50 Appendix A, General Design Criteria (GDC) 3 requires that the Company's nuclear facilities have an established fire protection program that provides fire protection features such that the adverse effect of fires on structures, systems and components important to safety is minimized. The quality assurance program established for these fire protection SSCs ensures that design, procurement, instruction, procedures, drawings, inspection, installation, testing, maintenance, operations, nonconforming Items, corrective Action, records, audits and administrative controls meet the applicable Quality Assurance guidelines as described in the applicable edition of Branch Technical Position (BTP) 9.5-1 for each Exelon site. Engineering determines what fire protection SSCs protect Structures, Systems, and Components important to safety. Engineering also establishes the requirements for the design, procurement, fabrication, installation and/or modification of these fire protection SSCs. Routine testing of fire protection systems assures reliability. All other fire protection equipment and supplies will be of commercial quality, in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) guidelines.

2.5. Station Blackout (Regulatory Guide 1.155)

Calvert Cliffs, Dresden, LaSalle, Limerick, Nine Mile Point Unit 1, Nine Mile Point Unit 2, Oyster Creek, Quad Cities and Three Mile Island stations rely on non-safety related equipment to achieve the redundancy required by 10CFR50.63.

Quality Assurance requirements for Calvert Cliffs, Dresden, LaSalle, Limerick, Nine Mile Point Units 1 and 2, Oyster Creek, Quad Cities and Three Mile Island are implemented in accordance with Regulatory Guide 1.155 (Station Blackout),

Appendix A and B. Replacement and consumable parts and supplies are classified non-safety related in accordance with original specifications and are procured as commercial items. Routine testing of Station Blackout (SBO) SSCs assures the necessary redundancy is maintained. SBO SSC reliability is monitored in accordance with the Station's Maintenance Rule program.

Page 2 of 6 Revision 90

AUGMENTED QUALITY APPENDIX A 2.6. Augmented Quality Requirements for Dresden 1, and Peach Bottom 1 Dresden 1, and Peach Bottom 1, have ceased commercial operation and will ultimately be decommissioned. Staffing, qualification of personnel, and organization will be in accordance with the Dresden 1 De-fueled Technical Specifications (DTS) and De-fueled Safety Analysis Reports (DSAR), and the Peach Bottom 1 Updated Final Safety Analysis Report (UFSAR) and Technical Specifications.

Except for inspections or examinations required for ASME repairs and replacements, station personnel may perform inspections provided they are experienced, task-qualified personnel or supervisors who did not supervise the activity being inspected. Nuclear Oversight will monitor this activity through periodic overview.

Timeliness of corrective actions is prioritized commensurate with the safety significance. Sufficient records of maintenance and modification activities will be maintained to evaluate failures, perform root cause analysis, if applicable, and determine appropriate corrective actions and to meet the requirements of the applicable DSAR or Peach Bottom Unit 1 UFSAR.

2.7. Repairs and Alterations The requirements of ASME Code Sections II, V and IX shall be imposed as applicable for the repair or alteration job specific work scope.

2.7.1. State of Illinois Welded repairs and all alterations to non-ISI boilers and pressure vessels, as described in Section 505.2500 of the rules contained in the Illinois Emergency Management Agency (IEMA) Safe Operation of Nuclear Facility Boilers and Pressure Vessels (Part 505), and the repair of pressure relief valves, as described in Section 505.2500(b) are conducted in accordance with Section 505.2500(a)(1 )(A) of these rules.

Section 505.2500(a)(1 )(A) requires that the Company apply an approved Quality Assurance (QA) Program to such repairs and alterations and describe how it is applied. The following describes the Company's application of these rules.

- The Company has a QA Program that is reviewed and accepted by the NRC. In addition, the QA Program is reviewed and accepted by an accredited Authorized Inspection Agency. Authorized Inspectors are present at each of the Company's plants while ASME Code work is in progress.

- Chapter 1 of this QA Program describes the authority and responsibilities of the organization. It also describes the retention of responsibility by the Company when repair and modification activities are subcontracted.

- Chapter 3 requires that design and changes to designs be defined, documented, and controlled.

Page 3 of 6 Revision 90

APPENDIX A AUGMENTED QUALITY

- Chapter 5 requires that all work be accomplished in accordance with documented instructions and procedures and be subject to appropriate process controls. Specifically, the Company uses the Nuclear Work Request (NWR) to authorize, track, and control work in the plant. The NWR system includes provisions for specifying when work is ASME Code related and is not limited to any particular section of the ASME Code. It further provides for detailed instructions to accomplish the work. This includes the need for qualified inspectors, qualified welders, qualified procedures, special processes, required documentation, approved drawings, and post-maintenance/post-modification testing. NWRs marked as ASME Code work is offered to the Authorized Inspector for the insertion of hold and witness points.

- Chapters 4, 7, 8, and 13 address the procurement, receiving, handling, storage, disbursement, and marking of materials. Implementing procedures establish traceability of materials to the procurement and receiving processes and provide assurance that only ASME Code acceptable materials are utilized. Any specific requirements for heat traceability will be in accordance with the applicable sections of the ASME Code being used.

- Chapter 9 details the controls for special processes while Chapter 10 details those for inspection. This includes the requirement for the use of independent, qualified inspectors and examiners when required by the ASME Code, and invokes the Company's Special Processes and Procedures Manual (SPPM). The SPPM is also reviewed and accepted by the Authorized Inspection Agency.

- Chapters 6 and 17 require that documents and records be generated and maintained to satisfy the requirements of the ASME Code and the Jurisdiction.

- Chapter 18 provides for overview and audit of ASME Code activities.

Repairs and alterations performed as described above meet the requirements of the approved QA Program and meet the requirements of the IEMA B&PV rules; regardless of the safety classification of the boiler or pressure vessel or pressure relief valve being repaired.

2.8. Dry Cask Storage System 2.8.1. Limerick, Peach Bottom, Oyster Creek, Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, and Nine Mile Point ISFSI quality assurance program requirements are performed in accordance with the applicable I0CFR72.212 report which invokes the portions of the NRC approved 10OCFR50 Appendix B quality assurance program as described in this QATR, commensurate with the safety classification of the component and quality requirements specified in the cask vendor Final Safety Analysis Report (ESAR) or site specific license.

Page 4 of 6 Revision 90

AUGMENTED QUALITY APPENDIX A 2.8.2. Braidwood, Byron, Clinton, Dresden, LaSalle and Quad Cities Station(s)

The ISFSI SSCs that are important to safety are categorized as Category A, B, or C in accordance with NUREG/CR-6407, "Classification of Transportation Packaging and Dry Spent Fuel Storage System Components According to Importance to Safety." Per 10CFR72, Subpart G, the QATR applies to the ISFSI SSCs and activities consistent with their importance to safety as identified in the classification table on next page identifies the graded approach and applicability of the Exelon QA Program Chapters based on the safety categories that are defined in NUREG/CR-6407.

2.9. Emergency Planning Requirements with respect to audits and records for Emergency Preparedness are described in an Emergency Plan that meets the requirements of 10CFR50.47.

2.10. Security Requirements with respect to audits and records for Security are controlled for each station by an NRC approved Station Security Plan that is prepared and implemented in accordance with the requirements contained in 10CFR73.55.

2.11 License Renewal Consistent with the requirements of 10 CFR 54.21 (a)(3), the company implements the requirements of QATR Chapters 1 through 18 for aging management activities related to safety related SSCs.

Additionally, to manage the aging effects of non-safety related SSCs that were determined to be within the scope of License Renewal, the company implements the administrative controls, corrective actions and confirmation processes described in QATR Chapters 6, 16 and the applicable requirements of this appendix.

Revision 90 Revision 90 Page 5 Page of 6 5 of 6

AUGMENTED QUALITY APPENDIX A AUGMENTED QUALITY APPENDIX A ISFSI REQUIREMENTS Important to Safety SSCs Category Chapter Title

__ _ _ _ _ _ _ A B C Organization 1M M R (Roles and Responsibilities)________

Quality Assurance Program 2 M M NR (Paragraphs 2.1, 2.4, 2.5, and 2.6) ______

3 Design Control M M R 4 Procurement Document Control M R NR 5 Instructions, Procedures, and Drawings M M R 6 Document Control M M R Control of Purchase Material, Equipment, andMRR ServicesMRR 8 Identification ComponentsMRR and Control of Materials, Parts, andMRR 9 Control of Special Processes M M R 10 Inspections M M R Test Control

,11 (Design, Fabrication, Installation, and Maintenance) M M R 12 Control of Measuring, and Test Equipment M M R 13 Handling, Storage, and Shipping M R NR 14 Inspection, Test, and Operating Status M M NR 15 Nonconforming Materials, Parts, or Components M M R 16 Corrective Action M M R 17 Quality Assurance Records M M R 18 Audits M M R (M) Mandatory = Indicates the Appendix B QA Program shall be used.

(R) Recommended = Indicates application of the applicable quality assurance criterion may benefit the user.

The Engineering organization shall determine the extent of application required for the SSCs in question.

O (NR) Not Required = Indicates that little benefit has been identified or no regulatory basis has been found to require application of applicable QA criteria. Imprudent use of this criterion may add unnecessary burden.

Revision 90 Revision 90 Page 66 of Page of 66

AUDITFREQUENCY APPENDIX B Internal audits shall be conducted on a performance driven frequency, not to exceed 24 months or at the frequencies indicated below, in accordance with the Company's QAP. Audits shall include the following safety-related functions as applicable:

AUDIT FREQUENCY

a. The conformance of unit operation to provisions contained within 24 Months the technical specifications and applicable license conditions.

b. The adherence to procedures, training, and qualification of the 24Mnh station staff.

c. The results of actions taken to correct deficiencies occurring in 24 Months facility equipment, structures, systems, components, or method of operation that affect nuclear safety (CAP).

d. The performance of activities required by the Quality Assurance 24 Months Program to meet the criteria of Appendix B of 10OCFR5O.

• Chemistry

• Engineering - Design Control,

• Engineering - Programs

• Procurement / Materials Management

• Maintenance

• Nuclear Fuels

• Operations

• Quality Assurance Functions (internal and vendor audit\

assessment activities are evaluated by NIEP.)

e. The fire protection programmatic controls including the 24 Months implementing procedures (by qualified Nuclear Oversight personnel).

f. The fire protection equipment and program implementation, 24 Months including loss prevention, utilizing either a qualified offsite licensee fire protection engineer or an outside, independent fire protection consultant. An outside, independent fire protection consultant shall be used at least every second year.

g. The Radiological Environmental Monitoring Program (REMP) 24 Months and its results.

h. The Offsite Dose Calculation Manual (ODCM) and implementing 24 Months procedures.

Page 1 of 3 Revision 90

AUDIT FREQUENCY APPENDIX B AUI RQECYAPNI AUDIT FREQUENCY

i. The Process Control Program (PCP) and implementing 24 Months procedures for the solidification of radioactive wastes.

j. The non-radiological environmental monitoring activities required 24 Months by the Appendix B of the Facility Operating Licenses. (Note:

Dresden and TMI do not have an Environmental Appendix to their Facility Operating Licenses.)

k. Randomly selected procedures to ensure that the programmatic 24 Months control processes used to assure that procedures are technically and administratively correct prior to use are resulting in timely and accurate procedure revisions.

I.The Security Plan and implementing procedures per 10CFR73.55 24 Months Minimally review each element of the physical protection program at least every 24 months. Including:

(i) Within 12 months following initial implementation of the physical protection program or a change to personnel, procedures, equipment, or facilities that potentially could adversely affect security.

(ii)As necessary based upon site-specific analyses, assessments, or other performance indicators.

(Reference 10OCFR73.55 and 10OCFR50.54(p)(3)(ii))

m. The Emergency Plan and implementing procedures (Reference 12 Months 10OCFR50.54(t)(1 )(ii) for lesser frequency requirements).

n. Deleted

o. The conformance of Spent Fuel Storage Installation operation to 24 Months provisions contained within the technical specifications and applicable license conditions and results of actions taken to correct deficiencies occurring in facility equipment, structures, syst'ems, components, or methods of operation affecting nuclear safety (Reference NUREGICR-6407, and 10CFR72, Subpart G)

(ISFSI sites only).

p. Access Authorization Program (10OCFR73.56) 24 Months (Initial Audit frequency is 12 months and 24 months thereafter)

(Ref. RIS 2005-14)

q. Personnel Access Data System (PADS) (10CFR73.56) 24 Months (Initial Audit frequency is 12 months and 24 months thereafter)

(Ref RIS 2005-14) _______

Page 2 of 3 Revision 90

AUDITFREQUENCY APPENDIX B AUDIT FREQUENCY

r. Deleted

s. Fitness For Duty (FFD) Program (10CFR26.41) 24 Months

t. Station Black Out (Reg. Guide 1.155, Appendix A)24Mnh Audits should be conducted and documented to verify compliance with design and procurement documents, instructions, procedures, drawings, and inspection and test activities developed to comply with 100FR50.63. (Dresden, LaSalle, Limerick, Oyster Creek, Quad Cities, and Three Mile Island Only)

u. Radiation Protection activities as defined in I0CFR20.24Mnh

v. Plant Operations Review Committee (PORC) 24 Months

w. Decommissioned Units 24 Months

x. Cyber Security Program (10CFR 73.55(m)). 24 Months (Initial Audit frequency is 12 months and 24 months thereafter)

Revision 90 Page 33 of Page of 33 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C 1.1. Codes and Standards The QAP takes into account the need for special controls, processes, test equipment, tools, and skills necessary to attain the required quality and the need for the verification of quality by inspection and test. The Codes and Standards listed below represent a listing of quality assurance codes and standards used to define the quality assurance program. A general listing of quality assurance related codes and standards, such as: ASME B&PV, ANSI, AWS, and IEEE used throughout Exelon at each nuclear site can be found in the applicable site specific Updated Final Safety Analysis Reports (UFSARs). The UFSAR should be referenced to identify site-specific commitments (including dates and/or addendas) with respect to these codes and standards. This Quality Assurance Program (QAP) complies with the quality requirements of the following codes and standards as indicated in site specific UFSARs unless otherwise noted in sub-section 1.3 (the UFSAR may address position specific exceptions or clarifications on a site by site basis).

- ANSI N18.1 - 1971, "Selection and Training of Nuclear Power Plant Personnel" (For Braidwood, Byron, Dresden, LaSalle, Peach Bottom, Quad Cities, Licensed Operators shall comply only with the requirements of 10 CFR 55) *Dresden, *LaSalle, *Oyster Creek (for RP personnel),

• Peach Bottom, *Quad Cities, and *TMI (RP and RP Supervisors only)

(* per station Technical Specification, this does not include the Lead HP/RP person, who shall meet Reg. Guide 1.8)

- ANSI /ANS 3.1 -1978, "American National Standard for Selection and Training of Nuclear Power Plant Personnel" (Applicable to Clinton (for non-licensed personnel), Limerick, Oyster Creek, and TMI) (For Clinton, Limerick, Oyster Creek, and TMI , Licensed Operators shall comply only with the requirements of 10 CFR 55)

- ANSI /ANS 3.1 -1981, "Selection, Qualification and Training of personnel for Nuclear Power Plants" Applies to Peach Bottom (for SQRs), LaSalle (for reactor engineers), and Clinton (for chemistry supervisors).

- For Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, and Nine Mile Point, Licensed Operators shall comply with the requirements of 10 CFR 55.

- ANSI N18.7-1 976 /ANS 3.2, "Administrative Controls and Quality Assurance for the Operational Phase of Nuclear Power Plants."

(Applicable to Limerick, Oyster Creek, TMI, and Clinton Only)

- ANSI N18.7-1972 "Administrative Controls for Nuclear Power Plants" (Applicable to Peach Bottom Only)

- ANSI / ANS 3.2 - 1988, "Administrative Controls and Quality Assurance for the Operational Phase of Nuclear Power Plants." (Exception - Exelon will implement the requirements of 10OCFR26 for control of work hours in lieu of those specified in section 5.2.1.7 of this standard.)(Applicable to Braidwood, Byron, Dresden, LaSalle, and Quad Cities Only)

- ASME NQA-1 (1994) (Revision and Consolidation of ASME NQA-1 -1989 and ASME NQA-2-1 989 Editions) "Quality Assurance Requirements for Nuclear Facility Applications" Part I, "Basic Requirements and Page 1 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C Supplementary Requirements for Nuclear Facilities; Part II, "Quality Assurance Requirements for Nuclear Facility Applications;" and Part Ill, "Nonmandatory Appendices," limited to Appendix 2A-1, "Nonmandatory Guidance on Qualifications of Inspection and Test Personnel," and Appendix 17A-1, Nonmandatory Guidance on Quality Assurance Records."

Exception: Exelon qualifies personnel in accordance with the applicable editions of the codes and standards accepted by the NRC as identified in Company NDE procedures and the Station ISI plans in lieu of SNT-TC-1A, June 1980, as specified in NQA-1, 1994, Supplement 2S-2.

As noted above, the plants in the Exelon Fleet comply with the ANSI standards associated with administrative controls and quality assurance for the operational phase of nuclear power plant operation. Each plant complies with their specific standards with the following exception:

The independent review of Technical Specification changes, license amendments, or Emergency Plan changes shall be performed by the PORC.

NSRB review and approval of Technical Specification changes, license amendments, or Emergency Plan changes is not required.

1.2. Regulatory Guides Although the QAP complies with the regulatory positions and programmatic quality requirements of the Regulatory Guides identified in this section, the site specific Clarifications and Exemptions identified in section 1.3 should always be verified by reviewing the applicable site specific Updated Final Safety Analysis Report (UFSAR).

- 1 .8, "Personnel Qualification and Training."

- 1.26, "Quality Group Classification and Standards for Nuclear Power Plants."

- 1.28, "Quality Assurance Program Requirements for Design and Construction."

- 1.29, "Seismic Design Classification."

- 1 .31 , "Control of Ferrite Content in Stainless Steel Weld Material"

- 1.33, "Quality Assurance Program Requirements."

Exceptions: Audits will be at the frequency defined in Appendix B of this QATR and PORC review and approval of new or revised administrative procedures recommended by RG 1.33 is not required. (Ref. SER from USNRC to C.G. Pardee, dated Sept. 29, 2008)

- 1.68, "Pre-Operational and Initial Start-Up Test Programs for Water Cooled Reactors."

- 1.142, "Safety Related Concrete Structures for Nuclear Power Plants."

- 1.143, "Design Guidance for Radioactive Waste Management SSCs Installed in Light Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants."

- 4.15 "quality Assurance for Radiological Monitoring Programs (Normal Operations) - Effluent Streams and the Environment."

Page 2 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C 1.3. Site Specific Clarifications and Exceptions 1.3.1. Limerick (LGS) and Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station (PBAPS)

1. Regulatory Guide 1.33," Quality Assurance Program Requirements, (Operations)," endorses ANSI N18.7.

LGS shall comply with Regulatory Guide 1.33, Revision 2, February 1978, and ANSI N 18.7-1976/ANS-3.2, "Administrative Controls and Quality Assurance for the Operational Phase of Nuclear Power Plants"' during the operational phase except for the following clarifications or alternatives.

A. ANSI N18.7-1976/ANS-3.2, Section 5.2.2, Procedure Adherence -

The term "supervisor in charge of the shift" means either the Shift Manager or Shift Supervisor.

B. ANSI N18.7-1976/ANS-3.2, Section 5.2.7.1, Maintenance Programs:

1. Emergency maintenance to safety-related equipment (work which must proceed immediately to correct a degraded condition) may be performed concurrent with procedure preparation and documentation of steps actually taken. Such maintenance may be performed with the authorization of designated personnel and subsequent procedure review by the PORC and/or SQR, per Technical Specification requirements.

2. The cause of repetitive malfunctions should be determined; however, it is not practical, and may not be possible, to determine the cause of every malfunction.

C. ANSI N18.7-1976/ANS-3.2, Section 5.2.10, "Housekeeping and Cleanliness Control".

1. Control measures to prevent contamination with foreign materials will be specified in administrative procedures and will include, as appropriate, access control.

2. Second paragraph, first and second sentences are taken to mean: "Where needed to prevent contamination .... "

D. ANSI N18.7-1976/ANS-3.2, Section 5.2.13, "Procurement and Materials Control" - Item (1) - Administrative procedures shall specify the means for control of procurement of commercially "off-the-shelf' items. The administrative procedures shall describe the receipt inspection, storage, and handling prior to installation and operation.

Off-the-shelf (catalog) items are evaluated by qualified personnel for their intended use. The administrative procedures restrict the use of catalog items for only these evaluated applications. The purchase order shall require the vendor to notify the requisitioning organization of a change in an item described in the catalog.

E. ANSI N18.7-1976/ANS-3.2, Section 5.2.13.1, "Procurement Document Control," (second sentence) - QA Program requirements or alternate approved methods will be used to ensure quality. Examples of alternates for suppliers without QA programs include material analysis, Page 3 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C sample testing, in-process inspection and monitoring, and design review by LGS/PBAPS.

F. ANSI N18.7-1976/ANS-3.2, Section 5.2.15, "Review, Approval and Control of Procedures" - The frequency of review of plant procedures is discussed in UFSAR Section 13.5, except for the following alternative.

1. Programmatic controls and processes described in UFSAR Section 13.5 are used to assure that procedures are current.

These controls take the place of scheduled periodic reviews G. Emergency / Abnormal procedures do not require biennial review based on the equivalent processes noted in NO-AA-10, Chapter 6, Section 2.1.

2. Regulatory Guide 1.143, Revision 1, October 1979, "Design Guidance for Radioactive Waste Management Systems, Structures, and Components Installed in Light-Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants."

LGS shall comply with Regulatory Guide 1.143, Revision 1, October 1979, for major modifications, subject to the exceptions and clarifications listed in LGS UFSAR Table 3.2-1, Note 18.

3. ASTM D3843-93, "Standard Practice for Quality Assurance for Protective Coatings applied to Nuclear Facilities."

LGS/PBAPS shall comply with ASTM D3843-93 for safety-related protective coating work in service level 1 areas during operation with the following additional clarification, exception, and requirement.

A. For coating formulations developed prior to issuance of ASTM 03843-93, service level 1 qualification based on ANSI N5.9 (Revised as ANSI N512-1 974) and ANSI N101.2 remains valid.

B. Section 10.1, last sentence - instead of references to ANSI 45.2 and NQA-1, inspections will be documented for record purposes as required by 10OCFR50, Appendix B, and by this QA program description.

C. Limitations on use of coatings and cleaning materials which contain elements which could contribute to corrosion, inter-granular cracking, or stress corrosion cracking of safety-related stainless steel will be followed as described in Section C.4 of regulatory Guide 1.54, June 1973.

4. Branch Technical Position (BTP) CMEB 9.5-1:

For modification work performed by Exelon Engineering during the operations phase, Exelon Engineering will maintain compliance with the requirements of CMEB 9.5-1 in accordance with Section 9.5.1.

Page 4 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C

5. NQA-1, 1994 Supplement 2S-2 PBAPS will comply with NQA-1, 1995 Supplement 2S-2 except for the following clarification.

A. NQA-1, 1995 Supplement 2S-2 states that SNT-TC-IA, June 1980 shall apply for personnel performing NDE. PBAPS personnel who perform ISFSl cask leak testing or approve ISFSI leak test procedures and test results and direct or supervise the conduct of ISFSI leak tests shall be qualified to either SNT-TC-IA or ANSI N18.1-1 971.

1.3.2. Oyster Creek (OCNGS) and Three Mile Island (TMI) Stations

1. RG 1.8, Revision 1-R (May 1977), Personnel Selection and Training TMI and OC3GS take the following Exceptions Clarifications.

A. Guidelines have long been established in the company with respect to awarding jobs to plant maintenance, operations, and other bargaining unit personnel who may be involved in testing, examination and inspection activities. Personnel are qualified in accordance with the job description manual. Exelon believes that the requirements specified in the job description manual meet the intent, and in many cases, exceed the requirements of ANSI N18.1. It is envisioned that there may be certain specific cases where an individual will be considered qualified because the individual has been evaluated as being capable of performing a job, even though the individual does not meet the detailed guidance contained in ANSI N18.1 with respect to length of experience and formal training.

B. The unit staff and the corporate organizations have been upgraded to meet ANS/ANSI 3.1-1 978 except as otherwise noted in the technical specifications.

C3. Licensed operators shall comply only with the requirements of 10 CEFR 55.

Revision 90 Revision 90 Page 5 Page of 17 5 of 17

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C

2. Regulatory Guide 1.26, Quality Group Classification and Standards For Nuclear Power Plants, Rev 3 February 1976. TMI and OCGS will comply with this guide with the following exceptions:

A. For modifications to existing plant systems, items will be classified by site engineering according to the original design basis, or this guide. This classification will not degrade the safety of the system being modified.

B. Additions to existing plant systems will be designed and constructed to the same codes, standards, and technical requirements which were originally applied to the system to which the addition is to be made, or more recent versions of these codes, standards, and technical requirements. The addition will not degrade the safety of the system being added to.

C. For new construction, the latest applicable codes will be utilized, unless such utilization would result in hardship or unusual difficulty without providing an equivalent level of safety.

3. Regulatory Guide 1.33, Rev. 2, February 1978, "Quality Assurance Program Requirements (Operation)."

The stations comply with the Regulatory Position of this Guide with the following clarifications:

A. Paragraph 5.2.2 of ANSI N 18.7-1 976, titled "Procedure Adherence."

In accordance with Section 6.8.3 of the OCNGS and TMI Technical Specifications, temporary changes shall be approved by two members of the Company's management staff qualified as a 50.59 Evaluator/Reviewer who meets the qualification criteria of QATR Appendix G, Sections 2.2.1.14 and 2.3.1.14 and knowledgeable in the area affected by the procedure. For changes, which may affect the operational status of facility systems or equipment, at least one of these individuals shall be a member of facility management or supervision holding a Senior Reactor Operator's License on the facility.

B. Paragraph 5.2.15 of ANSI N18.7 - 1976, titled "Review, Approval and Control of Procedures." The third sentence of the third paragraph is interpreted to mean that applicable procedures shall be reviewed following a reportable incident such as an accident, an unexpected transient, significant operator error, or equipment malfunction. In addition, the fourth paragraph is modified to state that the periodic review of procedures shall include the following four elements; a) At least every two years, Nuclear Oversight will assess a representative sample of plant procedures that are used more frequently than every two years.

Page 6 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C b) All applicable plant procedures will be reviewed as described in paragraph no. 5.2.15 of ANSI N18.7-1976 as per the noted clarification described for the third sentence of the third paragraph.

c) Plant procedures that have been used at least biennially receive scrutiny by individuals knowledgeable in procedures and are updated as necessary to ensure adequacy during suitable controlled activities.

d) Plant procedures that have not been used for two years will be reviewed before use or biennially to determine if changes are necessary or desirable.

4. Regulatory Guide 1.54, June 1973, "Quality Assurance Requirements for Protective Coatings Applied to Water Cooled Nuclear Power Plants."

The OCNGS and TMI QAP complies with this Guide with the following clarifications:

A. The Company will comply with the Regulatory Position established in this Regulatory Guide in that programmatic/administrative quality assurance requirements included therein shall apply to maintenance and modification activities, even though such requirements were not in effect originally. Technical requirements associated with maintenance and modifications (e.g., code requirements, material properties, design margins, manufacturing processes, and inspection requirements) shall be the original requirements or better.

B. The quality assurance program for protective coatings includes the planned and systematic actions necessary to provide adequate confidence that shop or field coating work for nuclear facilities will perform satisfactorily in service.

C. All protective coatings applied to surfaces within containment, except those noted in 3 below, are tested to demonstrate that they can withstand LOCA conditions. These tests are performed in accordance with Section 4 of ANSI N101.2, "Protective Coatings (Paints) for Light Water Nuclear Reactor Containment Facilities,"

under LOCA conditions, which equal or exceed those described in the FSAR.

D. The quality assurance program is applied to protective coatings consistent with the nature and scope of work specified in the Technical Specifications. The following elements are included:

1. Preparation of coatings specifications and procedures for generic coating materials/systems.

2. Review and evaluation of coating manufacturers' demonstration test data and quality assurance measures for control of manufacture, identification, and performance verification of applied coating systems.

Page 7 of 17 Revision 90 I

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C

3. Review and evaluation of supplier quality assurance measures to control storage and handling, surface preparation, application, touch-up, repair, curing and inspection of the coating systems.

4. Training and qualification of inspection personnel in coatings inspection requirements.

5. Supplier surveillance inspection.

E. The coatings qualification program and the associated quality assurance requirements are necessary only for coatings whose failure or failure mechanism would have a significant effect on safety.

F. Regulatory Guide 1.54 is not imposed for:

1. Surfaces to be insulated.

2. Surfaces "contained" within a cabinet or enclosure (for example, the interior surfaces of ducts).

3. Field repair on any Q-class coated item of less than 30 square inches surface area, such as; cut ends or otherwise damaged galvanizing; bolt heads, nuts, and miscellaneous fasteners; and damage resulting from spot, tack, or stud welding.

4. Field touch-up and repair of larger areas shall be in accordance with item A.

5. Small "production line" items such as small motors, hand wheels, electrical cabinets, control panels, loudspeakers, etc., where special painting requirements would be impracticable.

6. Stainless steel or galvanized surfaces.

7. Coating used for the banding of piping.

8. Strippable coatings used for cleanup.

G. Quality assurance documentation may not be similar to records and documents listed in Sections 7.4 through 7.8 of ANSI NI101.4, but will be evaluated to assure that they provide at least the same degree of documentation as required by this standard.

5. Regulatory Guide 1.58, Rev. 1, September 1980, "Qualifications of Nuclear Power Plant Inspection, Examination, and Testing Personnel."

The OCNGS and TMI QAP complies with this Guide with the following clarifications:

A. Plant operation personnel may be utilized to perform the visual leakage examinations required by the edition of ASME Section Xl and related codes currently committed to for the conduct of in-service inspections. Such personnel shall be qualified consistent with these ASME Code requirements. The selection Page 8ofl17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C and qualification of such personnel shall be prescribed by a procedure(s).

B. Not all personnel who review and approve inspection and testing procedures, evaluate the adequacy of activities to accomplish the inspection and test objectives, evaluate the adequacy of specific programs used to train and test inspection and test personnel, or certify Level III individuals in specific categories or classes, will be certified as meeting the Level III capability requirements of ANSI N45.2.6-1 978 (NQA-1). Rather, these personnel will be determined by management to be fully qualified and competent to perform these functions through, evaluation of their education, experience and training. The basis for the determination will be documented.

6. Regulatory Guide 1.123, Rev. 1, July 1977, "Quality Assurance Requirements for Control of Procurement of Items and Services for Nuclear Power Plants."

The OCNGS and TMI QAP complies with this Guide with the following clarifications:

A. Section 4.2.a of ANSI N45.2.13-1976. When evaluation of a supplier is based solely on historical supplier data, these data will primarily include records that have been accumulated in connection with previous procurement actions. Data that includes experience of users of identical or similar products of the prospective supplier and product operating experience will be used if available.

B. Section 10.2.f, Verification of the Validity of Supplier Certificates and the Effectiveness of the Certification System, is as follows:

The verification of the validity of supplier certificates and the effectiveness of the certification system are accomplished as an integral part of the total supplier control and product acceptance program, and no separate Company system exists that addresses itself solely to such verification. The degree of verification required will depend upon the type of item or service and their safety importance. The means of verification may include source witness/hold points, source audits, and document reviews; independent inspections at the time of material receipt; user tests on selected commodities, such as concrete components; and tests on selected components and systems after installation. All of these means verify whether or not a supplier has fulfilled procurement document requirements and whether or not a certification system is effective.

7. Regulatory Guide 1.142, October 1981, "Safety-Related Concrete Structures for Nuclear Power Plants (Other Than Reactor Vessels and Containments)."

A. The Company shall comply with the Regulatory Position established in this Regulatory Guide as augmented by ANSI Page 9 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C N45.2.5, ANSI/ANS 6.4-1977, and ANSI/ACI 318-77 for the design and construction of new Safety Related or Augmented Quality structures, and additions to existing Safety Related or Augmented Quality structures. Inspectors will be qualified according to either ANSI N45.2.6 or Appendix VII of Section III, Division 2, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

8. Regulatory Guide 1.143, October 1979, "Design Guidance for Radioactive Waste Management Systems, Structures and Components Installed in Light-Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants."

Since OCNGS and TMI were originally designed and constructed to different classification criteria than those contained in this Guide; the Company will comply with the Regulatory Position of this Guide with the following clarifications:

A. For modifications to existing plant systems, items will be classified by Site Engineering according to the original design basis, or this Guide. This classification will not degrade the safety of the system being modified.

B. Additions to existing plant systems will be designed and constructed to the same codes, standards, and technical requirements which were originally applied to the system to which the addition is to be made, or more recent versions of these codes, standards, and technical requirements. The addition will not degrade the safety of the system being added to.

C. For new construction, the latest applicable codes will be utilized, unless such utilization would result in hardship or unusual difficulty without providing an equivalent level of safety.

D. Hose may be used in lieu of pipe where the connections are temporary. The anticipated applications of hose would normally be (1) connections to contractor owned skid mounted radioactive waste processing equipment, (2) connections to a non-mounted, frequently-changed component such as a burial liner/H IC, or (3) connections to non-mounted pieces of radioactive waste processing or collection equipment which must be readily removable (e.g., items placed on equipment hatches). The pressure rating of such hoses and connections shall equal or exceed those of the systems or components to which they are connected.

1. Prior to use, the hoses shall be hydro-tested to the appropriate pressure for the system or component to which they will be connected. After installation, they will receive regular hydro-testing or in-service inspections.

2. A 50.59 review process is required to justify the use of such hose connections.

Page 10 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C 1.3.3 Clinton Power Station (CPS)

1. The CPS QAPD also includes the following sections of the Operations Requirements Manual (ORM) and the Updated Safety Analysis Report (USAR). The specific sections are as follows:

A. ORM Section 6.8.2, Procedures and Programs - Review and Approval B. ORM Section 6.8.3, Procedures and Programs -Temporary Changes C. USAR Section 13.4 D. USAR Table 3.2-1

2. Site specific clarifications and exceptions applicable to Clinton Power Station include:

A. The CPS USAR Section 1.8, "Conformance to NRC Regulatory Guides", which provides the CPS project position for implementation of regulatory guides, includes additional clarifications and exceptions to the regulatory guides.

B. CPS complies with RG 1.8 (Proposed Rev 2), "Personnel Qualification and Training." (Also reference USAR Section 1.8.)

C. CPS complies with Regulatory Guide 1.33, Rev. 2 (February 1978);

"Quality Assurance Program Requirements (Operation)." CPS complies with this guide and with the following additional exception:

1. ANSI N18.7-1976/ANS-3.2, Section 5.2.17 Inspections: During plant operations emergencies, inspections may be performed under the direction of the duty shift manager.

1.3.4 Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, and Nine Mile Point

1. Regulatory Guide 1.16, (revision facility -specific), "Reporting of Operating Information" - The commitment to this Regulatory Guide is facility-specific as described in the approved Safety Analysis Report (SAR) or License for each nuclear facility. Where items do not conform to the requirements of the Regulatory Guide, they are addressed in the facility specific SAR.

2. Regulatory Guide 1.26, Revision (facility -specific), "Quality Group Classifications and Standards for Water-, Steam-, and Radioactive Waste-Containing Components of Nuclear Power Plants" - Commitment to Safety/Regulatory Guide 1.26 is facility-specific, as required by the approved SAR/License at each nuclear facility. Sites may use this guidance to assist in establishing the lists of equipment to which this QA program applies, or for other purposes.

3. Regulatory Guide 1.28, Revision 3, August 1985, "Quality Assurance Program Requirements (Design and Construction)" (ASME NQA-1, 1983a) - Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna will implement the requirements and guidance of the Page 11 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C standard and Regulatory Guide during the design and construction phases of the facilities subject to the following:

a. Regulatory Position C endorses the basic and supplementary requirements of ANSI/ASME NQA-1-1983 and the ANSI/ASME NQA-1a-1983 Addenda. In place of the specific edition and addenda of NQA-1 addressed in the Regulatory Guide, Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna commit to implement the requirements of NQA-1 -1994 Part I.

Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, and Nine Mile Point are not committed to Part II of NQA-1 unless otherwise noted. The commitment to these requirements and any exceptions/alternatives to these requirements are addressed in this QATR.

4. In establishing qualification and training programs, Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, and Nine Mile commits to compliance with NQA-1-1994 Basic Requirement 2 and Supplements 2S-1, 2S-2, 2S-3 and 2S-4, with the following alternatives and exceptions:

a. For Supplement 2S-1: Inspections, examinations or tests may be performed by individuals in the same organization as that which performed the work, provided that (a) the qualifications of the inspector for an activity are the same as the minimum qualifications for persons performing the activity, (b) the work is within the skills of personnel and/or is addressed by procedures, and (c) if work involves breaching a pressure-retaining item, the quality of the work can be demonstrated through a functional test.

When a, b and c are not met, inspections, examinations or tests are carried out by individuals certified in accordance with Supplement 2S-1.

Individuals performing visual inspections required by the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code are qualified and certified according to Code requirements.

b. In lieu of being certified as Level I, II or Ill in accordance with Non-Mandatory Appendix 2A-1 of NQA-1 -1 994, personnel performing operations phase independent quality verification inspections, examinations, measurements, or tests on material, products or activities, that are in the same organization as that which performed the work, will be required to possess the same minimum level of qualification as that required for performing the task being verified. The verification shall be within the skills of these personnel and/or is addressed by procedures.

These individuals will also be trained and certified to perform inspections in a manner consistent with a Level I quality inspector. The inspectors will be authorized to accept or reject the work being inspected. The results of inspections by these individuals will be reviewed by a certified Level II or higher quality inspector. These individuals will not be responsible for the planning of quality verification inspections and tests (i.e. establishing hold points and acceptance criteria in procedures, or determining who will be responsible for performing the inspections), evaluating inspection training programs, or certifying inspection personnel.

5. Regulatory Guide 1.29, Revision (facility-specific) "Seismic Design Classification"

- Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna may have been designed, constructed and licensed based on criteria available prior to this Regulatory Guide being Page12 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C issued. The specific design criteria and seismic designations are reflected in each plant's SAR, and in other docketed analysis. Thus, the commitment to Safety/Regulatory Guide 1.29 is facility-specific, as required by the approved SAR/License at each facility. Sites may use this guidance in establishing the lists of equipment to which this QA program applies, or for other purposes.

6. Regulatory Guide 1.30, August 1972, "Quality Assurance Requirements for the Installation, Inspection and Testing of Instrumentation and Electric Equipment,"

(ANSI N45.2.4-1 972/IEEE 336-1971 ):

a. Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point, and Ginna commits to ANSI N45.2.4-1972/IEEE 336-1971 in its commitment to Position C of Regulatory Guide 1.30.

b. As noted in Regulatory Position 0.1, ANSI N45.2.4-1972 is being used in conjunction with NQA-1 -1 994, Part I, which replaced ANSI N45.2.

c. As noted in Regulatory Position 0.2, other industry standards may be referenced. The commitment in this QATR to ANSI N45.2.4-1 972 includes commitment to those standards to the extent necessary to implement ANSI N45.2.4-1 972 requirements. If NRC guidance applies to those referenced standards, it is followed.

d. Consistent with Regulatory Position C.3, the requirements of the endorsed standard are also considered applicable during the operation phase of the nuclear power plant.

e. In lieu of the requirements of the last paragraph of ANSI N45.2.4-1 972 Section 6.2.1, the calibration program at Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna does not use calibration stickers on installed plant instrumentation that contain the date of calibration and identity of person that performed the calibration. Calibrations of instruments are scheduled and tracked by a computer database.

7. Regulatory Guide 1.33, Revision 2, February 1978, "Quality Assurance Program Requirements (Operation)" (ANSI N18.7-1 976/ANS-3.2):

a. NQA-1-1994 Part I contains quality assurance requirements equivalent to those of ANSI N18.7-1976/ANS-3.2. Although this QATR complies with the requirements of NQA-1 -1 994 and ANSI N18.7-1976/ANS-3.2, Calvert Cliffs, Ginna and Nine Mile Point does not commit to compliance with the requirements of ANSI N-I18.7-1 976/ANS-3.2 as defined in their Safety Evaluation Report dated December 21, 2006.

b. As recommended by Regulatory Position C.1, Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna uses Appendix A of Regulatory Guide 1.33, Revision 2, as guidance in establishing the types of procedures required for plant operation and support.

c. Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna's commitment to the applicable Regulatory Guides and associated standards listed in Regulatory Position 0.2 is addressed within this QATR. A number of these Regulatory Guides and standards have been incorporated into NQA-1-1 994 Part I.

Page 13 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C

8. Regulatory Guide 1.37, Revision (facility-specific), "Quality Assurance Requirements for Cleaning of Fluid Systems and Associated Components of Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants," (ANSI N45.2.1-1 973) - The commitment to this Regulatory Guide is facility-specific as described in the approved SAR or License for each nuclear facility. Where items do not conform to the requirements of the Regulatory Guide, they are addressed in the applicable facility's SAR.

9. Regulatory Guide 1.38, Revision (facility-specific), "Quality Assurance Requirements for Packaging, Shipping, Receiving, Storage, and Handling of Items for Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants," (ANSI N45.2.2-1 972) - The commitment to this Regulatory Guide is facility-specific as described in the approved SAR or License for each nuclear facility. Where items do not conform to the requirements of the Regulatory Guide, they are addressed in the applicable facility's SAR.

a. This alternative applies to Nine Mile Point Nuclear Station (NMPNS).

NMPNS commits to ANSI/ASME NQA-2-1 983 Part 2.2, "Quality Assurance Requirements for Packaging, Shipping, Receiving, Storage, and Handling of Items for Nuclear Power Plants," for nuclear safety-related activities pertaining directly to permanent plant modifications only. NQA-2-1 983 Section 7.1 refers to NQA-2-1 983 Part 2.15 for requirements related to handling of items. The scope of Part 2.15 includes hoisting, rigging and transporting of items for nuclear power plants. This scope exceeds the scope of the NRC's original endorsement of ANSI N45.2.2 in Regulatory Guide 1.38, and establishes requirements for which there is no NRC regulatory position. In lieu of compliance with Part 2.15, NMPNS is committed to the requirements of applicable heavy load reports for Nine Mile Point Units 1 and 2 that have been approved by the NRC. Unit 2's report is a part of the SAR (Appendix 9C). Unit l's is a separate report.

10. Regulatory Guide 1.39, Revision 2, September 1977, "Housekeeping Requirements for Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants," (ANSI N45.2.3-1 973) -

Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna substitutes NQA-1 -1 994, Subpart 2.3 for N45.2.3 in its commitment to Regulatory Guide 1.39. As noted in Regulatory Position C.1, other industry standards may be referenced; the commitment in this QATR to NQA-1, Subpart 2.3 includes commitment to those standards to the extent necessary to implement Subpart 2.3 requirements. If NRC guidance applies to those referenced standards, it is followed. Regulatory Position C.2 indicates that the provisions of section 3.2.3 of N45.2.3 are not part of the regulatory endorsement. As NQA-1, Subpart 2.3, section 3.2.3 has the same wording as N45.2.3; the Regulatory Position is applicable and will be followed in Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna's implementation of Subpart 2.3.

Regulatory Position C.3 indicates that the endorsed standard is "applicable for housekeeping activities during the operations phase that are comparable to those occurring during construction." This is addressed in appendix C of this QATR, which also establishes any necessary exceptions or alternatives to the provisions of Subpart 2.3.

a. In lieu of the five-level zone designation in Subpart 2.3, Calvert Cliffs, Ginna, and Nine Mile may base its control over housekeeping activities on Page14 ofl17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C a consideration of what is necessary and appropriate for the activity involved. The controls are effected through procedures or instructions.

Factors considered in developing the procedures and instructions include cleanliness control, personnel safety, fire prevention and protection, radiation control and security. The procedures and instructions make use of standard janitorial and work practices to the extent possible.

11. Regulatory Guide 1.54, Revision (facility-specific), "Quality Assurance for Protective Coatings Applied to Nuclear Power Plants" (N101 .4-1 972) - The commitment to this Regulatory Guide is facility-specific as described in the approved SAR or License for each nuclear facility. Where items do not conform to the requirements of the Regulatory Guide, they are addressed in the applicable facility's SAR.

12. Regulatory Guide 1.68, Revision (facility-specific), "Preoperational and Initial Startup Test Programs for Water-Cooled Power Reactors," - The commitment to this Regulatory Guide is facility-specific as described in the approved SAR or License for each nuclear facility. Where items do not conform to the requirements of the Regulatory Guide, they are addressed in the applicable facility's SAR.

13. Regulatory Guide 1.94, Revision (facility-specific), "Quality Assurance Requirements for Installation, Inspection, and Testing of Structural Concrete and Structural Steel During the Construction Phase of Nuclear Power Plants," (ANSI N45.2.5-1 974) - Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna may have been designed, constructed and licensed based on criteria available prior to this Regulatory Guide being issued. The specific installation, inspection, and testing criteria are reflected in each plant's SAR, and in other docketed analysis. Thus, the commitment to Regulatory Guide 1.94 is facility-specific, as required by the approved SAR/License at each facility. Facilities may use this guidance to assist in establishing the equipment to which this QA program applies, or for other purposes.

14. Regulatory Guide 1.116, Revision O-R, May 1977, "Quality Assurance Requirements for Installation, Inspection, and Testing of Mechanical Equipment and Systems," (ANSI N45.2.8-1 975) - Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna substitutes NQA-1-1 994, Subpart 2.8 for N45.2.8 in its commitment to Regulatory Guide 1.116. As noted in Regulatory Position C.1, other industry standards may be referenced; the commitment in this QATR to NQA-1, Subpart 2.8 includes commitment to those standards to the extent necessary to implement Subpart 2.8 requirements. If NRC guidance applies to those referenced standards, it is followed. Regulatory Position C.2 indicates that the endorsed standard should be "followed for those applicable operations phase activities that are comparable to activities occurring during the construction phase." This is addressed in Appendix C of this QATR, which also establishes any necessary exceptions or alternatives to the provisions of Subpart 2.8.

15. Regulatory Guide 1.143, Revision (facility-specific), "Design Guidance for Radioactive Waste Management Systems, Structures and Components Installed in Light-water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants" Commitment to Regulatory Guide 1.143 is facility-specific, as required by the approved SAR at each facility.

Page 15 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C Facilities may use this guidance to assist in establishing the lists of equipment to which this QA program applies, or for other purposes.

16. Regulatory Guide 1.152, Revision 0, November 1985, "Criteria for Programmable Digital Computer System Software in Safety-Related Systems of Nuclear Power Plants" - Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna does not make a commitment to Regulatory Guide 1.152. Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna commit to Generic Letter 95-02, and its endorsement of NUMARC/EPRI Report TR-1 02348, "Guidelines on Licensing Digital Upgrades."

17. Generic Letter 89-02/EPRI-NP-5652 (June 1988)- Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna commits to compliance with the endorsed industry guidance regarding selection and qualification of commercial grade suppliers and dedication of commercial grade items for use in safety related applications.

18. Branch Technical Position CMEB 9.5-1, Revision 2, July 1981 (Positions C.2 and C.4) *-None of the current plants are committed to CMEB 9.5-1. Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna plants are committed to the guidance in Appendix A to Branch Technical Position APCSB 9.5-1, "Guidelines for Fire Protection for Nuclear Power Plants Docketed Prior to July 1, 1976." However, application of the requirements is facility-specific as described in the applicable facility SAR, Fire Protection Program, and License documents.

a. Nine Mile Point Unit 1 is committed tol0 CFR 50.48(c),National Fire Protection Association Standard NEPA 805, "Performance Based Standard for Fire Protection for Light Water Reactor Electric Generating Plants" 2001 Edition per NRC License Amendment number 215 to DPR-63 (ADAMS Accession number ML14126A003) dated 6/30/2014.

b. Ginna is committed to10 CFR 50.48(c),National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 805, "Performance Based Standard for Fire Protection for Light Water Reactor Electric Generating Plants" 2001 Edition per NRC License Amendment number 119 to DPR-1 8 (ADAMS Accession number ML15271A101 dated 11/23/2015

19. Regulatory Guide 4.15, Revision 1, February 1979, "Quality Assurance for Radiological Monitoring Programs (Normal Operations) - Effluent Streams and the Environment" - Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna commits to compliance with the Regulatory Positions of Section C with the following alternatives/exceptions:

a. In lieu of plotting background parameters and setting predetermined control values for gamma spectroscopy instrumentation as described in Regulatory Position C.6.2, background results may be logged and evaluated to ensure the background does not bias reported results.

b. The NRC's independent sampling and analysis program described in Regulatory Position C.6.3.2 may not be performed.

c. In lieu of performing source check calibrations at least once per 18 months as described in Regulatory Position C.7, Calvedt Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna may perform these calibrations at least once per refueling interval.

Page 16 of 17 Revision 90

CODES, STANDARDS, AND GUIDES APPENDIX C

20. Regulatory Guide 7.10, Revision 1, June 1986, "Establishing Quality Assurance Programs for Packaging Used in the Transport of Radioactive Material" - Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna commits to implement the quality assurance guidance for activities related to the packaging and transport of radioactive material that are under its control. Quality Assurance for the design, fabrication and licensing of shipping containers is the responsibility of the container certificate holders.

21. Regulatory Issue Summary 2000-18, October 2000, "Guidance on Managing Quality Assurance Records in Electronic Media" - Should Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point or Ginna choose electronic media storage as a means of maintaining required records, they will comply with the guidance of this Regulatory Issue Summary.

22. Calvert Cliffs, Nine Mile Point and Ginna will use the guidance contained in Generic Letters 91-05 and 89-02/EPRI NP-5652 to procure commercial grade items in lieu of these requirements NQA-1 -1994 Supplement 4S-1 and Supplement 7S-1.

23. INDEPENDENT SAFETY ENGINEERING GROUP ('ISEG)

Independent safety review is performed to meet the individual unit's commitment to NUREG-0737,Section I.B.1.2, "Independent Safety Engineering Group," as described in the unit's safety analysis report, if applicable.

Revision 90 I Page of 17 17 of Page 17 17 Revision 90 I

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D

1. SCOPE This Appendix consists of definitions for words or phrases found in the QAP and provides a common basis for understanding those words or phrases that may have a different meaning when used elsewhere. All words and phrases are subject to review and revision, as circumstances require. Site specific items are noted.

2. GLOSSARY OF TERMS 2.1. Approval Approval as used herein means by signature or initialing and date by an authorized individual.

2.2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section I Refers to ASME Section I, Power Boilers 2.3. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section III, Division I and Division 2 for Concrete Containment Refers to ASME Section III, Division 1 and Division 2 for Concrete Containment; ASME Section III; ASME Code; ASME; or Code.

2.4. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section IV Refers to ASME Section IV, Heating Boilers 2.5. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section VIII Refers to ASME Section VIII, Pressure Vessels 2.6. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section Xl Refers to ASME Section Xl, Rules for In-Service Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components.

2.7. Audit A planned and documented activity performed to determine by investigation, examination, or evaluation of objective evidence the adequacy of and compliance with established procedures, instructions, drawings, and other applicable documents, and the effectiveness of implementation. An audit should not be confused with surveillance or inspection activities performed for the sole purpose of process control or product acceptance.

2.8. Audit Team Leader An individual appointed to lead an Audit Team. The Audit Team Leader coordinates the preparation of the audit report.

2.9. Auditor One qualified and authorized to examine quality assurance practices and verify whether requirements are being met.

Page I of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.10. Augmented D (CPS Only)

A term applied to those components within the Augmented D boundaries as defined in the engineering specifications. See K-2882, USAR Table 3.2.1, and Appendix C of this manual for scope of requirements and boundaries pertaining to Augmented D.

2.11. Authorized Inspector or Al or ANI As used herein is meant to mean Authorized Nuclear Inspector. An Authorized Nuclear Inspector is an employee of an Authorized Inspection Agency who has qualifications for and has been properly accredited for Division 1 or Division 2.

2.12. Authorized Nuclear In-service Inspector or ANII As used herein is meant to mean the Authorized Nuclear In-service Inspector.

An ANII is an employee of an Authorized Inspection Agency who has qualifications for and has been properly accredited for ASME Section XI.

2.13. Balance of Plant Generating station items and equipment not designed, furnished or installed as a part of the Nuclear Steam Supply System. Balance of Plant items include safety-related and ASME Code items, such as the containment as well as non safety-related and non-ASME Code items.

2.14. Basic Component "Basic component", when applied to nuclear power reactors means a plant structure, system, component or part thereof necessary to assure (1) the integrity of the reactor coolant pressure boundary, (2) the capability to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe shutdown condition, or (3) the capability to prevent or mitigate the consequences of accidents which could result in potential offsite exposures comparable to those referred to in 10CFR1 00.11 Chapter 1 (1-1-87), Part 21.

2.15. Bid Package The total of drawings, specifications, codes, standards, quality and other requirements that describes the task on which a prospective contractor/supplier will bid.

2.16. Calibration A method of assuring accuracy of gauges and instruments used for measuring and testing by comparing with recognized standards.

2.17. Certificate of Compliance A written statement signed by a qualified person, attesting that the materials or items are in compliance with the purchasing documents.

2.18. Certified Personnel Personnel who have passed a formal training program and a formal proficiency test for special processes such as welding, plating and nondestructive testing.

Page 2 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.19. Certified Standards Standards of measurement whose accuracy can be traced to standards at the National Institute of Standards and Technology or established standards.

2.20. Certified Material Test Report A document attesting that material is in accordance with specified requirements including the actual results of all required chemical analyses, tests and examinations.

2.21. Change Order A formal award to a vendor or contractor covering revision(s) to the original Purchase Order or Change Order, involving but not limited to quantity, technical requirements, quality assurance requirements or scope of work.

2.22. Change Order Requisition A document describing revisions to be made to the original Purchase Order or subsequent Change Order and which is converted into a Change Order.

2.23. Characteristic Any property or attribute of an item, process or service that is distinct, describable and measurable, as conforming or nonconforming to specified quality requirements. Quality characteristics are generally identified in specifications and drawings, which describe the item, process or service.

2.24. Code See ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section III or Section XI, whichever is applicable.

2.25. code A recognized standard for using or processing materials, or for the skill involved in use or processing.

2.26. Cognizant Engineer The engineer assigned a specific task or area of responsibility in the design or testing of a component or system.

2.27. CornEd Commonwealth Edison Company (an Exelon Company).

2.28. Company Level Ill Chief Level Ill (NDE) for the Company 2.29. Component An item designed and manufactured to perform a specific function within a system. It consists of a combination of parts and will be combined with other components to form an assembly.

And for ASME Page 3 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D ASME Code items such as vessels, concrete containments, piping systems, pumps, valves, core support structures and storage tanks which will be combined with other items to form an assembly or installation of a nuclear power plant.

2.30. Component Identification Number An identification number assigned (where appropriate) to an item for use throughout its lifetime.

2.31. Construction Activities at the building site necessary to erect, inspect and accept a power generating station and its associated installation. This definition applies unless otherwise indicated.

- Construction (ASME Section III Div.1) comprises all activities relating to materials, design fabrication, examination, testing, inspection and certification required in the manufacture and installation of items.

- Construction (ASME Section III Div. 2) includes all those operations required to build the component and its parts in accordance with the Design Drawings and Construction Specification which have been prepared by the Designer (AE).

2.32. Construction Tests Those tests necessary to verify that the installation of each component of a system is complete and complies with the applicable specifications, standards, codes, drawings and engineering information.

2.33. Contract (including purchase order)

A binding agreement between two or more persons or companies.

2.34. Contractor Any organization under contract for furnishing items or services. It includes the terms vendor, supplier, subcontractor, fabricator and sub-tier levels of these where appropriate. A "Code" contractor is a contractor holding a valid ASME Section III Certificate of Authorization.

2.35. Control Point In a sequential operation, a checkpoint at which certain data are taken, inspections are made or approval is required.

2.36. Control Stamp A stamp used to mark a unique identification of inspection or test status upon items, tags, labels, routing cards or records traceable to an item. Control stamp impressions clearly identify the person who applied it such that traceability to their authorization is provided.

2.37. Corrective Action Measures taken to rectify conditions adverse to quality, and, where necessary, to preclude repetition.

Page 4 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.38. Department When a responsibility is given to a department in this Manual it is meant that the department head has the responsibility.

2.39. Design Change Any change in design that may affect functional requirements, operating conditions, safety-, regulatory-, reliability-, and ASME Code-related requirements, performance objectives, plant reliability or design life and would require that affected documentation be changed.

2.40. Design Controls Methods for assuring that basic design requirements are formalized and translated into design documents with proper review to assure the scheduled release of a valid design.

2.41. Design Criteria Statements of the form, function and interface requirements within well defined limitations. "

2.42. Designer (Division 2)

As used in ASME Code Division 2 construction, the Designer (AE) is the organization responsible for the preparation and completion of the Design Report, design drawings, and construction specifications for applicable items.

2.43. Design Requirements Documents that set the functional requirements, operating conditions, safety requirements, performance objectives, design margins and design life. Included are any special requirements for size, weight, ruggedness, materials, fabrications or constructions, testing, maintenance, operating environments, safety margins and derating factors.

2.44. Design Review An analysis of design with respect to technical adequacy, interface control, inspectability, maintainability and conformance to applicable codes, standards, regulations and design criteria.

2.45. Design Specification A document that sets the functional requirements; design requirements; environmental conditions, including radiation; ASME Code classification; definition of the boundaries; and material requirements. Sufficient detail shall be contained within the document to provide a complete basis for design.

For Section III ASME Code, Division I: A document prepared by the owner or owner's designee which provides a complete basis for construction in accordance with the ASME Code, Section II1.

2.46. Desk Survey An evaluation of a supplier's quality control capability made from documented procedures and records of past performance.

Page 5 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.47. Destructive Test A test to determine the properties of a material or the behavior of an item which results in the destruction of the sample or item.

2.48. Deviation A non-conformance. Departure of a characteristic from specified requirements.

2.49. Discrepancy A non-conformance.

2.50. Documentation Any written or pictorial information describing, defining, specifying, reporting or certifying activities, requirements, procedures or results.

2.51. Drawing Manifest A document for transmitting drawings released for construction to an engineering, construction and/or production organization."

2.52. Erector An organization involved in assembling and building equipment or structures at the site.

2.53. Examination Specific actions by qualified personnel using qualified procedures to verify that items and fabrication processes are in conformance with specified requirements.

This term, when used in conjunction with qualification of personnel to perform quality-related activities shall mean a written examination.

2.54. Extended Quality Assurance Program (CPS Only)

The selected use of technical and management controls to improve the operational performance of equipment important to reliable station operation but not included in compliance based quality assurance programs.

2.55. Fabricator An organization involved in the manufacture of equipment.

2.56. Fabricator (ASME Section III Div. 2)

The NPT Certificate holder 2.57. Final Safety Analysis Report (FSAR)

A finalization of the preliminary safety analysis report prepared for the Nuclear Regulatory Commission prior to issuance of an operating license.

2.58. First Level Design Review A review conducted by the responsible project engineer within the design agency for a specific design discipline.

Revision 90 Page of 17 Page 66 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.59. Flow Chart A representation of the sequence of activities such as procurement, fabrication, processing, assembly, inspection and test, or the sequence of individual operations within one or more of those functions.

2.60. Hold Point A designated stopping place during or following a specific activity at which inspection or examination is required before further work can be performed.

2.61. Incident Occurrence of major damage, serious personal injury or significant schedule delay.

2.62. Independent Review Review completed by personnel not having direct responsibility for the work functions under review regardless of whether they operate as a part of an organizational unit or as individual staff members.

2.63. In-service Inspection A mandatory program of examinations, testing, inspections and control of repairs and replacements to ensure adequate safety in maintaining the nuclear power plant and to return the plant to service in a safe and expeditious manner.

2.64. Inspection A phase of quality verification that, by means of examination, observation or measurement, determines the conformance of materials, supplies, components, parts, appurtenances, systems, processes or structures to predetermined quality requirements.

2.65. Inspection and Test Plan A listing, with optimum sequencing, of all the inspections and tests required to be performed for a specific item, component, structure or service.

2.66. Interface When two or more organizations have responsibilities for accomplishing an activity, the functional relationship that one organization has to the others in completing the activity is called an "interface" relation. One example of interface is when one organization must perform a step, which is a prerequisite to another organization accomplishing its function. Interface can also mean that several organizations accomplishing similar activities are under the coordination control of one organization.

2.67. Interface control Consideration that components and structures are geometrically and functionally compatible and those materials are compatible with both process and environment.

Revision 90 Page 77 of Page 17 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.68. Item Any level of unit assembly, including structure, system, subsystem, subassembly, component, part or material. When ASME Code items are referenced, this means products constructed under a certificate of authorization and material.

2.69. Jurisdictional Boundaries The physical limits of an ASME Code item, which are identified to determine the applicability of ASME Code rules for that item.

2.70. Lifetime Record A record that meets one or more of the following criteria:

- those that would be of significant value in demonstrating capability for safe operation;

- those that would be of significant value in maintaining, reworking, repairing, replacing, or modifying an item;

- those that would be of significant value in understanding the cause of an accident or malfunction of an item;

- those that provide required baseline data for in-service inspections.

2.71. Like - for - Like Replacement The replacement of an item with an item that is identical in all physical and performance characteristics.

2.72. Local Purchase Order A purchase order initiated through the computer by a station for the purchase of only Company Stores Coded items.

2.73. Maintenance Repair, rework, or replacement of a structure, system or component with equipment of the same design, i.e., meeting the same engineering requirements.

2.74. Maintenance/Modification Work Package The complete set of documentation that enables the station to fabricate, examine, test and install ASME and safety related items. The work package consists of the work request, provisions for station traveler, document checklist and maintenance/modification procedures and supporting information such as, but not limited to, approved drawings, design specifications, and special process procedures.

2.75. Material A substance or combination of substances forming components, parts, pieces and equipment. (Intended to include such things as machinery, castings, liquids, formed steel shapes, aggregates and cement.)

When ASME Code material is referenced (this refers to metallic materials) which are manufactured to a SA, SB, or SEA Specification or any other material specification permitted by Section III of the ASME Code. For Division 2, refers to metallic materials, as well as to nonmetallic materials, conforming to the specifications permitted in Section III of the ASME Code.

Page 8 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.76. Material Supplier An organization which supplies material produced and certified by Material Manufacturers, but does not perform any operations that affect the material except when agreed upon by the Certificate Holder who uses the material in ASME Code construction or when so authorized by a Quality System Certificate (Materials). The Material Supplier may perform and certify the results of tests, examinations, repairs, or treatments required by the material specification that were not performed by the Material Manufacturer.

2.77. Measuring and Test Equipment (M&TE)

Equipment used to quantitatively generate or measure physical or electrical parameters with a known degree of accuracy for the purpose of calibration, inspection, test, or repair of plant mechanical, electrical, or instrument control equipment.

2.78. Modification A change to an item made necessary by, or resulting in, a change in design requirements (ASME - NCA 9000). A planned change in plant design or operation and accomplished in accordance with the requirements and limitation of applicable codes, standards, specifications, licenses and predetermined safety restrictions.

2.79. National Standards Standards maintained at or issued by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) or other designated institutions, and the values for natural physical constants and conversion factors recommended by NIST.

2.80. Non-compliance A failure to comply with a regulatory requirement 2.81. Nonconformance A nonconformance is a deficiency in characteristic, documentation, or procedure that renders the quality of a structure, system, or component (SSC) or activity unacceptable or indeterminate. Some examples of nonconforming conditions include the following:

- There is failure to conform to one or more applicable codes or standards specified in the UFSAR or procurement documents.

- As-built equipment, or as modified equipment, does not meet UFSAR descriptions or design bases.

- Requirements can not be substantiated with proper documentation.

- Physical defects.

- Test failures.

- Deviation from prescribed processing, inspection, or test procedures.

2.82. Nonpermanent Record A record that is required to show evidence that an activity was performed in accordance with the applicable requirements but do not meet the criteria for a lifetime record.

Page 9 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.83. NQA - 1 (ASME NQA - 1)

Quality Assurance Program Requirements for Nuclear Facilities. For ASME Section III activities, NQA - 1 is as modified by the ASME Code.

2.84. Nuclear Steam Supply System (NSSS)

That portion of the nuclear generating plant that provides steam from nuclear heat. It includes the reactor, its control systems, main coolant and steam generation systems, fuel handling equipment, emergency core cooling system and other safeguards, associated electrical equipment, instrumentation, spent fuel handling and radioactive waste disposal system.

2.85. Objective Evidence Any statement of fact, information or record, either quantitative or qualitative, pertaining to the quality of an item or service based on observations, measurements or tests that can be verified.

2.86. Operable/Operability A system, subsystem, train, component or device shall be operable or have operability when it is capable of performing its specified function(s) and when all necessary attendant instrumentation, controls, electrical power, cooling or seal water, lubrication or other auxiliary equipment that are required for the system, subsystem, train, component or device to perform its function(s) are also capable of performing their related support function(s). NOTE: Safe operation of the plant is determined by licensed operators.

2.87. Operational Tests Tests that are performed during the operations of the plant to verify continued satisfactory performance of safety-related structures, systems and components.

2.88. Personnel Access Data System (PADS)

A computerized and restricted access data system used by the domestic commercial nuclear power industry to share information necessary to process the applications of workers for unescorted access to nuclear power plants. This system is intended to meet regulatory requirements mandating that certain information be available to any power reactor licensee by retaining certain access information in a central computer database.

2.89. Permanently Installed Instrument and Control Devices The installed plant equipment including computer points used in determining acceptance criteria of Technical Specification surveillances (Category A and Surveillance Instruments for CPS).

2.90. Phased Replacement Where several identical items are to be replaced with a new model, they are replaced a few at a time to allow monitoring of the new items.

Revision 90 Page 10 of Page 10 17 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.91. Preliminary Safety Analysis Report (PSAR)

The initial detailed safety evaluation prepared for the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission prior to issuance of the site construction permit. The PSAR delineates design, normal and emergency operation, potential accidents and predicted consequences of such accidents and the means proposed to prevent such accidents and/or reduce their consequences to acceptable levels.

2.92. Pre-Operational Testing Preliminary testing prior to fuel loading and plant operation to assure that construction and installation are complete and to verify design and system functions.

2.93. Procedure A controlled document that specifies or describes how an activity is to be performed. It may include methods to be employed, equipment or materials to be used, accept/reject criteria and sequence of operations.

2.94. Proprietary Designs Designs engineered, produced and sold by manufacturers in accordance with their criteria and warranty.

2.95. Purchase Requisition The basic document describing a material, component or service that is converted into a purchase order for procurements.

2.96. Quality Assurance All those planned and systematic actions necessary to provide adequate confidence that an item or a facility will perform satisfactorily in service. For the ASME Code, Quality Assurance comprises all those planned and systematic actions necessary to provide adequate confidence that all items designed and constructed are in accordance with the applicable ASME Code.

2.97. Quality Assurance Program (QAP)

The Quality Assurance Program is the method for complying with the provisions of 10OCFR5O Appendix B for nuclear power plant systems, structures, and components that prevent or mitigate the consequences of postulated accidents that could cause undue risk to the health and safety of the public. The Quality Assurance Program is defined in the Quality Assurance Topical Report and implementing procedures.

2.98. Quality Assurance Topical Report (QATR)

A NRC approved regulatory document that describes quality assurance program elements for the operational phase of nuclear power plants. This term is synonymous with Quality Assurance Program Description (QAPD), Operation Quality Assurance Program (OQAP), and Quality Assurance Manual (QAM).

2.99. Quality Control See Quality verification Page 11 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.100. Quality Receipt Inspection Report A form utilized by station Quality Control to document technical receipt inspection of ASME Code and safety-related items received by the station.

2.101. Quality Related Activities which influence quality of safety-related items or work related to those systems, structures and components as identified in the USAR, Table 3.2-1, including design, purchasing, fabricating, handling, shipping, storing, cleaning, preserving, erecting, installing, inspecting, testing, operating, maintaining, repairing, refueling or modifying.

2.102. Quality Verification Those quality assurance examinations and actions that provide a means to control and measure the characteristics of an item, process or facility to determine or establish conformance to acceptance standards and specified requirements.

2.103. Receipt Inspection An inspection which verifies that items are in satisfactory condition, that they match the purchase order requirements and that required documentation accurately reflects the item(s) received. Visual and physical inspection will be performed as necessary to determine the acceptability of the item(s).

2.104. Receiving Inspection Notice (RIN)

A form initiated by the station upon receipt of ASME Code or safety-related items to record inspection for damage, to record receipt of documentation and to notify station Quality Control that item(s) are available for technical receipt inspection.

2.105. Record A completed document that:

- furnishes evidence of the quality of items or activities.

- furnishes evidence of compliance with regulations or requirements.

- is required by Technical Specifications.

Included are such related documents as drawings, specifications, procurement documents, procedures, operating logs, and reportable occurrences. Such documents may be originals or reproduced copies.

2.106. Registered Professional Engineer (RPE)

A person competent in the applicable field of design and qualified in accordance with the requirements of ASME Section III, Appendix XXIII.

2.107. Repair The process of restoring a nonconforming characteristic to a condition such that the capability of an item to function reliably and safely is unimpaired, even though that item still may not conform to the original requirements. For ASME Section III items, repair is the process of physically restoring a nonconformance to a condition such that an item complies with ASME Code requirements.

Page 12 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.108. Request for Bid Invitation made to suppliers or contractors to bid on a specific task for materials, goods and services.

2.109. Request for Purchase A generating station's document originated by supervisors or department heads that designates the required items and services and delineates the design specifications, applicable codes and standards, as well as, any special requirements. This document is the basis of initiating a Purchase Requisition.

2.110. Resolution (CPS Only) 2.111. The process by which a nonconforming item is corrected or determined to adequately perform its design function without adversely affecting safety. The resolution may contain controls or limitations that are to apply until the nonconformance is fully corrected.

2.112. Rework The process by which a nonconforming item is made to conform to a prior specified requirement by completion, re-machining, and re-assembling using previously approved procedural requirements. (For ASME Section III, rework is same as repair.)

2.113. Safety-Related Systems, structures and components, which are considered important to safety because they perform safety actions, required to avoid or mitigate the consequences of abnormal operation transients or accidents. In addition, design requirements are placed upon such equipment to assure the proper performance of safety actions, when required (Safety-related items are those designated Seismic Category 1, Safety Class 1, 2, 3, "Other" and Electrical Class 1E as identified in the CPS USAR, Section 3.2).

2.114. Second Level Design Review Independent objective assessment of a design by qualified personnel who have no direct project responsibility for the design.

2.115. Seismic Classification Plant structures, systems and components important to safety which are designed to withstand the effects of a safe shutdown earthquake and remain functional if they are necessary to assure:

- The integrity of the reactor coolant pressure boundary, or

- The capability to shutdown the reactor and maintain it in a safe condition, or

- The capability to prevent or mitigate the consequences of accidents which could result in potential offsite exposures comparable to the guideline exposures of 10CFR1 00.

(Plant structures, systems and components, including their foundations and supports, which are designed to remain functional in the event of an SSE are designated as Seismic Category 1 as indicated in Table 3.2-1 of the CPS USAR.)

Page 13 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.116. Significant Conditions (adverse to quality)

A condition, which if left uncorrected, could have a serious effect on safety or operability.

2.117. Source Acceptance Acceptance made at a vendor's plant prior to shipment of purchased items.

2.118. Source Inspection Inspection carried out at a vendor's plant prior to shipment of purchased items.

2.119. Special Process A process, the results of which are highly dependent on the control of the process or skill of the operator, or both.

2.120. Special Process Procedures Manual A compilation of Company procedures governing nondestructive examination and special processes such as welding and heat-treating.

2.121. Specification A concise set of requirements to be satisfied by a product, material or process.

The set of requirements may, also, indicate the procedure by which one may determine if the given requirements are satisfied.

2.122. Start Up Tests Tests that are performed after initial fuel loading and proceed through several power level plateaus to 100% power.

2.123. Stock Material Material which is or may be used for conversion to an ASME SA, SB, or SFA Specification or allowable ASTM Specification. As used in this Program, Stock Material is that material that has not been produced in accordance with an NCA 3800 QA Program.

2.124. Stop Work Collective term used to describe the following three levels of stopping work activities:

- The stopping of a single or specific work activity by NOS or Line personnel.

- A hold imposed by a Department Head on a department or general work activity.

- A Stop Work Action initiated by the NOS Manager.

2.125. Surveillance Examination of supplier's manufacturing, inspection and test operations and of records of work in progress. This activity is documented.

2.126. Survey A documented evaluation of an organization's ability to perform activities as verified by a determination of the adequacy of the organization's quality program and by a review of the implementation of that program at the location of work.

Page 14 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.127. System Safety Classifications (CPS Only)

Structures, systems and components are classified as Safety Class 1, Safety Class 2, Safety Class 3, Safety Class Other or Class 1E in accordance with the importance to Nuclear Safety. Equipment is assigned a specific safety class, recognizing that components within a system may be a differing safety importance. Definitions of various Safety Classes are:

2.127.1. Safety Class 1 (CPS Only)

Components of the reactor coolant pressure boundary or core support structure whose failure could cause a loss of reactor coolant at a rate in excess of the normal make-up system.

2.127.2. Safety Class 2 (CPS Only)

Structures, systems and components, other than service water systems, that are not Safety Class 1, but are necessary to accomplish the safety functions of:

1. Inserting negative reactivity to shut down the reactor,

2. Preventing rapid insertion of positive reactivity,

3. Maintaining core geometry appropriate to all plant process conditions,

4. Providing emergency core cooling,

5. Providing and maintaining containment,

6. Removing residual heat from the reactor and reactor core, or

7. Storing spent fuel.

2.127.3. Safety Class 3 (CPS Only)

Structures, systems and components that are not Safety Class 1 or Safety Class 2, but whose function is to process radioactive fluids and whose postulated failure would result in conservatively calculated offsite doses that exceed 0.5 remn to the whole body or its equivalent to any part of the body in accordance with Regulatory Guide 1.26.

2.127.4. Safety Class "Other"(CPS Only)

Structures, systems and components used in the power conversion or other portions of the facility which have no direct safety function, but which may be connected to or influenced by the equipment within the Safety Classes 1, 2 or 3.

2.127.5. Class 1E (CPS Only)

The safety classification of the electric equipment and systems that are essential to emergency reactor shutdown, containment isolation, reactor core cooling and containment and reactor heat removal or otherwise are essential in preventing significant release of radioactive material to the environment. (Structures, systems and component safety classifications and related Quality Assurance Program requirements classifications are summarized in Table 3.2-1 of the CPS USAR.)

2.128. Technical Review (nonconforming item)

A determination as to whether a nonconforming item will be accepted "as is",

reworked, repaired to an acceptable condition or rejected.

Page 15 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D 2.129. Technical Specification The design and performance criteria and operating limits and principles of an operating license to be observed during initial fuel loading, critical testing, start-up, power operations, refueling and maintenance operations.

2.130. Test Determination of the physical and functional properties of an item by subjecting the item to a set of physical, chemical, environmental or operating conditions.

2.131. Test Plan An outline, narrative description or flow diagram indicating the tests to be performed, the methods to be used and the points in the process where they are to be executed. It may be in the form of a test procedure.

2.132. Traceability The ability to verify the history, location, or application of an item by means of recorded identification.

2.133. USAR Abbreviation for the Updated Safety Analysis Report, which is the document submitted by the Company to the Nuclear Regulatory Commission in accordance with 10OCFR50.71.

2.134. Use -As -Is A disposition which may be imposed for a nonconformance when it can be established that the discrepancy will result in no adverse conditions to safety and that the item under consideration will continue to meet all engineering functional requirements including performance, maintainability, fit and safety.

2.135. Variation A nonconformance. Departure of a characteristic from specified requirements.

2.136. Verification The act of confirming, substantiating, assuring, and documenting that a task, element, or condition is implemented in conformance with the specified requirements. Two commonly used type of verification as are described as follows:

- Concurrent Verification is also known as "apart-in-action" because the verification is being done concurrently as the action is implemented.

Concurrent Verification is accomplished when two individuals verify the actions concurrently and apart from each other as they perform the task.

Concurrent verification should be used for any action that if performed incorrectly, could result in an immediate threat to personnel safety, nuclear safety, reliable plant operation, or for an activity that can't be verified after it's completed.

- Independent Verification is also known as "apart-in-time" because the verification occurs at some time after the action has been performed. An independent verification is performed at a later time by a second qualified individual who is not part of the initial job performance checking the Page 16 of 17 Revision 90

DEFINITIONS APPENDIX D actions previously performed by others. Independent verification may be used in cases were actions if done incorrectly, could significantly affect nuclear and personnel safety, regulatory or other issues important to safe and reliable plant operations, but would not result in immediate consequences.

2.137. Witness Points In a sequential operation, a notification to the Company, or its authorized agent, that a phase of work is about to be reached, so that it may be witnessed at a specific time, or in process, to verify acceptable performance of the phase.

Witness points may be established in the traveler, procedure or in the course of monitoring the work activity.

2.138. Work Instructions Actions to be completed by personnel while they are performing specific tasks in areas such as material controls and identification and fabrication or installation of equipment.

2.139. Workmanship That quality of an item expressing its skillful and artful manufacture, without apparent blemishes.

Revision 90 Page 17 Page of 17 17 of 17 Revision 90

CONTROL OF RADIOACTIVE WASTE APPENDIX E OR MATERIALS (SITE SPECIFIC) 1, SCOPE Measures shall be established and documented to assure that the requirements of the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 10, Part 71, Title 10, Part 20, and Title 49, Parts 100 through 199, applicable to the packaging and transporting of radioactive wastes or materials are satisfied

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General It is the Company's goal to minimize the generation of radioactive waste, consistent with the ALARA concept to minimize personnel exposures and environmental contamination. The elements contained within this appendix apply to Three Mile Island, Oyster Creek, and Clinton Power Station Part 20, requires that a quality control program be implemented to verify compliance with Title 10, Part 61.55 (Waste Classification) and Title 10, and Part 61.56 (Waste Characteristics). This Plan shall be implemented to the extent necessary to assure compliance with those Parts of Title 10, using a graded approach.

Subpart H to 10CFR71 identifies the quality assurance criteria applicable to the control of packaging to be utilized to ship radioactive wastes or materials. The portions of this Plan that relate to the criteria in Subpart H to 10CFR71 describe, to a large extent, the administrative controls and quality requirements to be applied in the control, packaging, and transportation of radioactive waste or material.

2.2. Three Mile IslandlOyster Creek 2.2.1. Procedures and administrative controls shall be developed and implemented to cover the following:

1. Processing of radioactive wastes, including the collection, handling and preparation for shipment of radioactive liquids and solids. These procedures shall be consistent with the ALARA program and shall clearly identify the administrative controls and organizational responsibilities.

2. Training and qualification of personnel operating radioactive waste processing equipment, health physics monitoring, packaging and shipping (which includes Waste Classification and establishment of Waste Characteristics) and other operations deemed appropriate by management.

Page 1 of 4 Revision 90

CONTROL OF RADIOACTIVE WASTE APPENDIX E OR MATERIALS (SITE SPECIFIC)

3. The activities associated with the packaging of radioactive wastes or materials shall include the proper selection of the receptacles to be used for containing the waste materials, the selection of the shipping containers (structures used to contain and support the receptacle and its contents), establishment of Waste Characteristics, radiological control inspections of the packaging prior to release, proper markings on the oUtside of the package, and the preparation of shipping papers and certificates. The activities shall be in accordance with 10CFR20, 10CFR61, 100FR71, and 49CFR.

4. Movement of radioactive wastes or materials within and outside the protected area to assure personnel protection at all times.

5. The shipment of radioactive wastes or materials from the Station shall be in accordance with the regulations of the U.S. Department of Transportation for the transportation of hazardous materials (49CFR) and of the NRC (10CFR71 and 10CFR20).

6. Design, fabrication, assembly, testing, and modification of packaging used for transportation of radioactive waste or material which exceed the limits specified by 10OCFR71 .10 shall not be performed by the Company.

Such packaging shall be purchased from an outside supplier and shall comply with 10CFR71 and 49CFR. The Company shall review and accept designs of packaging purchased from an outside supplier.

7. The packaging used for transporting of radioactive waste or material, which does not exceed the limits specified in 10CFR71.10, whether purchased from an outside supplier or designed by the Company, shall meet 49CFR.

8. Minimization of the generation of radioactive wastes through training programs, prudent scheduling and use of equipment and personnel, and good housekeeping practices.

2.2.2. The carriers to be used for transporting of radioactive waste or material shall be selected on the basis of their experience, knowledge of DOT regulations, control and maintenance of their equipment and the selection and control of their drivers. The carrier is required to have or shall be supplied documented procedures Covering acceptance of radioactive waste or material from a shipper, certification requirements, placarding, storage control, reporting of incidents and security. The Company shall review and accept carrier procedures specified by procurement documents covering the acceptance of radioactive waste or material for shipment.

2.2.3. Operations involving radioactive waste processing or radioactive material shall be controlled to minimize personnel exposures or environmental contamination, consistent with ALARA.

Page 2 of 4 Revision 90

CONTROL OF RADIOACTIVE WASTE APPENDIX E OR MATERIALS (SITE SPECIFIC) 2.2.4. Operations procedures relating to radioactive waste or material shipping and packaging shall be reviewed by Quality Verification to establish any necessary inspection points.

2.3. Clinton Power Station 2.3.1. Radioactive Waste/Augmented "D" Systems.

QATR Chapters that are applicable to Radioactive Waste/Augmented "D" Systems are I through 7, 9 through 11, and 13 through 18. Chapters 8 and 12 do not apply.

1. Chapter 4 - Specification of quality assurance program requirements for suppliers of radioactive waste/augmented 0 materials, equipment and services shall be on a case-by-case basis. Commercial grade or off-the-shelf items may provide an acceptable level of quality based on the nature of the item. This determination shall be made by Engineering personnel prior to issuance of procurement documents.

2. Chapter 7 - Suppliers providing material, equipment and services for Radioactive Waste/Augmented D shall be subject to source evaluation and surveillance. The extent of imposition of these requirements shall be determined on a case-by-case basis by the design organization responsible for review and approval of the procurement specifications.

Measures shall be established, and appropriate, for examination of products upon delivery.

3. Chapter 9 - Applicable to the qualification of welders and welding procedures (ASME Section IX)for Radioactive Waste systems.

(Pressure boundaries only.)

4. Chapter 10 - Applicable only to inspection of those items and activities affecting Radioactive Waste/Augmented D systems within the quality assurance boundaries as specified in the USAR, Table 3.2-1, and further amplified by the appropriate design drawings.

2.3.2. Packaging and Transportation of Radioactive Material QATR Chapters 1 through 18 are applicable to the packaging and transportation of radioactive material.

1. Chapter 3 - Applicable, design activities are not normally performed by CPS for radioactive material packaging, however, audits of suppliers establish that the design was accomplished under control of an NRC approved QA program.

Revision 90 Page 3 Page of 44 3 of Revision 90

CONTROL OF RADIOACTIVE WASTE APPENDIX E OR MATERIALS (SITE SPECIFIC)

2. Chapter 7 - Applicable, measures such as source surveillance and audits of records should be taken as appropriate to ensure that the design and fabrication of packaging were performed under the control of an NRC-approved QA program.

3. Chapter 9 - Applicable, special processes such as welding or nondestructive testing are not normally performed by OPS. However, if packaging requires major repairs necessitating use of special processes, e.g., welding or heat treating, measures shall be established to ensure that the special processes are controlled.

4. Chapter 10 - Applicable, visual inspections shall be performed upon receipt of packaging to ensure compliance with certificates of compliance.

5. Chapter 13 - Applicable, all conditions identified in a certificate of compliance when using packages shall be adhered to.

6. Chapter 16 - Applicable, measures are established for obtaining corrective actions from suppliers and for ensuring that follow-up is documented to verify that corrective actions were implemented and effective.

7. Chapter 17 - Applicable, records showing evidence of delivery of packages to a carrier and proof that all NRC and Department of Transportation (DOT) requirements have been satisfied shall also be retained.

8. Chapter 18 - Applicable, audits are performed on the supplier of packaging to ensure compliance with the certificate of compliance.

Revision 90 Page of 44 Page 44 of Revision 90

GRADED APPROACH (SITE SPECIFIC) APPENDIX APNI F

1. SCOPE The Company establishes measures that provide a graded approach to quality at Oyster Creek and Three Mile Island Stations. The extent to which the requirements of this appendix and its associated implementing documents are applied to an item will be based upon the effect of a malfunction or failure of the item on nuclear safety or safe plant operations.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. General The quality requirements for items within the scope of this appendix shall be established using approved procedures. Quality requirements will be established by the responsible organizational element and subject to assessment by Nuclear Oversight.

The need for special controls, and surveillance or maintaining of processes, equipment and of operational activities will be applied consistent with:

- The design and fabrication complexity or uniqueness of the item.

- The degree to which functionality can be demonstrated by inspection or test.

- The quality history and degree of standardization of the item.

The extent to which the requirements of the QATR apply to activities will be based, as a minimum, on Operating License conditions and other plans previously submitted to the NRC for approval, other regulatory commitments as may have been made associated with activities, the text of this Plan, the unit's Technical Specifications, and Appendix C of the QATR.

Such other plans or regulatory commitments include, but are not limited to, those associated with emergency planning, physical plant security, safeguard contingency planning, radiological controls, radiological environmental controls, fire protection, in-service inspection, in-service testing, licensed operator qualification and re-qualification, process control, off-site dose calculation, Shift Technical Advisor training, environmental qualification of electrical equipment, security guard training and qualification, etc.

2.2. Quality Classification The scope of the Company's QATR includes but is not limited to items and activities related to safe nuclear plant operation, protection of personnel, and protection of the public. To ensure consistency in identifying those items and activities within the scope of the QATR, a classification process has been developed and documented. This process relies on the use of the terms "Safety Related," "Augmented Quality," and "QATR Scope."

Page 1 of 3 Revision 90

GRADED APPROACH (SITE SPECIFIC) APNI APPENDIX F 2.2.1. Nuclear Safety Related or Augmented Quality Items

1. Items within the scope of the QATR are designated as "Nuclear Safety Related" or "Augmented Quality." A quality classification process for Items has been developed. This classification process produces a Component Record List, which identifies the permanent plant structures, systems, and components that are within the scope of the QATR and their specific classification. New Items to which the QATR applies shall be added to the Component Record List subsequent to their installation.

The classification of structures, systems, and components shall be subject to independent design review as part of the classification process.

2. Spare or replacement parts and materials are not necessarily classified the same as the component of which they are a part. Such parts and materials that perform or contribute to the performance of a Safety Related or Augmented Quality function are within the scope of the QATR and classified similar to the component of which it is a part. For procurement of spare or replacement parts which are of a different classification, the classification will be determined by Procurement Engineering. The determinations will be documented, retained, and subject to review and assessment.

3. The classification of items and consumable items (such as chemicals, radwaste liners, diesel fuel, etc.) and the technical and quality requirements will be specified, documented and approved as part of the procurement process.

4. The QATR may be applied to items, other than those designated as "Safety Related" or "Augmented Quality" as specified by Company management.

2.2.2. QATR Scope Activities

1. Activities within the scope of the QATR are designated as within "QATR Scope." Activities that are within the scope are those directly related to nuclear and radiological safety and protection of the public and are delineated below.

2. Support activities within the scope of the QATR are quality classification, operating experience assessment, design, maintenance of environmental and fire protection qualification, nuclear fuel management, procurement, fabrication, handling, shipping, storage, cleaning, erecting, installing, testing, repairing, training, welding, in-service inspection, heat treatment, document control, records management, access authorization and fitness-for-duty.

3. Operational activities within the scope of the QATR are normal, abnormal and emergency operation, chemistry control, core performance monitoring, shift technical advice, equipment control, surveillance testing, in-service testing, maintenance, housekeeping, fire protection, security, Page 2 of 3 Revision 90

GRADED APPROACH (SITE SPECIFIC) APNI APPENDIX F radiological controls, radiological environmental monitoring, radwaste preparation for shipment, radwaste shipment, fuel handling/refueling, technical specification compliance, and emergency preparedness.

4. Assurance activities within the scope of the QATR are assessment (audit, document review, monitoring, survey, and surveillance), inspection, non-destructive examination, and safety review. Individuals who are not directly responsible for managing or performing the work or activity perform assurance activities. Nuclear Oversight personnel perform periodic assessments of the "assurance" activities performed by other organizational elements (e.g. NDEIISI) to assure effectiveness and adequacy.

5. The above stated activities are controlled through the use of approved documents which are, as a minimum, consistent with the requirements of the QATR, the unit Operating License, specific Regulatory Guides to the extent listed and committed to in Appendix C of the QATR, the Final Safety Analysis Report, and other regulatory requirements and commitments.

6. A specific task associated with the above activities will be classified as within scope of the QATR depending upon:

- Statements within the text and the Regulatory Guides identified in Appendix C of the QATR.

- The relationship of the task to the safe operation of the nuclear plant.

- The relationship of the task to the protection of personnel from the effects of radiation.

- The relationship of the task to protection of the health and safety of the public.

- The relationship of the task to regulatory requirements and commitments.

- Other factors specified by Company management.

Revision 90 Page of 3 3 of Page 3 3 Revision 90

SUPPLEMENTAL APPLICATIONS APNI APPENDIX G (SITE SPECIFIC)

1. SCOPE 10OCFR50 Appendix B requires a quality assurance program be established in writing and executed for activities affecting the safety-related function of designated structures, systems and components to an extent consistent with their importance to safety.

2. REQUIREMENTS 2.1. Clinton Power Station (CPS)

The areas of Environmental, Fire Protection, and Security are specifically identified in Table 3.2-1 of the CPS USAR and/or highlighted in several Regulatory Guides that define and clarify its importance to the plant.

2.1.1. Environmental QATR Chapters 1, 2, 15, 16, and 18 apply to the Environmental area. QATR Chapters 3, 10, 11, and 12 do not apply to the Environmental area. QATR Chapters 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 14, and 17 apply to the Environmental area in the limited manner discussed below.

1. Chapter 4 - Applicable to procurement of monitoring services to be performed by contractors providing services dealing with radiological data and to radionuclide reference standards used for calibration of radiation measurement systems.

2. Chapter 5 - Applicable to all activities related to carrying out the radiological monitoring program including: sample collection; packaging, shipment and receipt of samples for off-site analysis; procurement, maintenance, storage and use of radioactivity reference standards; calibration and checks of radiation and radioactivity measurement systems; and reduction, evaluation and reporting of data.

3. Chapter 6 - Applicable to procedures and instructions required by Chapter 5.

4. Chapter 7 - Applicable to radionuclide reference standards used for calibration of radiation measurement systems and to radiological monitoring activities (services) provided by contractors.

5. Chapter 8 - Applicable only to radiological sample collection, identification, packaging, shipping, receiving, storage and analysis.

6. Chapter 9 - Applicable to radioactivity measurements of samples, instrument backgrounds, replicate samples and analytical blanks; data Page 1 of 3 Revision 90

SUPPLEMENTAL APPLICATIONS APNI APPENDIX G (SITE SPECIFIC) reduction and verification; computer program documentation and verification.

7. Chapter 9 - Applicable to laboratory instruments for radiation and radioactivity measurement, continuous radiological effluent monitoring systems and flow-rate measuring devices associated with radiological effluent monitoring systems.

8. Chapter 13 - Applicable to radiolog'ical samples only.

9. Chapter 14 - Applicable to continuous radiological effluent monitoring systems equipment only.

10. Chapter 17 - Applicable to personnel training and qualification; field and in-plant collection of samples; continuous effluent monitoring; sample receipt and laboratory identification; sample preparation and radiochemical processing; radioactivity measurements of samples, instrument backgrounds and analytical blanks; data reduction and verification; instrument calibration and calibration standards; computer program documentation; audits; and corrective action.

2.1.2. Fire Protection QATR Chapters that are applicable to the Fire Protection area are 1 through 7, 10, 11, and 14 through 18. Chapters 8, 9, 12 and 13 do not apply.

1. Chapter 4 - Applicable. Specification of quality assurance program requirements for suppliers of fire protection materials, equipment and services shall be on a case-by-case basis. Commercial grade or off-the-shelf items may provide an acceptable level of quality based on the nature of the item. This determination shall be made by Engineering personnel prior to issuance of procurement documents

2. Chapter 7 - Applicable. Suppliers providing material, equipment and services for fire protection shall be subject to source evaluation and surveillance. The extent of imposition of these requirements shall be determined on a case-by-case basis by the design organization responsible for review and approval of the procurement specifications.

Measures shall be established, as appropriate, for examination of products upon delivery.

3. Chapter 10 - Applicable only to inspection of those items and activities affecting the fire protection system within the quality assurance boundaries as specified in the USAR, Table 3.2-1 and further amplified by the appropriate design drawings.

4. Chapter 17 - Applicable to documents designated as Quality Assurance Records generated in the implementation of the Fire Protection Program and consistent with the requirements identified in Chapter 10 above.

Page 2 of 3 Revision 90

SUPPLEMENTAL APPLICATIONS APNI APPENDIX G (SITE SPECIFIC)

• Records are prepared and maintained to furnish evidence that the W applicable criteria discussed herein are being met for activities affecting the Fire Protection Program.

5. Chapter 18 - Applicable. Audits shall be performed and documented to verify compliance with the Fire Protection Program, including design and procurement documents, instructions, procedures and drawings and inspection and test activities.

2.1.3. Security QATR Chapters that are applicable to the Security area are 16 through 18.

Chapters 1 through 15 do not apply.

1. Chapter 17 - Applicable to those records required by the CPS Physical Security Plan.

2. Chapter 18 - Applicable to the physical security of CPS and designated records.

2.2 Oyster Creek Nuclear Generating Station (OCNGS) 2.2.1 Audits S1. Independent audits and reviews of Oyster Creek Environmental Technical Specifications (OCETS) will encompass:

A. Coordination of the OCETS with the safety technical specifications to avoid conflicts and maintain consistency.

B. Compliance of station activities and operations with the OCETS.

C. Adequacy of the programs and station procedures which are involved in ensuring the plant is operated in accordance with the OCETS.

D. The proper functioning in accordance with the responsibilities listed in Section 3.1 of the OCETS.

E. Proposed changes to the OCETS and the evaluation of the impacts resulting from the changes.

F. Proposed written procedures, as described in Section 3.4.1 [of the OCETS] and proposed changes thereto which affect the environmental impact of the plant.

G. Proposed changes or modifications to plant systems or equipment and a determination of the environmental impact resulting from the changes.

H. Adequacy of investigations of violations of the OCETS and adequacy of and implementation of the recommendations to prevent recurrence of the violations.

Revision 90 Page 3 Page of 3 3 of 3 Revision 90